JP2022147935A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a performance using a particular image.SOLUTION: The number of losing variation patterns (for example, 2) determinable if a CPU is in "a time-shortening state B" when a variable display result is "losing" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (for example, 3) determinable in "a time-shortening state A", and is smaller than the number of losing variation patterns (for example, 4) determinable in "a probability variable state", and average time (for example, approximately 2.2 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined if a CPU is in "a time-shortening state B" when a variable display result is "losing" is smaller than average time (for example, approximately 5.58 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined in "a time-shortening state A", and is smaller than average time (for example, approximately 4.83 seconds) of variable display time of a losing variation pattern determined in "a probability variable state".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach state. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode, as well as suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state. There is one that uses an image to change the suggestive effect to a highly anticipated effect mode. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive notice effect, a development destination notice effect, or an active suspension notice effect is executed by a present image displayed by opening a present box of the same mode. Further, for example, in Patent Document 2, by displaying information on the stock of accessories on the screen, it is possible to inform the player that an effect in which the movable body falls will be executed later as a strong advance notice effect. Have been described. As shown in Patent Document 3, in a pachinko game machine or the like as a game machine, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the game state is controlled to a normal game state, and the probability of determining a jackpot is reduced to about 1/300. When the number of times of the set and executed special game reaches 1000 times and no big win occurs, the game state is controlled to the variable ceiling probability state, and the probability of determining the big win is increased to about 1/100. There were things that were taken. Further, it is disclosed that when the 1000 game jackpot does not occur in the normal game state, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the variable ceiling probability state (see, for example, Patent Document 3).

JP 2015-134097 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50980 JP-A-2005-95449

However, there is still room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1-3.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
In addition to suggesting that it will be controlled to an advantageous state, there are multiple types of suggestion effects with different expectations depending on the mode of presentation (for example, a title display is displayed in a predetermined mode, and an active display is displayed in a predetermined mode). Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing production, dialogue production that displays dialogue display in a predetermined mode, decorative pattern production that displays decorative patterns in a predetermined mode, etc.);
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12);
By using the displayed special image, a special effect (for example, display of active display) that changes a suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect of changing the color from normal color (white) to blue;
state control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
with
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. and including
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. less than the number of possible variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed, and performs a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. (For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH and the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is stuck with the key image 030IWG12. -15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest. Furthermore, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the variable display pattern By reducing the number of types and shortening the average period of the variable display period, the digestion speed of the variable display is faster than in other states, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state and improve marketability. becomes.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big-hit determination table in characteristic part 030IW, and a variation pattern table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a variation pattern and a breakdown of variation time; It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each effect during the super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution time of each production|presentation in a super reach first half part and a second half part. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decoration symbol change pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of stock effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of chance up fanning production (false). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (suggestion) image and a keyhole (substantial) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 069SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction frequency|count determination table for every transition opportunity. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table; It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). It is similarly an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). It is similarly an explanatory view for explaining idle time (relief time reduction). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to battle rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to play time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a pole and a battle rush. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding the variable display count display and the special display count; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production|presentation regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction after RAM clearing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction after RAM clearing. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect for the case of reaching the relief time reduction with 900 variable displays after the big hit, and (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time reduction rush effect B. After a big hit, it is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding the case of reaching|attaining relief time reduction by the variable display of 900 times. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation operation example in case the number of pending|holding memories is 0 when it reaches|attains relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation operation example in case the number of pending|holding memories is 1 or more when it reaches|attains relief time reduction. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to the customer waiting screen; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to transition to a customer waiting screen as characteristic part 069SG modified example 1; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modified example of an effect operation related to transition to a customer waiting screen as characteristic part 069SG modified example 1; It is the flowchart which shows the timer interruption processing for game control as characteristic section 069SG modified example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing display processing as characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a characteristic portion 069SG modified example 3; It is a figure for demonstrating the content of various production|presentations. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a countdown notice. Similarly, it is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a countdown notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a pending|holding change notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a symbol chance eye notice. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of an effect display notice. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a pre-reading notice type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead announcement effect pattern determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a ready-to-win announcement execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button announcement effect pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character announcement pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body operation pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body announcement pattern determination table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining various operation examples according to game states. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A loss reduction non-reach fluctuation pattern, and (B) the loss reduction non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state B. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. It is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B. It is an example of the effect operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production|presentation operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing control operation examples in SP reach E, C, and D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram comparing super reach and non-reach out-of-reach; (A) to (C) are diagrams showing rush introduction effects, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the time-saving rush effect A. FIG. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the variable probability rush effect, and (B1) to (B4) of the time saving rush effect B. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 in the characteristic part 069SG; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a part of variable display start setting processing as Embodiment 2 in the characteristic part 069SG; It is a figure which shows a variable display effect|presentation pattern determination table. It is an example of the effect operation of SP reach D. It is a figure for demonstrating the characteristic according to game state. In the characteristic portion 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variable display time, and (D) is a second start winning opening at the time of a normal symbol hit. It is explanatory drawing of opening time. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation patterns according to variable display results; It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in a normal state; It is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in the probability variation state. It is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table in the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table in time saving state B. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the winning probability and the winning interval to the start winning opening. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ′, ε′, and ζ′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values η′, θ′, and ι′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ′, λ′, and μ′; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν, ξ, and π; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν', ξ', and π'; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting value for 10 hours of the pachinko game machine, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design value of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a normal state; It is explanatory drawing of calculation of the average fluctuation|variation time in time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of calculation of the average fluctuation|variation time in time saving state B. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of the calculation of the average variation time in the probability variation state. Time saving state A, time saving state B, is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation of the second special figure is executed in the probability variation state. Time saving state A, time saving state B, is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display of the second special figure is performed 110 times in the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 2 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 2 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 1 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 1 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, ( B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when the variation display is performed 1100 times in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic part 018SG; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a high base state. It is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot variation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. It is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the loss variation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing the character display mode in the SP reach production A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach production A to E, (C) is the BGM in the SP reach production A to E FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an output pattern of sound effects and sound effects; (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. It is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach production A~E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example until it develops into SP reach production|presentation after the variable display of SP reach (alpha), (beta), (gamma) is started. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation B and C. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of SP reach production|presentation D and E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a success button production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of movable body production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach effect A~E. It is a diagram showing an effect operation example of the loss notification of the SP reach effect A~E. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of post-production B. FIG. (A) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table A, (B) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table B, and (C) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 030IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a variation pattern table. Among them, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a big hit determination table used in the characteristic portion 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the jackpot is about 1/300 in the low probability state, and about 1/300 in the high probability state. It is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/30.

In addition, not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), for example, depending on whether it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol or the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol , may have different jackpot probabilities.

Further, for example, it is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. If it is possible to check the set value of or change the set value, the big hit probability may differ depending on which set value is set.

Also, a plurality of jackpot types may be provided, each having a different advantage. Specifically, according to the jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may differ. In this case, when it is determined to be a big win based on the random number for winning determination, the type of the big win is determined based on the random number for determining the type.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 030IW. Among them, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. The variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in the low probability state. A variation pattern table (not shown) having different determination value ratios may be used in the high-probability state and the high-base state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the case of deviation, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PA2-5 ( Super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), a variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

In this example, during the super reach after the reach is established, the stock effect of stocking the item (key in this example) and the effect of another effect using the stocked item (key) are changed (that is, the other effect It is configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit suggested by With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the super reach, and to increase the expectation for the stock effect and the chance-up effect. Hereinafter, executing the chance-up effect using the stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, super ready-to-win is a series of performances unfolded after ready-to-win is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) are not executed, during the super reach, the outpost of the battle effect. There are two parts, namely, a super ready-to-win first half part A in which a prelude effect is executed, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. Further, when the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, PB2-5 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) is executed, the stock effect is executed during the super reach. There are three parts: a super ready-to-win introduction part in which is executed, a super ready-to-win first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed together with a sentry effect, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. With such a configuration, during the period before the start of the battle production where the excitement of Super Reach reaches its climax, the stock production and the chance-up production are executed, so it is possible to gradually increase the production and enhance the production effect. can.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C), the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is executed is the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is not executed. The degree of expectation for big hit is higher than that of reach, and the degree of expectation for big hit is higher in super reach B than in super reach A. - 特許庁With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) will be executed and in which super reach it will be executed.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 8-1, for example, a variation pattern is provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed once or more times before the super reach, and the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. You may do so.

Next, the configuration of each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the variation pattern and the breakdown of the variation time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the elements that make up the variation pattern (which can be said to be an effect executed in the variation pattern) are "normal variation" that performs variable display in a normal manner, and ``Shortened variation'' that performs variable display in a shortened manner, ``Normal reach'' that performs normal reach as a reach effect, and ``Super reach introduction (stock effect)'' that performs a stock effect in the super reach introduction part as a reach effect, "Super reach first half A (no chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part A has a forward appearance, and "super reach first half B (with chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part B performs a guard effect and chance up effect. And, there is a "super reach second half (battle production)" in which the battle production is performed in the second half of the super reach, and a "blessing production at the time of winning" in which a blessing production is performed to celebrate the big hit. It should be noted that the example shown in FIG. 8B is not the only example, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo continuous effect may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not normal fluctuation, and includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element constituting the fluctuation pattern, and the total fluctuation time is 15 seconds. In addition, the variation pattern PA1-2 is a variation pattern that will not be shortened variation, includes "shortened variation" (5 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 5 seconds.

Also, the variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern that is lost after normal reach, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 20 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are variation patterns that are lost after passing through the super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and the super reach second half part, and the elements constituting the variation pattern are " The total variable time is 70 seconds including the first half of super reach A (no chance-up effect)” (30 seconds) and the second half of super reach (battle effect)” (40 seconds).

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are variation patterns that are lost through the super reach introduction part, the super reach first half part B in which the chance-up effect is executed, and the super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds), and the total variation time is 110 seconds.

In addition, the variation pattern PB2-1 is a variation pattern that changes from normal reach to a big hit, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) and "blessing effect at the time of winning" (20 seconds) as elements constituting the variation pattern. The variation time is 40 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are variation patterns that become a big hit after going through a super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and a super reach second half part. Total variable time including super reach first half A (no chance up effect)” (30 seconds), “super reach second half (battle effect)” (40 seconds), and “blessing effect when winning” (20 seconds) is 90 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are variation patterns that result in a big hit after passing through a super reach introduction part, a super reach first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed, and a super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds) and the “blessing effect at the time of winning” (20 seconds), and the total variable time is 130 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-2, the super reach A and the super reach B have the same performance time for the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. The rendering time may be different depending on the type.

(Execution timing of each production during Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the variation time (that is, the total performance execution time) is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the performance control board 12 side determines the stock performance and the chance-up performance execution timing based on the variation pattern. Or, the performance execution time is determined. However, although the details will be described later, depending on the type of effect, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, a variation pattern in which the performance timing and the performance execution time of the stock effect and the chance up effect are predetermined is provided, and the main board 11 side determines one of the variation patterns. may

FIG. 8-3(A) shows a case where super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the outpost effect is executed in the first half part A of super reach, and the battle effect is executed in the second half part of super reach.

FIG. 8-3(B) shows a case where super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, the stock effect is first executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the super ready-to-win first half part B, the chance-up effect is executed together with the outpost effect. Then, the battle effect is executed in the second half of the super reach.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, at maximum three timings of timings A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) There is an opportunity to stock items (keys). In this example, a maximum of 3 timings are provided as opportunities to stock items (keys) in the stock effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. There may be.

Also, in this example, in the first half of Super Reach, the title display (effect to display the title display), the active display (effect to display the active display), the dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), and the decoration pattern ( The "decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by each effect mode differs, and when the corresponding chance-up effect is executed, the mode of effect changes (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested increases). is configured as

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock effect, title display (effect to display title display), active display (effect to display active display), dialogue display (effect to display dialogue) A chance-up effect targeting either the dialogue effect to be displayed) or a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed once, and two items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect. , Title display (effect to display the title display), active display (effect to display the active display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of the two targets, and when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect, the title display (effect to display the title display), active display (display active display) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of three of 3 of the following: a line display (a line effect of displaying a line display), and a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern). Note that the configuration is not limited to this example, and the chance-up effect may be executed a plurality of times for one effect. In this case, the stocked items (keys) are released each time the chance-up effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in this example, the first to fifth timings ((1) shown in FIG. 8-3 (B)) are the timings at which the chance-up effect can be executed in the first half of the super reach. to (5)) are provided. In this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of Super Reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of Super Reach), but are common to any variation pattern (or type of Super Reach). may be the timing of

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. ) can be executed at the second timing or the fourth timing, and the chance-up effect for dialogue display (dialogue production to display dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing , and the chance-up effect for decorative symbols (decorative symbol effect for displaying decorative symbols) is configured to be executable at the fifth timing.

At which of the second timing and the fourth timing the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is to be executed is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect for title display (effect to display the title display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display) or decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a configuration, the timing at which the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the title display may be performed. (Direction to display title display), Dialogue display (Direction to display dialogue display) or Decorative pattern (Decorative pattern effect to display decorative pattern) Either one of them may be determined by lottery.

Note that the execution order of the effects that are targets of the chance-up effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be another order. However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be improved by the chance-up performance (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be changed to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win) as the order of targets for the chance-up performance becomes later. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed during the super reach, the stock effect is always executed. There may also be a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the game. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a variation pattern including a stock effect and a chance-up effect and a variation pattern including a chance-up effect without a stock effect are provided in advance, and the former is provided on the main board 11 side. When the variation pattern is determined, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance-up performance according to the modes shown in FIGS. When the board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance-up performance and the type of the chance-up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without executing the stock effect, the presence of the chance-up effect increases, and it is visualized that the chance-up effect will be executed in the future. The player can enjoy the performance while having a sense of superiority in the situation. Furthermore, in such a case, if the stock effect is executed in advance, the ratio of executing many chance-up effects is higher than when it is not executed (that is, the chance-up effect increases the expectation of a big hit. It may be configured so that it is likely to be high), the execution of the stock effect may be prioritized, and the execution of the stock effect may be expected.

In addition, in this example, the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are always present in super reach, but the configuration is not limited to this. By omitting it, the super reach introduction part may be followed by the super reach second half part, and the chance-up effect may be performed in the second half part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total effect execution time of reach with a high degree of expectation from becoming too long.

In addition, when setting an exception pattern that omits the first half of Super Reach, in the basic pattern that is not omitted as a premise, when developing from the first half of Super Reach to the second half of Super Reach, the boundary between the first half and the second half is related to Super Reach. It is desirable that another effect image is displayed in such a manner as to completely cover the effect image, or that the effect contents are clearly divided between the first half and the latter half. For example, at the boundary between the first half and the second half, an effect image or character related to the chance-up effect shown in FIG. may be displayed in such a manner as to cover all of them. Further, for example, the production contents may be divided such that the outpost production is executed in the first half part and the battle production is executed in the second half part, or the battle scene is displayed in the first half part and the character performs a special move in the second half part. The content of the presentation may be divided by displaying a final scene such as a draw. By doing so, even when the super reach first half part is omitted, it is possible to make the flow of production feel natural.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for the sake of convenience, the intervals between the stock timing and the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed are uniform. OK.

(Execution time of each production in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in Super Reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach.

Of the examples shown in FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the title display (title display is displayed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach (the timing of (1) shown in FIG. 8-4) effect) is executed, and a chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in FIG. 8-4). Then, at the fifth timing (timing of (5) shown in FIG. 8-4), an example of executing a chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) (of the chance-up effect to be described later) corresponding to the eighth effect pattern) is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 8-4 (B), the chance-up effect for the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) is executed at the fifth timing. An example (corresponding to the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect to be described later) in which the chance-up effect is executed for the decoration symbol effect displaying the pattern is shown.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second half of Super Reach, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body 32 moves before the end of variation (for example, when notifying that the game will be controlled for a big win).

In this example, there are two cases: a case where the dialogue effect without the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4A is executed, and a case where the dialogue effect with the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4B is executed. , the performance to be the target of the chance-up performance is configured such that when the performance mode changes due to the chance-up performance, the execution time is longer than when the chance-up performance does not change the performance mode. there is Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With such a configuration, when the chance-up performance is executed, a period for executing the chance-up performance and its target performance (for example, a period for notifying the change and the performance mode after the change) is ensured. be able to.

In addition, if the effect execution time of the effect is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up effect, the execution timing of other effects will be affected, so the amount of data related to effect control will increase and the processing will become complicated. There is a risk. Moreover, since the variable time (that is, the total performance execution time) is fixedly fixed in advance for each variation pattern, there is a possibility that the performance will not be completed within the time or that the time will be left over. Therefore, in this example, by varying the execution period of the movable body presentation depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up presentation, the influence on other presentations is suppressed, and all presentations are made to fit within the time period without discomfort.

That is, in this example, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. The effect execution time T21 of the movable body effect shown in 4(A) is shorter than the effect execution time T12 of the movable body effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the effect execution time of the chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) is common.

As the movable body effect, for example, the movable body 32 is moved from the initial position to the effect position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and is controlled to be positioned at the effect position for a predetermined period, and the image display device is displayed during the predetermined period. 5, control is performed to display an effect image or the like so as to emphasize the movable body production (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may move at the production position). When performing control to move to a position, the rendering execution time of the movable body rendering can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is positioned at the rendering position. By adjusting the effect execution time of the movable body effect in this way, it is possible to cope with minute changes in the effect time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With such a configuration, the production execution time of the production is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up production, while preventing an increase in the amount of data related to the production control and complication of the processing, and making all the productions uncomfortable. can be completed within the time frame.

Note that the adjustment of the performance time may be performed by, for example, a performance other than the movable body performance. For example, if the variable display result is a loss and the movable object effect is not executed before the end of the variation, after the effect image related to super reach is restored to the normal background image before the end of the change, a decorative pattern indicating the loss is displayed. may be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the time for which the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, in this example, the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the execution time is varied according to the chance-up effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a longer execution time than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. Although the details will be described later, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a higher chance of winning than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. can increase With such a configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed in a suitable execution time, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

Also, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, another chance-up effect targeting another effect is not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the chance-up effect with different targets is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 030IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 030IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 030IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , A combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the medium pattern is a special pattern exclusively for pseudo-ren (characters such as "NEXT" are written and numbers are written) It also decides what is not possible to constitute a jackpot combination). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a variation pattern including super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). Then, if the variation pattern does not include super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes super reach (with chance up), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the stock effect (step 030IWS804). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode after changing the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS806). After that, the process moves to step 030IWS811. The details of steps 030IWS804, S805 and S806 will be described later.

At step 030IWS811, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern and the determined effect (step 030IWS811).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 030IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the process of step 030 IWS813, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content determined to be executed is realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the stock effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804) will be described.

At step 030 IWS804, for example, the stock effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, when the variation pattern is super reach A (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-4, PB2-4, the first stock effect pattern determination table (super reach A) shown in FIG. By referring to it, one of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the effect result and the second to third effect patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the effect result is determined.

Further, when the variation pattern is super reach B (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-5, PB2-5, refer to the second stock effect pattern determination table (super reach B) shown in FIG. 8-6(B). , 1st production pattern to stock 1 item (key) as a production result, 2nd to 3rd production patterns to stock 2 items (keys) as a production result, 3 items (keys) to be stocked as a production result. Any one of the fourth to fifth production patterns is determined.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock effect. For example, in the first effect pattern, At timing A, one item (key) is stocked, and at timings B and C, no item (key) is stocked. For example, in the fifth effect pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. Thus, in this example, an opportunity to stock one or more items (keys) is provided at each timing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), each effect pattern of the stock effect is configured so that the proportion determined at the time of the big win is different. That is, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the number of stocked items (keys) and the timing of stocking. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the stock effect.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) to (B), the super reach A and the super reach B are configured so that the effect pattern of the stock effect that can be determined is different. Specifically, at super reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and at super reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which type of super reach the stock effect is executed.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to (B), the item (key) is stocked at timing A (in other words, the stock effect is executed) regardless of the effect pattern. It is configured so that at least one item (key) is stocked when the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having no expectations for the stock performance or not paying attention to the stock performance due to the case where the items are not stocked even if the stock performance is executed. be able to.

In this example, since the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when the stock effect is not executed, the player expects the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right patterns are tense and the middle pattern is fluctuating in the image display device 5), an effect suggesting that the stock effect will be executed, and the execution You may make it perform the production|presentation which stirs whether it is done or not. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" as a medium symbol may be stopped to shift to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal ready-to-win state, the medium pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed, and after the screen is changed to the super ready-to-win (white out or the like to cover the display area of the image display device 5), the super Instead of the reach first half part (outpost production), it may be shifted to the stock production.

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS805) will be described.

At step 030 IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance increase), and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the first chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach A: one chance-up) shown in FIG. do.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the second chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach A: chance-up twice) shown in 7(B), one of the fifth to sixth effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the third chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach B: one-time chance-up) shown in 7(C), one of the first to fourth production patterns for performing one chance-up production is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the fourth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up twice) shown in 7(D), one of the fifth to seventh effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, With reference to the fifth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up 3 times) shown in 7(E), the eighth effect pattern of performing the chance-up effect three times is determined.

For example, in the first effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed once. Further, for example, in the eighth production pattern of the chance-up production, the production mode of the title display (production of displaying the title display) is changed, and the production mode of the dialogue display (dialogue display is displayed) is changed. and a chance-up effect for changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) are executed respectively.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up effect is executed to incite whether or not the chance-up effect is to be executed. There are two types of chance-up stimulating effects: one in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect, and the other in which the chance-up effect is not executed. ).

In the chance-up fanning effect (true), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole (entity) ) the image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up inciting effect (false), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole The (substantial) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting the keyhole (for example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is deleted.

In this example, the chance-up fanning effect (true) is always executed before the chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth effect pattern and the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect for displaying the dialogue display). However, the chance-up prompting effect (false) that is not executed as a result is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the effects the chance-up effect is to be executed. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the chance-up effect is not executed and the stocked item (key) remains, the chance-up effect (false) is executed. You may do so.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (E), each production pattern of the chance-up production is configured such that the ratio determined at the time of the big win is different (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is different). . With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. In particular, it is constructed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher as the timing of change as the object of the chance-up effect becomes later (that is, in the order of decorative pattern change>word display change>title display change). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing and which chance-up effect targeting which effect is executed.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is not executed in the case of super reach A, and can be executed only in the case of super reach B. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of super reach the chance-up effect is executed.

It should be noted that not only the examples shown in FIGS. 8-7, but also in any kind of super reach, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect displaying the decorative pattern) can be executed. may be In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect is configured to be executed a maximum of three times. Further, the chance-up performance for the active display can be executed at both the second timing and the fourth timing so that the chance-up performance is executed up to five times. good too.

Next, the details of the processing (step 030IWS806) of determining the effect mode after the change of the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process will be described.

In step 030 IWS 806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the title display (effect for displaying the title display), the title display change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change. Further, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the active display (effect of displaying the active display), the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B) is changed. Refer to it to determine the pattern of change. In addition, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C) to determine the pattern of change. Also, if it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern), the decorative pattern change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change.

In this example, title display (effect of displaying title display), active display (effect of displaying active display), dialogue display (effect of displaying dialogue display) and decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying decorative pattern) , the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color tone of the effect image related to the effect. For example, it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue>normal color (white).

When the title display change pattern is determined to be the first change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the title display changes to the normal color ( white) to green.

Also, when the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the first change pattern, the active display changes from normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of Super Reach, and is determined to be the second change pattern. In this case, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, and if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing. If the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that changes the pending display (and active display), the effect pattern determined as the pre-reading notice effect at the time of the start winning (for example, the change timing and the display mode after the change are determined) ), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed.

When the change pattern of dialogue display is determined to be the first change pattern, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes to the normal color ( white) to green, and if the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first variation pattern, the decorative design changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the second variation pattern is determined, the decorative design changes to the normal color. The color (white) changes to red, and when the third change pattern is determined, the decorative pattern changes from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect, the tendency of the effect mode after the change is different according to the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up effect for the active display is configured such that the third timing after the first timing is more likely to change to a more expected effect mode. In addition, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns is executed later than the chance-up effect for title display, active display, and dialogue display, and it is easy to change to a production mode with high expectations. is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at the earlier timing suggests that the expectation is higher than the color displayed after the change at the later timing, it will be displayed after the change at the later timing. The effect mode (color) to be displayed may be re-determined so as not to cause a decline in the degree of expectation.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of a super ready-to-win effect including a stock effect and a chance-up effect will be described. 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of stock effects. In addition, in FIGS. 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock production (5th production pattern))
In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. A stock effect of the fifth effect pattern is shown.

Specifically, when the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, a decorative design showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, at the start timing of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the image display device 5 displays the title display of the stock effect "KEY STOCK" and "TIME". Note that the display mode of the title display may indicate the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock effect to be started later, or that many items (keys) are to be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in normal color (white), but when displayed in red, it suggests that there are more items (keys) stocked than when displayed in normal color (white). may be made.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during a special effect, etc., the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display, and corresponds to the special symbol. A small pattern KZ and a reserved memory count HS indicating the reserved memory count are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Next, when the stock effect is started, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "key stock TIME" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress. is displayed. Further, at timing A of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. .

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at the timing A. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 9(3), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 1" indicating that one key is stocked as an item, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), one key moves from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen and is stocked. A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the character A rides on a swing in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a display is performed in which the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 decreases. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 indicating the number of keys currently stocked is displayed.

Next, at the timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. . In this example, an effect display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is performed at timing A, timing B, and timing C of the stock effect, but the character A poses differently. Therefore, even if the effect for prompting the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times, the interest of each timing can be improved without boring the player.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, the key is not stocked at the timing B. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. 8-9 (7 ), an image with a close-up face of character A, a character display of "!?" The image shown is not displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect such as displaying a character image instead of the key when the key is not stocked, it is possible to alleviate the regret that the key was not stocked. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is equivalent to the case where three keys are stocked. Therefore, if the key is not stocked even if the button is pressed for a period of time, the presentation becomes redundant, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease. Therefore, when the key is not stocked in this way, the character image is displayed instead to liven up the presentation, so that the stock presentation is not lowered even if the stock number is small. It should be noted that the character image to be displayed when not stocked is not limited to one type, and may be varied according to the type of Super Reach to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the future development from the displayed character image, and to give the character image a dramatic meaning.

Since the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is performed when the key is not stocked (that is, indicating that the key is not stocked), the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is displayed. After the displayed image is erased, an effect display in which the stock effect progresses as shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the effect display when the item is stocked as shown in FIG. 8-9 (3) and the effect display when the item is not stocked as shown in FIG. A short period is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying an unfavorable effect for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed, and at timing C of the stock effect, the push button 31B is pressed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10). A character A prompting an operation, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at the timing C. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 10 (11), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 2" indicating that two keys are stocked as items, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display in which two keys are stocked by moving from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen (for example, a key flying from the left back side of the screen) A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

In this example, when executing the super reach with chance up, first, the stock effect is executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the first half of the super ready-to-win, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which the character A and the enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is mainly executed, and a chance-up effect is additionally executed. After that, in the second half of Super Reach, a battle effect is executed in which character A and enemy character B exchange swords. In addition, when executing super reach without chance increase, in the first half of super reach, an outpost production such as dialogue production in which character A and enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is executed, and in the second half of super reach, A battle effect is executed in which the character A and the enemy character B exchange swords.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the battle card for the battle production is "Character A VS Enemy Character B". are different) are provided, and the battle card is determined according to the type of super reach. In other words, the type of super ready-to-win is notified by displaying a battle card with a battle effect triggered by the pressing operation of the push button 31B. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation and tension when performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the types of super reach, the types of characters on the team side and characters on the enemy side may differ according to the degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, for example, if the production stage is configured to transition according to the game period or game state such as the number of fluctuations, the character associated with the production stage in advance may be one of the enemy characters (the production stage may be any one of a plurality of enemy characters associated with , or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock production (first production pattern))
Next, the stock effect of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, and one key is stocked as a result will be described. do.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transition of FIGS. 8-9 (1) to (8), as shown in FIG. A stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is a stock key is displayed, and an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (10), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (11). will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period passes), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

(Outline of Super Reach first half and second half)
Next, the outline of the effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach will be described. FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an overview of effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach. In addition, in FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introduction part (stock effect) ends and the first half of Super Reach begins, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1), the title display of Super Reach B with the words "Death Fight between Two People" is displayed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12(1), in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 stocked in the stock effect are displayed. In this example, it is assumed that three keys are stocked in the stock effect in advance, and the three keys are displayed in a manner of moving around the mini-character A. In this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as the mini key image 030IWG10 or the key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design showing "6" is displayed, and the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display. , and a small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

8-12(2), the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after the dialogue image 030IWG20 of "It's a game" is displayed, As shown in 12(3), the line image 030IWG20 of "I'll get back to you" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(4), the character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, and the dialogue image 030IWG20 saying "I won't hold back" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (2) to (4), when the outpost effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed on the image display device 5. An effect display is performed in which the ends of the display area are moved. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Here, when the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed in a manner overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. be done. At this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding one key is displayed beside the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Such an effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is the dialogue effect.

Next, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. ) As an effect display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12(7).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the dialog image 030IWG20 changes from normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12(8). With such an effect display, the effect mode of the dialogue effect changes as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the super reach first half part (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the super reach second half part begins, character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (9). A battle production where swords are exchanged begins.

Then, when the character A wins against the enemy character A, the characters "Victory" are displayed as shown in FIG. A combination of "666" decorative patterns is displayed.

(Chance up production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in FIG. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18. 8-14 to 8-18 also show portions of the chance-up effect that are omitted in FIG. 8-12.

FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect for active display. In addition, in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a prelude effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images. Although the details will be described later, the effect image related to the outpost effect is hidden by the effect image related to the chance-up effect at the timings of (13) to (14) in FIG. 8-15.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-14(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH targeted for the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14(5). Then, an effect display is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect and the target effect of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(7), a keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This kind of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up boosting effect being executed is the chance-up boosting effect (true) and that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-15 (9), and then reduced as shown in FIG. 8-15 (10) It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 while (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11, thereby enhancing the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, as an effect display of the key being stuck in the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15(12).

When an effect display is performed in which the key turns through the keyhole (ie, the key is unlocked), as shown in FIG. A character display is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the character A is displayed close up together with the effect image covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, whereby the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the sense of discomfort.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the character A and the character display of "pending rank up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost production is displayed, and the active display AH is in the silhouette state. , and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

In this example, when the chance-up effect for the active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 030IWC10>effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect>active display AH>image related to the outpost effect are displayed in higher layers in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is erased, and the active display AH changed from normal color (white) to blue is displayed. In addition, since one of the stocks has been released and the item (key) has been consumed by the chance-up effect for the active display, the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 that moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10 is one. It's getting less.

In this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed when the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is being executed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is acted on by the key image 030IWG12. to run. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Execute the chance-up production at . With such a configuration, when the chance-up effect using the key image 030IWG12 is executed, the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and turns around (that is, the key is opened). It is possible to enhance the performance effect and improve the amusement.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (for example, see FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when 030IWG11 is displayed, the chance-up effect for other effects is not executed. For example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, the chance-up effect for the dialogue display is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (that is, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10) are moved and displayed to create a chance-up effect. is executed, an effect display is performed in which the character throws the key into the keyhole. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A-image 030IWC10, and when the chance-up effect is executed, , to stop its operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Also, in this example, the appearance of the key is different between when the key is stocked and when the key is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right of the display area in the stock effect, and as shown in FIG. The display size of the key image is smaller in the latter case than when the key image is displayed so as to move. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the key image easily visible in the stock effect in which the key is the main focus, and to prevent the key from standing out too much in the outpost effect. For example, when the key is stocked in the stock effect, and when the character throws the key toward the keyhole in the chance up effect (the most enlarged state at the beginning), the display size of the key image is larger in the latter. You may make it With such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater impact when releasing the stock than when the key is stocked. Further, by giving an impact, even if the performance targeted for the chance-up performance has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to impress the player that it is a desirable performance.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up effect for decorative symbols will be described. FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects for decorative symbols. In addition, in FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an outpost effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position covering part of the upper display area of the image display device 5 .

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-16(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed. Note that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed in the chance-up effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in FIGS. It has a transparency that makes it possible to visually recognize the effect image), and the content of the super reach (that is, the outpost effect) is not hindered as much as possible even while the chance-up fan effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (5). Thus, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed to move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette state, and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-16(5) to 8-16(6), when changing the pose of mini-character A, the silhouette image is displayed once, and then the silhouette image is displayed. , the mini-character A image in the pose after the change from . In this way, instead of using material data that changes the pose of a mini character by moving it, the material data is simplified by switching the image with the silhouette image in between, thereby reducing the man-hours and costs required for production. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), a keyhole (substantial) image is placed near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). 030IWG11 is displayed. Through such presentation display, it becomes clear that the chance-up fanning presentation being executed is the chance-up fanning presentation (true), and that the object of the chance-up fanning presentation is the decoration pattern.

In this example, when executing the chance-up effect targeting dialogue effects, as shown in FIG. When executing the chance-up effect for the pattern, as shown in FIG. A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the corresponding position). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is preferably displayed according to the characteristics of the target effect. can do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), and then as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of moving away).

8-17 (11), a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as an effect display that the key is stuck in the keyhole, and an effect that the key turns in the keyhole (that is, the key is unlocked). As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17(12).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed, the left decoration design starts rotating in the left decoration design display area 5L, and the right decoration design is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the right decorative pattern starts rotating in the pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14), the character A is displayed close-up to hide the effect image related to the outpost effect, and the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the discomfort of being

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of characters A and B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the left ornament rotates to a position superimposed on the image. An effect display is performed in which the pattern and the right decorative pattern move. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left decorative pattern and right decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), when the glowing effect image around the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is erased, the normal color (white) changes to gold and the characters "GOLD" are displayed. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern with the display are displayed, and the effect display is performed in which the rotation of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining outpost effect is performed. executed. Since all the stocked keys have been used due to the execution of the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are not displayed thereafter, but a message indicating that they will not be displayed is displayed. No special effects are performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini-key image 030IWG10, which is no longer used, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of which production is the target of the chance-up production), at least a part of the chance-up promotion production is It is carried out in a common fashion. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5), the keyhole (suggestion ) The image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common mode in which it is initially displayed in full screen and then reduced in size. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, that is, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, and which effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can draw attention to.

In this example, in the chance-up effect, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of the type of target effect), the image is displayed at a common display position to be the target effect. It informs that the production mode of will change. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "holding rank up" or "design rank up" are displayed, and the production mode is Notify you of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the target effect changes in the chance-up effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15) and FIGS. It is not displayed at the timing when the mode of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the target effect is changed by the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the effect image related to at least a part of the multiple types of effects targeted for the chance-up effect has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. high. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some effects in any situation. In addition, for effects images other than some effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game such as dialogue display and title display), display priority is given to the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image. By making the intensity lower, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, an effect image or a character covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, a "suspended rank It is possible to display notification images such as character display such as "up" or "symbol rank up". Then, a production pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to FIG. In addition, a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the characters and the character display of "pattern rank up" remain), and when the notification image is displayed, the effect of the target effect is changed. Effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), the pattern in which the active display mode changes after the effect image, character, and character display of “pending rank up” are erased) , the chance-up effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the presentation mode of the target presentation changes by displaying the notification image, and the chance-up presentation can be suitably performed by the presentation pattern corresponding to the target presentation. can be executed. Especially for the former, by seamlessly increasing the chance while the notification image is being displayed (that is, changing the effect mode of the target effect), it is possible to make the effect more flashy. By performing a chance up (that is, a change in the effect mode of the target effect) after is erased, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to the effect control.

In addition, in this example, when the notification image is displayed, the effect pattern of changing the effect mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is different from when the notification image is displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the performance. Specifically, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation of a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the notification image uses an image that can specify which effect mode of the effect has changed, and is different from the effect image related to the effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the effects has changed in the effect mode.

Further, in this example, the notification image displayed during execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner covering the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is There are cases where the image is covered by the notification image and cases where the image is not covered, and the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit than the former. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. "Rank up" is displayed, but this notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decoration pattern. Then, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the chance-up effect, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the relevant effect image is not covered, and the latter is more within one variable display period than the former. The rate of execution at later timing is high. Specifically, the timing of execution of the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes is later than that of the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in accordance with the time when the expectations of the player are high.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the effect image is not covered. Switch to an image and display it. Specifically, when the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern is executed, after the character A image is displayed as shown in FIGS. ) to FIG. 8-18 (17), an image in which character A and character B stand side by side is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated chance-up production.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (fake) will be described. FIG. 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (false). In addition, in FIG. 8-19, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

FIG. 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the outpost effect in the first half of the super reach is started and the chance-up effect for the active display is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-19(1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are placed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up effect is executed. It is redisplayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are the targets of the chance-up effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern). The end of the display area of the image display device 5 is moved so as to pass through the display position. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-19 (1) and (2), before the dialogue effect is started, so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed (or the position where display is scheduled). An effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move. With such a configuration, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, it is desired to execute a chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position. The expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement can be improved.

In this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect are displayed at various positions such as the upper, lower, and lower right portions of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are Move through the position. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the position where the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are moved and displayed, and whether the effect displayed at that position is the target of the chance-up effect. .

Further, in this example, after executing one chance-up effect targeting one effect, when executing another chance-up effect targeting another effect, one chance-up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time elapses. After that, another chance-up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one chance-up effect and another chance-up effect to make each stand out, and as shown in FIGS. It is possible to secure a period during which the key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image The 030IWC10 has a lower display priority than the effect images (for example, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern, etc.) related to the effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect, and is displayed in a lower layer than them. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are not limited to such a configuration, and are among the effects that can be the target of the chance-up effect when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed on a lower layer than the effect image (for example, decoration pattern) related to some effects, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect image (for example, active display and dialogue display) related to other effects. good too.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during execution of Super Ready-to-Wear, and are effect images related to Super-Reach (for example, character images related to Senseki effect). ), but when the chance-up effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image relating to super reach is displayed so as not to be obstructed. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move at the ends of the display area without moving in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is not superimposed and displayed on the part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent interference with the super reach (outpost effect) while displaying the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (false) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3), when the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to approach the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. do.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the moving speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are set when the target effect to be used is not specified (or when there is a chance When it is specified (or when the chance-up effect is not being executed), it is a high-speed movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effect.

Next, an effect display in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks is started, but as shown in FIG. ) The image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "?" indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 has been deleted is displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up fanning effect is a chance-up fanning effect (false).

8-19(5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. It will be fixed. In this example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and after the chance-up effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. , displayed in a common initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the chance-up fanning effect (false) has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of restarting. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 can be displayed only once corresponding to the same presentation. For example, when a chance-up promotion effect (or chance-up promotion effect (false)) that agitates whether or not a chance-up production effect for dialogue display is executed once, the dialogue display is displayed after that. Even if it is, the chance-up fanning production targeting the dialogue display is not executed again. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestion effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are partly protruded outside the display area (that is, partly not displayed) when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. good too. With such a configuration, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with other effects such as effect images.

Further, for example, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5, an effect not targeted for the chance-up effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effects performed when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Also, in this example, since the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, the number of times it has been executed may be recognized. For example, when the first chance-up effect is executed, an effect image simulating a blue flame is displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and when the second chance-up effect is executed, the effect image is displayed. When the effect image changes to green and the third chance-up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the chance-up has been performed even after the chance-up effect is finished and the related effect image is erased.

Next, the keyhole (suggestion) image and the keyhole (substantial) image for each effect of the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (entity) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are a plurality of types of effects to be targeted for the chance-up effect, and the display sizes of the effect images related to the respective effects are different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in such a manner that the keyhole (entity) image is displayed at the position where the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (substantial) image is configured to vary according to the target rendering.

For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. The display size is smaller than the image 030IWG11. With such a configuration, the player can predict the target effect of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby improving the interest and target effect. By displaying the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 in a display size suitable for the display size, it is possible to produce a presentation that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common size regardless of the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. . After that, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed in a display size corresponding to the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

As described above, the characterizing portion 030IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in means 1 to 29 below.

(Means 1) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that suggests control to be in an advantageous state and has a plurality of different expectations depending on the performance mode. Types of suggestive effects (for example, effect of displaying title display in a predetermined mode, effect of displaying active display in a predetermined mode, dialogue effect of displaying dialogue display in a predetermined mode, display of decorative patterns in a predetermined mode) a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and a displayed special image. , a special effect (for example, changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue and a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect that changes to a normal image), and the special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed. Then, a special effect is executed in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, the active display AH or the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.). According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest.

(Means 2) The special correspondence image is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the suggested effect being executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)), and the special correspondence image is displayed, a special effect for suggestive effects other than the suggestive effect corresponding to the special correspondence image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, , The chance-up effect for dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the special corresponding image is displayed.

(Means 3) A special correspondence image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up stimulating effect (or a chance (False)) is executed once, the chance-up boosting effect targeting the dialogue display is not executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed after that). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes due to the special effect, the effect mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed later is more advantageous (See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing the special performance will be executed, and to prevent the player who expects the changing timing from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display stimulus effect executing means capable of executing a display stimulus effect (for example, a chance-up stimulus effect) for inciting whether or not the special corresponding image is displayed is provided, and the display stimulus effect executing means Regardless of the display position, it is possible to execute the display effect in a common manner (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 2, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed up on the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner, even when the target effects are different). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special correspondence image is displayed, that is, whether or not the special effect is executed, and also to pay attention to which suggestive effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can be made

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed in a display size larger than that of the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while being reduced (for example, FIG. 8- 15 (9) to (12), as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 moves from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Since it is displayed, it is initially displayed in a display size larger than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11, and then while being reduced (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away), it is stuck in the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11. (displayed as rotating). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special correspondence image, and to enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute the special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time according to the special effect to be executed (for example, in FIG. 8-4 (A) As shown, the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern has a longer effect execution time than the dialogue display or the chance-up effect for the dialogue display. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 8) The suggestive effect has a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the special effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B) Thus, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when the special performance is executed, it is possible to secure a period during which the special performance and the suggestive performance targeted for the special performance are performed.

(Means 9) The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a title display) and a second suggestive effect having a smaller display size than the first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying dialogue). ), and the special effect executing means, when the suggestive effect is being executed, performs the special effect in a manner of displaying the special correspondence image at the position where the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed. It is executable (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and the suggestion effect to be the target of the special effect is the first suggestion. When it is the performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestion performance, and when it is the second suggestion performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the display size of the second suggestion performance. The second display size is smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) is , smaller than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by enabling the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special correspondence image is displayed, and at the same time, the display size suitable for the target effect can be obtained. By displaying the special corresponding image on the screen, it is possible to achieve a natural effect.

(Means 10) Suggestive effect executing means provides a specific suggestive effect (for example, a effect of displaying dialogue) that displays a effect image at a first position, and a second position that is closer to the end of the display area of the display means than the first position. A special suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern) in which the effect image is displayed at a position (for example, a position near the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5) can be executed, and the special effect executing means is a specified When the suggestive effect is executed, the special correspondence image is displayed at approximately the center position of the effect image displayed at the first position (for example, approximately at the center of the dialog image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. (a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position), and when the special suggestion effect is executed, the position shifted from the center position of the effect image displayed at the second position toward the center of the display area of the display means is specially handled. Display an image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), display from the center position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C) A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the area). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display a special correspondence image according to the feature of the target suggestive effect.

(Means 11) The special effect includes a notification effect in which a special image is displayed at a common display position regardless of the position at which the special corresponding image is displayed to notify that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes (for example, , as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "pending rank up" and "symbol rank up" are displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special correspondence image is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted in the special effect changes (for example, FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the mode of active display or decorative pattern changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner of moving past the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4) and FIGS. 8-19 (1) to (2), the dialogue The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the speech image related to the effect is displayed (or the position where the display is scheduled). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectation that the special performance targeting the suggestive performance of the position where the special image is displayed is executed. It can enhance interest and improve interest.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-14 (5), FIG. 8-16 ( 5), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH or the decoration pattern display area, which is the target of the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special effect and the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (14) and 8-19 (2), The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, the active display, the dialogue display, and the decoration pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than them). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect executing means can execute another special effect targeting another suggestive effect after executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, and the other special effect is , one special effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one special effect and another special effect to make each of them stand out, and to secure a period during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image is moved and displayed is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when the suggestive effect to be used is not specified (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the movement speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are slow movement when the effect to be used is not specified. is fast when you are on it). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 18) When the special image is moved and displayed, the additional image is added, the additional image is also moved and displayed, and the additional image operates when the special effect is executed (for example, FIG. 8-14 ( 1) to (8), FIGS. 8-16 (1) to (8), and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is moved and displayed together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and the chance-up effect is performed. When executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner of moving around the additional image, and the movement is stopped when the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), FIG. As shown in 8-16 (1) to (6) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and a chance-up effect is executed. sometimes it stops working). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 20) The special image and the additional image are displayed during execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state, and have a higher display priority than the effect image related to the specific effect. Displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost production in the first half of Super Reach). ), and when the specific effect is being executed and the special effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility (for example, FIG. 8 -12 (1) to (4), as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move the part, and is not displayed superimposed on the face etc. of the character image related to the outpost production). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special image and the additional image from interfering with the specific effect while displaying the special image and the additional image.

(Means 21) Suggesting that a special effect will be executed, a first special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (true)) in which the special effect is executed after the effect, and suggesting that the special effect will be executed. and a special suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a second special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (false)) in which the special effect is not executed after the effect, and the special image is provided with the second special suggestive effect executed. After that, it is displayed again in the initial position (for example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the chance-up effect is displayed (false) is executed and appears in a common initial position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the second special suggestive effect has ended, and to express the meaning of the restart. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

(Means 22) The special effect executing means can execute the special effect a plurality of times, and when executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, another A special effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special performance being executed.

(Means 23) A rendering image (for example, a decoration pattern) related to at least a part of the suggestive rendering out of a plurality of types of suggestive rendering has display priority over the special image even when the special image acts on the special corresponding image. high degree (see, for example, Fig. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images other than some suggestive effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue display and title display), when the special image acts on the special corresponding image, Also, by lowering the display priority, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect executing means can display a specific image when executing the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. The effect image that covers the effect image related to the character and the text display of "pending rank up" and "pattern rank up" are displayed), and the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted when the specific image is displayed The first effect pattern to be changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and the "symbol rank up" display remain. pattern), and a second effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a pattern in which the state of the active display changes after the character and the display of "pending rank up" are erased), special effects can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes by displaying the specific image, and to suitably execute the special presentation according to the presentation pattern corresponding to the suggested presentation to be targeted. can do.

(Means 25) The degree of expectation that the special effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed according to the first effect pattern than when the special effect is executed according to the second effect pattern (for example, the mode of decoration pattern The chance-up effect in which the active display mode changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to specify which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed, and an image different from the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-15 (13 ), as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost production is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image. ” and “symbol rank up” are displayed), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is hidden by the specific image and a suggestive effect that is not hidden by the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-15 While the active display AH is covered as shown in (13), the decoration pattern is not covered as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13)). The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the suggestive performance to be hidden (for example, the chance-up performance in which the mode of decoration pattern changes is higher than the chance-up performance in which the mode of active display changes). (see Figure 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the flashiness of the special presentation, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 28) The special effect of the first effect pattern is executed at a later timing within one variable display period at a higher rate than the special effect of the second effect pattern. The changing chance-up effect is executed later than the chance-up effect in which the mode of active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect according to the time when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When the special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14) 8-17(15) to 8-18(17), an image in which character A and character B are standing side by side is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated special production.
Also, when executing various advance notice effects such as suggestive effects and special effects, it is preferable to perform control appropriately according to the game situation. For example, in the first special game state that is controlled after the end of the big win, it is preferable to increase the frequency of execution of the notice effect to give a sense of anticipation for the big win. By doing so, the player becomes interested in the big win and enjoys it. On the other hand, in the second special game state, the execution frequency of the notice effect may be lowered so that the big win can be won early. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest according to the game state. The actual machine control will be explained in detail below.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The game machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. Less than the number of possible variable display patterns (for example, when the variable display result is “loss”, the number of loss variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in “time saving state B” (for example, 2) is “time saving A part that is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "state A" (for example, 3) and less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability variation state" (for example, 4)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, if the variable display result is "loss", the CPU 103 determines in "time saving state B" The variable display time of the deviation variation pattern Average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and in the "probable variable state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation fluctuation pattern to be determined (see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is reduced and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the variable display speed is increased compared to other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
It is possible to variably display a plurality of lines of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C),
The starting order of the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common between when non-specific display results are displayed in
The time until the variable display speed of the decoration identification information of each row that started the variable display reaches the maximum speed is the decoration in the variable display that is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. When a non-specific display result is displayed without the form of variable display of the identification information becoming a specific form, and in the case of the variable display in which it is not decided by the decision means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, decoration identification It is different from the case where the variable display of information does not become a specific mode and the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the start order of variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is definitely variable State, when it is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state A and when it is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B, but the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, 5C are the highest. The time to reach the speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A (tb1 ~ tb2 < ta1 ~ ta3) part. See Figure 19-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state have the same variable display start order of the decoration identification information for each row, but the time required to reach the maximum speed is different. A different impression can be given for each and interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or form 1-2,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
The order of stopping the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. (For example, the stop order of variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed. If there is, it is stopped and displayed in the order of left → right → middle, and if it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time.See Fig. 19-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state differ in the variable display stop order of the decoration identification information in each row, so that different impressions can be given for each state, and interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
The order of stopping the variable display of the decoration identification information in each row is determined if the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is the specific mode in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common between when non-specific display results are displayed in
In the first special state, it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state during the time from when the decoration identification information of one of the plurality of columns is stop-displayed until when the next decoration identification information is stop-displayed. In the variable display, a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the decoration identification information being a specific mode, and in the second special state, the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state. In the display, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed instead of the specific mode (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, 5C is stopped. The order is common in the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A and the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B, but among the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, 5C The time from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display area of 1 to when the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is the probability change state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. It may be different depending on whether it is a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the time from when the first decoration identification information is stop-displayed to when the next decoration identification information is stop-displayed differs between the first special state and the second special state. It can give a different impression and increase interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
Equipped with output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
1, the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state; and when a non-specific display result is displayed in the second special state, and in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. When the non-specific display result is displayed, it is different (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is a non-reach variation pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A, left, middle, Since the right is stopped and displayed at different timings, it is three times, and if it is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is once. 19-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and different impressions can be given for each state by the different number of times the stop sound is output between the first special state and the second special state. can increase interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
Equipped with output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
1, the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the first special state; and when a non-specific display result is displayed in the second special state, and in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. When the non-specific display result is displayed, it is common (for example, the number of output times of the symbol stop sound in the variable display of 1 is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state It may be common to the case where it is a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and the development cost can be reduced by sharing the number of times the stop sound is output between the first special state and the second special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The decoration identification information is stopped when the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a variable display in which a non-specific display result is displayed without being in a specific mode when the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state. a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when displayed,
When the decoration identification information is statically displayed in the first special state, the specific action display is executed, and when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in the second special state, the specific action display is not executed (for example, If it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and time saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed, whereas if it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B, a specific action display (symbol stop Action) is not performed (see Figures 19-51 to 19-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to realize a smooth variable display by not executing the specific action display in the second special state while increasing the performance effect with the specific action display in the first special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The decoration identification information is stopped when the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a variable display in which a non-specific display result is displayed without being in a specific mode when the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state. a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when displayed,
The display mode of the specific action display is common to the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, Specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case of non-reach loss variation pattern in probability variable state, time saving state A and non-reach loss variation pattern in time saving state B, in specific action display While increasing the production effect, the part that makes the specific action display mode common between the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B. See Figures 19-51 to 19-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the mode of the specific action display between the first special state and the second special state while enhancing the effect of the specific action display.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
The decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and the predetermined identification information (for example, small pattern) different from the decoration identification information can be synchronized and variably displayed,
The period from when the identification information is stop-displayed to when the predetermined identification information is stop-displayed is the variable display of the decoration identification information when the decision means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the case of the variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed instead of the specific mode, the decoration identification information is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. (For example, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped to when the small pattern is stopped is , If the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B is shorter than the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)} part, see Figure 19-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
A minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed with the variable display of 1 in the first special state to when the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the next variable display, and the variable of 1 in the second special state. The minimum period from the stop display of the decoration identification information to the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the next variable display is common (for example, the variable display of 1 in the probability variable state and the time saving state A In the pattern fixed period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the next variable display, and the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B. is the minimum period from the stop display until the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the next variable display, which is the minimum period (tb4 to tb5), is a common part (see Fig. 19-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control in consideration of the drawing process until the decoration identification information is completely stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, when the variable display result is "no") CPU 103 determinable loss variation pattern in "time saving state B" (e.g., "non-reach A") and determinable loss variation pattern in "time saving state A" and "probability change state" (e.g., "non-reach A" ) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The game machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of possible variable display patterns and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (for example, two) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (eg, three), and the deviation that can be determined in the "probability variation state" less than the number of variation patterns (for example, 4)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "off"). The average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time reduction state B" is the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time reduction state A" A portion that is less than the average time (eg, about 5.58 seconds) of and less than the average time (eg, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "variable state". -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is reduced and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the variable display speed is increased compared to other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, CPU 103 determinable loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and determinable loss variable display pattern in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state (e.g., non-reach, SP Reach D) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1 or form 2-2,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in both the first special state and the third special state when it is a variable display that is not determined to be displayed is common (for example, the CPU 103 is in a time saving state Determinable loss fluctuation pattern in B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and determinable loss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) in both the time saving state A and probability variable state are common some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The average period of the control periods controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state is Shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, the probability variable The average time of the control period controlled to the state is preferably shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, so that the variable display speed is increased, thereby providing a suitable second special state. In the first special state, the average period of the control period is lengthened, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state. The number of deviation fluctuation patterns that can be determined in state B (for example, two) is less than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time saving state A (for example, three), and the deviation fluctuation that can be determined in time saving state A The number of patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns (eg, 4) in the probability variation state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced in the second special state to prioritize the use of variable display, while the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased in the third special state. can enhance the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of Form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot" (for example, one) is " Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns in the 'probability variation state' (for example, 3)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in 1 special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "variable probability state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since control is performed in an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for executing variable display of identification information and the amount of game value given in the advantageous state after the variable display part is completed. including a post-production part that notifies the game value information that can be specified,
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the post-production part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-production part in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state While the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B are different, the pattern confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state A and the probability change state ) and the pattern confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B are common parts.See FIGS. 19-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for executing variable display of identification information and the amount of game value given in the advantageous state after the variable display part is completed. including a post-production part that notifies the game value information that can be specified,
Display means capable of executing a specific action display for causing the identification information to perform a specific action when the identification information is stopped and displayed during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. with
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific action display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific action display in the second special state are common (for example, variable display of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state While different from the time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the display time of the big hit specific action display of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (ta3 to ta4) And the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific action display in the time saving state B is a common part.See FIGS. 19-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state and the second special state. can.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-14,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state is common (for example, the variable display result is a "jackpot" In the case, the CPU 103 is determinable in the "time saving state B" loss variation pattern (eg, "SP reach D") and determinable loss variation pattern (eg, "SP reach D") in the "variable state" common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is It is less than the number of determinable variable display patterns and less than the number of determinable variable display patterns in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 is set to "time saving state B" The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in ``time saving state A'' (for example, 2), and can be determined in ``variable probability state'' less than the number of outlier variation patterns (for example, 3),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit" The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A". A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "variable probability state". 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since control is performed in an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-6,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled is common ( For example, the big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, the probability variable state) (for example, the big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in the time saving state B) , SP reach D) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-7,
a variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state by the variable display pattern determining means when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; At least part of the variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled ( For example, the big hit variation pattern that can be determined in the time saving state B by the CPU 103 (for example, without SP) and the big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, without SP) are common. some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

The gaming machine of form 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-8,
The average period of the control periods controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control periods controlled to the third special state is Shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, the probability variable The part that makes the average time of the control period controlled to the state shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, so that the variable display speed is increased, thereby providing a suitable second special state. In the first special state, the average period of the control period is lengthened, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 2-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-9,
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, if the CPU 103 The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state B (eg, 1) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (eg, 2), and the jackpot that can be determined in the time saving state A. The number of variation patterns (eg, 2) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns (eg, 3) that can be determined in the probability variation state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced in the second special state to prioritize the use of variable display, while the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased in the third special state. can enhance the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of form 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a specific mode (for example, reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (such as "SP reach A to E lost") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the result of the missing display) after becoming, and the variable of the decorative identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out" etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being the specific mode,
In the second special state, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specified variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is higher (for example, in "time saving state B" The ratio (for example, 97%) of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" is when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A". Higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) in which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103, and when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probability variation state", the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach variation pattern". is higher than the percentage (eg, 95%) for which is determined, see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control to the advantageous state. By setting the aspect of the variable display to the specific aspect, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to be mischievous.

The gaming machine of form 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the first non-specific variable display pattern during the period from when the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the second non-specific variable display pattern to when the display is stopped. From the form of variable display is shorter than the period until it becomes the specific form (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out variation pattern is better, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the super reach out variation pattern A portion shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIGS. 19-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to variably display multiple rows of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns),
In the second non-specified variable display pattern, the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined row out of the plurality of columns to the stop display is longer in the first non-specified variable display pattern. A period shorter than the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information of the predetermined row to the stop display (for example, in the non-reach-out variation pattern, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the left decoration design display area 5L is started. The period from to stop display (tb0 to tb1) is the period (tb0 ∼ tb2), see Fig. 19-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined row is finished in a short period of time, so that the second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-18,
The second unspecified variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state and the second unspecified variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common ( For example, the CPU 103 is determinable non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (e.g., non-reach), non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and probability change state and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of Form 2-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 1-10,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is a specific mode (for example, reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (such as "SP reach A to E lost") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the result of the missing display) after becoming, and the variable of the decorative identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out" etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being the specific mode,
In the second special state, when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the second non-specified variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. is higher than the rate at which the second unspecified variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state, and the determination in the third special state Higher than the rate at which the second unspecified variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by means (for example, the variable display result in the "time saving state B" The ratio (for example, 97%) at which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "missing" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A" Higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) at which the non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined, and the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "variable probability state". higher than the proportion (eg, 95%) of the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period during which the advantageous state was not controlled continued for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control to the advantageous state. By setting the aspect of the variable display to the specific aspect, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to be mischievous.

The gaming machine of form 2-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-11,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state, and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The specific variable display pattern is common (for example, the CPU 103 can decide in at least one of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) in the time saving state B and the time saving state A and the probability change state. non-reach and out-of-reach variation patterns (e.g., non-reach) are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-12,
The second unspecified variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state, and the second unspecified variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. And are common (e.g., CPU 103 is determinable non-reach loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach), and determinable non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) and the part that is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of Form 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-19,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means, in the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the special A first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of variable display of identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the display result of variable display of identification information,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is determined in the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is higher (for example, the reach mode in the time saving state B The ratio (for example, 90%) that does not go through the "SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" is determined is the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A ” is determined (eg, 5%), and the percentage (eg, 5%) where the “non-SP A jackpot variation pattern” that does not go through the reach mode in the probability variation state is determined. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, by setting the aspect of the variable display to a specific aspect, it is possible to control to an advantageous state without being mischievous, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
A first specific action display for performing a specific action on the decoration identification information when the variable display mode is the specific mode, and a second specific action display (for example, symbol stop action display) and a display means capable of executing,
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific action display and the second specific action display are performed by the display means. The second specific action display is executed without executing the action display (for example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach E via reach, reach specific action display and big hit specific action display are executed, but reach In the variation pattern of the SP reach D that does not go through, the part where the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed (see FIGS. 19-55),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the first specific action in the second special state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, and thus a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (for example, CPU103 determinable non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) in time saving state B, and non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) determinable in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state, is the common part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B), and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state and a third special state (e.g., variable probability state) that is controlled when is finished,
The variable display pattern determining means, in the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the special A first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of variable display of identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) A second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via A", etc.) that displays the display result of variable display of identification information can be determined,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is determined in the first special state. is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when it is the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the determination in the third special state If the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the means, the ratio is higher than the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, "SP reach D The ratio (for example, 90%) of determining the "jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is the ratio of determining the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A ( For example, 5%) and higher than the ratio (for example, 5%) in which the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the variable probability state is determined (see FIGS. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In the above, by setting the aspect of the variable display to a specific aspect, it is possible to control to an advantageous state without being mischievous, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-14,
The second specific variable display pattern determinable by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second specific variable determinable in at least one of the first special state and the third special state The display pattern is common (for example, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP non-through) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time saving state B, and the time saving state A and the probability change state. Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, SP non-via) and common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state; the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state; is common (for example, CPU 103 can determine non-reach jackpot variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., without SP) and non-reach loss variation pattern (e.g., SP non-via) and the part that is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of Form 1-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-22,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determination means may control to the advantageous state by the determination means that no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state and the second special state. In the case of variable display that is not determined, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period that can store reserved storage in the second reserved storage means can be determined,
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and the predetermined variable display in the second special state. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, the suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state A" and when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "variable probability state", "movable body notice", "character notice", etc. in the variable display On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", "movable body notice" or A part that does not execute a suggestive effect such as "character notice" (see Fig. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is performed by the suggestive effect. Since there is no mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, when it is a variable display in which it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is not executed by the effect executing means, and the determining means controls to the advantageous state. If it is a variable display determined to However, if it is a big hit variation pattern, "movable body notice" or "character notice" may be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to perform variable display of decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern for displaying the display result of the variable display after the variable display mode of the decoration identification information becomes a specific mode,
The suggestive effect includes a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode becomes a specific mode (for example, the suggestive effect suggesting that the state of the variable display is controlled to the jackpot game state is the ready-to-win mode of the variable display mode. Whether or not (whether or not reach is established) may include "reach notice" and "button notice" as an inciting effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-25,
The effect executing means, based on the determination result of the determining means, a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the first suggestive effect is executed, (For example, based on the variable display result, the first suggestive effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)), and the first suggestive effect is executed A portion that can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), which has a high rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state, thereby increasing interest.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "movable body notice" or "character notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determination means determines that no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and Determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved storage means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to a state. is possible and
The effect execution means performs the variable display when the variable display is performed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is performed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state. The suggestive effect can be executed in the display, and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state, the suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, "time saving state A" When variable display is performed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in , and variable display is performed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in the "probable variable state" When executed, a suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while a deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in , the part that does not execute the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" in the variable display (see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is performed by the suggestive effect. Since there is no mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of Form 1-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-26,
Based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole), variable display of identification information (for example, decoration pattern) is performed, and an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Reservation storage means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information (for example, effect control command) about the game;
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, an effect executing means (for example, , a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading notice effect),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The effect execution means selects one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (e.g., "countdown notice", "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice"). is determinable and
The number of pre-reading forewarning effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means can be determined in the first special state. less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state B” (for example, 0 pieces) is When the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A", the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller, and the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state". The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 in the case (for example, 4) less than the part),
In the second special state, when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed is determined by the determining means in the first special state. It is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" (for example , 0%) is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state A" (for example, 30%), and when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" A portion lower than the execution rate of prefetching notice (for example, 40%). See FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Since the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the pre-reading notice performance is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-27,
A first pre-reading notice effect pattern as a pre-reading notice effect pattern commonly executable by the effect executing means in the first special state and the second special state, and a case where the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed. There is also a second pre-reading announcement effect pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, time saving state A and time saving state As a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance notice”, “effect display notice” "blue" pattern), and a second prefetching notice effect pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance eye Notice”, “Red” pattern of “effect display notice”), and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 19-43 (D)) , The rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 19-43 (C)) Lower portion),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely that the first pre-reading announcement effect will cause the player to be mischievous, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-28,
A first pre-reading notice effect pattern as a pre-reading notice effect pattern commonly executable by the effect executing means in the first special state and the second special state, and a case where the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed. There is also a second pre-reading announcement effect pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the second prefetching notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second prefetching notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, time saving state A and time saving state As a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance notice”, “effect display notice” "blue" pattern), and a second prefetching notice effect pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance eye Notice”, “Red” pattern of “effect display notice”), and the rate at which the second pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 19-43 (D)) , Rate of execution of the second pre-reading notice effect pattern in time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 19-43 (C)) portion higher than),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the second look-ahead forewarning effect is likely to be executed, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect execution means in the first special state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect execution means in the second special state are common (for example, time saving state A And the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable probability state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, "symbol chance eye notice"). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead foretelling effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of Form 2-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 1-17,
Based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole), variable display of identification information (for example, decoration pattern) is performed, and an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled by
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Reservation storage means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information (for example, effect control command) about the game;
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, an effect executing means (for example, , a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the pre-reading notice effect),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The effect execution means selects one of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effect patterns (e.g., "countdown notice", "holding change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice"). is determinable and
The number of pre-reading forewarning effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means can be determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns and is less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, if the variable display result is wrong in the "time saving state B", it is for effect control The number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the CPU 120 (for example, 0) is the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state A” (for example, 3 pieces) and less than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “variable probability state” (for example, 4) Part),
In the second special state, when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed is determined by the determining means in the first special state. is a variable display that is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead forewarning effect is executed when it is not decided to control to the advantageous state by the deciding means in the third special state. (For example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the "time-saving state A" is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost (for example, 30%), and the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" (for example, 40% ), see Figures 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, in the variable display in which control to the advantageous state is not decided. Since the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the pre-reading notice performance is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-18,
Said pre-reading forewarning effect pattern which can be determined by said effect executing means in said second special state, and said pre-reading forewarning effect which can be determined by said effect executing means in at least one of said first special state and said third special state. The pattern is common (for example, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B, and the effect control CPU 120 in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state The pre-reading that can be determined The notice effect pattern is common (for example, "symbol chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead foretelling effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-19,
The pre-reading forewarning effect pattern that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state, and the pre-reading forewarning effect pattern that can be determined by the effect executing means in both the first special state and the third special state are: Common (for example, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B, and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in both the time saving state A and the probability variable state are common There is (for example, "pattern chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of said pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by said effect executing means in said second special state is smaller than the number of said pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by said effect executing means in said first special state. The number of the pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in one special state is smaller than the number of the pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the third special state (for example, "time saving The number of types of pre-reading notices (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in state B” is the effect when the variable display result is lost in “time saving state A”. The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state". (e.g. less than 4 pieces),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable pre-reading forewarning effect patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable pre-reading forewarning effect patterns is increased. By doing so, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of Form 1-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, "time saving state B ”The execution ratio of the button notice per variable display (for example, 10% in the big hit, 5% in the loss) is the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in “Time saving state A” (for example, in the 80%, 20% for loss) and lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display of 1 in the “variable state” (for example, 80% for big hit, 30% for loss). 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times the player is prompted to perform an action in the variable display of 1 is taken into consideration that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-32 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the motion promoting effect is executed by the effect executing means is determined by the determining means as the advantageous state. When it is a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to a state, the rate at which the action promotion effect is executed by the effect execution means is higher (for example, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control The ratio (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 for display is higher than the ratio (for example, 5%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost. high part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the fact that the action promoting effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-33 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-32,
As action promotion effect patterns executable by the effect executing means, a first action promotion effect pattern and a second action promotion effect pattern with a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first action promotion effect pattern is executed. There is a production pattern and
The rate at which the second action promotion effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second action promotion effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, a "button notice" effect As a pattern, there is a "hit" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "hit" pattern is executed, and in the time saving state B " The percentage of execution of the pattern (eg, 10%) is lower than the percentage of execution of the "continuous hits" and "long press" patterns in the time-saving state A and probability variation (eg, 40%), but the time-saving state The rate of execution of the "hit" pattern in B may be higher than the rate of execution of the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in the time saving state A or the probability change),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state, the second action promotion effect pattern is often used, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-34 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-33,
The period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the button The period during which the notice 'is executed and the period during which the 'button notice' is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the 'reach notice' is executed)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the action promoting effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-34,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect before executing the action promotion effect,
The period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Before the "button notice" is executed, an action-promoting preparation effect (for example, although not shown, a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated and an effect display are displayed before the operation valid period starts). ) can be executed, the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state B are common. preferably),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the action-promoting preparation effect for the first special state and the second special state, the development cost can be reduced and the execution of the action-promoting effect can be reduced. It can be notified suitably.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of Form 2-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state, and in the third special state Lower than the execution ratio of the operation promotion effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit, 5% for the loss) , Lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 80% for big hit, 20% for loss), and button notice per variable display in "variable state" a portion that is lower than the execution percentage (eg, 80% for big hits, 30% for losers, see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times the player is prompted to perform an action in the variable display of 1 is taken into consideration that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of Form 1-36 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state) and a part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
As the effect execution pattern of the action-promoting effect and the specific effect that the effect execution means can execute in one variable display, a first effect execution pattern (for example, " pattern A-2, A-3"), and a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the specific effect without executing the action promoting effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to control (for example, in the time saving state B, the SP reach D big hit variation pattern does not execute the "win/fail button effect" without executing the "movable body The ratio (for example, 90%) of executing the ``immediate hit effect'' that executes the effect is the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the time saving state A. It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "immediate hit production" to execute "movable body production" without executing the "success button production" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the probability variation state " A portion that is higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing “immediate hit effect” or “full rotation effect” (see FIGS. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform an action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of Form 2-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute effects including an action promoting effect that prompts the player to move and a specific effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state) A part that can execute "appropriate button presentation"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
As the effect execution pattern of the action-promoting effect and the specific effect that the effect execution means can execute in one variable display, a first effect execution pattern (for example, " pattern A-2, A-3"), and a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the specific effect without executing the action promoting effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. When it is determined to control, the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is determined. Higher than the rate at which the production execution pattern is executed (for example, in the time saving state B, the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern executes the "movable body production" without executing the "successful button production" Execution of "immediate hit production" The ratio (for example, 90%) is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body production" without executing the "win/fail button production" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the time saving state A, A portion higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the variable state (see Fig. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, it is determined to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which control was not performed to the advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform an action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of Form 1-37 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
As the types of the action promoting effects that can be executed by the effect executing means, a first action promoting effect prompting the player to perform one action (for example, an operation prompting display for a "hit" operation), and a predetermined action period for the player. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for “continuous hit” or “long press” operation) that prompts the action over the
The effect execution means can execute both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state, and can execute the first action promotion effect in the second special state. On the other hand, it does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the “variable probability state” and the “time saving state A”, both the “blow pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” It is possible to determine the execution, and in the "time saving state B", while it is possible to determine the "blow pattern", the part that does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" (See FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the troublesome operation is performed over a predetermined operation period. is less likely to be urged to the player, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of Form 2-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting actions of the player,
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including an action promoting effect to prompt the player's action (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute "button notice");
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
As the types of the action promoting effects that can be executed by the effect executing means, a first action promoting effect prompting the player to perform one action (for example, an operation prompting display for a "hit" operation), and a predetermined action period for the player. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for “continuous hit” or “long press” operation) that prompts the action over the
The effect executing means can execute both the first action promoting effect and the second action promoting effect in the first special state and the third special state, and the first action in the second special state. While it is possible to execute the promotion effect, it does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the “variable probability state” and the “time saving state A”, pattern" can be determined to be executed, and in the "time saving state B", while it is possible to determine the "single blow pattern", the part that does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern". reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the troublesome operation is performed over a predetermined operation period. is less likely to be urged to the player, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of Form 1-38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute effects including a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The effect executing means controls a first suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determining means, and the state is more advantageous than when the first suggestive effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, “vibration (large)”) with a high ratio of
The execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the first special state (for example, in "time saving state B" The execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% big hit, 30% lost) and lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "variable probability state" (for example, 90% big hit, 40% lost). -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times it is suggested to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-38,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in the second special state is determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. In the case of variable display, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the first special state is higher than The ratio (for example, 0%) is lower than the ratio (for example, 90%) at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state when the variable display result is a big hit, but the variable display result is The ratio of execution of "movable body notice" in time saving state B in the case of a big hit is higher than the rate of execution of "movable body notice" in time saving state A or probability variable state when the variable display result is a big hit. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-39,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. is higher than the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first special state when is the determined variable display (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, in the time saving state B "vibration (small) ”The rate at which the pattern is executed (for example, 0%) is the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the variable probability state when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 30%). is also low, but the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is "vibration ( small)" part that may be higher than the rate at which the pattern is executed (e.g. 30%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive effect between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute effects including a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The effect executing means controls a first suggestive effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determining means, and the state is more advantageous than when the first suggestive effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects including a second suggestive effect (for example, “vibration (large)”) with a high ratio of
The execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the first special state, and the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display in the third special state is one. Lower than the execution ratio of the suggestive effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is " Lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% big hit, 30% lost), and "movable body notice" per variable display in "variable state" ” (for example, hit 90%, lose 40%), see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, the number of times it is suggested to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of Form 1-41 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-40,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character notice" and "reach notice" part) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, in "time saving state B" The execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display (for example, 10% jackpot, 5% loss) is the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 80 jackpots %, 20% off) and lower than the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display of 1 in the "variable state" (for example, 80% big hit, 30% off).In addition, "time saving state B ”The execution ratio of “reach notice” per variable display (for example, 20%) is the execution ratio of “reach notice” per variable display in “time saving state A” (for example, 40%) than Along with being low, the part lower than the execution ratio (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable state" (see Figure 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is encouraged in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of Form 2-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-25,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character notice" and "reach notice" part) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per one variable display in the first special state, and one in the third special state. Lower than the execution ratio of the fanning effect per variable display (for example, the execution ratio of “character notice” per variable display in “time saving state B” (for example, 10% jackpot, 5% loss) is “time saving Lower than the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "state A" (for example, 80% jackpot, 20% loss), and execution of "character notice" per variable display in "variable state" Ratio (eg, 80% jackpot, 30% off) is lower than.In addition, the execution rate (eg, 20%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is "time saving state A" Lower than the execution ratio (e.g., 40%) of "reach notice" per variable display in , and the execution ratio (e.g., 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable state" lower part, see Fig. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is encouraged in consideration of the fact that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time. is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of Form 1-42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
an operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a movable body effect to move the movable body and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state A part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the specific effect before the execution period of the specific effect as the effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed in one variable display. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is executed also during the period, and the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the ratio of execution of the second effect execution pattern when it is determined to control (for example, the execution ratio of “pattern A-1” when the variable display result is lost in “time saving state B” (For example, 90%) is higher than the execution ratio of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state A" (for example, 10%), and variable display in "variable state" A portion that is higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of "Pattern A-1" when the result is a failure (see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely moved unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-42,
Control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined to control in the advantageous state is common (for example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, Control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in "body effect", and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, in "movable body effect" control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are common);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the movable body between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-43,
Equipped with light emitting means capable of emitting light,
control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; and control data used for controlling the light emitting means for emitting light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. and are common (for example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the movable body LED 208 or the frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 Control data used for control (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000), and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, a movable body that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in "movable body production" Control data used for controlling the LED 208 (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable object effect in the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of form 1-45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-44,
A display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
an effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the first special state; The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is common. (For example, an effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state (movable body production image of FIG. 19-59 (D1) 069SG456 reference) and, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" (see the movable body production image 069SG456 of FIG. 19-59 (D1)) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the effect image that is displayed in conjunction with the movable object presentation in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-45,
Equipped with vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion,
a vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body presentation in the case where the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is common. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" and the time saving state B In the case of a big hit 2, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body presentation" is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the movable body presentation between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-47 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is determined by the determining means in the second special state to achieve the advantageous state. Higher than the rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to control (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, "pattern A-2, A- 3 (first effect execution pattern)” is executed (for example, 80 to 90%) is “pattern A-2, A-3 (first effect execution pattern)” is executed at a higher rate (e.g., 10%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first special state, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable body moves, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-48 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body effect in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body effect in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is a part lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state A and the variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily in the second special state, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of Form 2-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
an operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
Effect execution means capable of executing effects including a movable body effect to move the movable body and a specific effect to notify that the control is in the advantageous state A part that can execute "movable body production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the specific effect before the execution period of the specific effect as the effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed in one variable display. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is executed also during the period, and the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect,
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to achieve the advantageous state. When it is determined to control, the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is determined. Higher than the rate at which the effect execution pattern is executed (for example, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" (for example, 90%) is "time saving state A "Pattern A-1" execution ratio (for example, 10%) when the variable display result is lost in "Pattern A-1 ” execution rate (for example, 20%), see FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through the predetermined number of times of variable display, when it is decided to control to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period of not being controlled to the advantageous state continued for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely moved unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of Form 1-49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
a specific effect for informing that the display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; A post effect that notifies game value information (for example, the number of balls to be put out) that can specify the size of the game value; and a part that can execute "post-production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot" (for example, one) is " Less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and less than the number of determinable deviation variation patterns in the 'probability variation state' (for example, 3)),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is 1 Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) is less than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "variable probability state" A portion less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (see FIGS. 19-50),
The effect mode of the post-effect is common to the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP Regarding the effect mode of "post effect" that notifies the scheduled number of balls to be given in the big hit game state informing that it is controlled to the big hit game state in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. B", "probable variable state", part common to "time saving state A". See FIGS. 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. In , the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, so that the speed of the variable display increases, and after being notified that the control is in an advantageous state, the state is the same as the first special state. Since it can be excited by the production of, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-50 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific effect executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. The specific effect that is executed when it is performed is common (for example, the “movable body effect” that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and the variable in the time saving state B The "movable body effect" executed when the display result is a big hit is a common part (see Fig. 19-59 (D1)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the specific effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-51 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-50,
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
Control data used to control the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state, and control data used to control the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. The control data is common (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the "post-production" in the time saving state B). and the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light (for example, the light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300) part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emit light in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-52 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-51,
Equipped with vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion,
a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state; a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-performance in the second special state; is common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the "post-production" in the time saving state B Executed by the vibration motor 61 are common (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the post-performance between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of Form 2-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the processing);
a specific effect for informing that the display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; A post effect that notifies game value information (for example, the number of balls to be put out) that can specify the size of the game value; and a part that can execute "post-production"),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is It is less than the number of determinable variable display patterns and less than the number of determinable variable display patterns in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 is set to "time saving state B" The number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in ``time saving state A'' (for example, 2), and can be determined in ``variable probability state'' a portion that is less than the number of outlier variation patterns (for example, 3),
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state in the case of the variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state is It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is a "big hit"). The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A". A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "variable probability state". 50),
The effect modes of the post-effect are the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-effect is executed in the third special state. It is common to the case where the post-article production is executed (for example, "post-production" that informs the scheduled number of balls to be given in the big hit game state that informs that it is controlled to the big hit game state in the SP reach production For the effect mode, as shown in FIG. 19-60, "Time saving state B", "Variable probability state", "Time saving state A" are common parts. See Figure 19-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the long period in which the control was not performed to the advantageous state continued. , the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, so that the speed of the variable display increases, and after being notified that the control is in an advantageous state, the first special state and the first special state Since the three special states can be livened up with a common performance, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of Form 1-53 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-52,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The variable display pattern determining means is
When no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state and the variable display is such that the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state, the second pending storage determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of causing pending storage in the means;
In the second special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a shorter special variable display time than (for example, the CPU 103, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variable state or the time saving state A, the time to store the pending memory in the second pending memory While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time to earn (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds and SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), time saving state B When the number of retained memories is 0, the variable display time is longer than the variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds and SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). can determine short shortened unreach variation patterns (e.g., ultra shortened unreach with variation time of 1.5 seconds and shortened unreach A with 3 seconds of variation time, see FIGS. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display can be performed even when the pending memory is not stored. Since the predetermined variable display pattern with a long period is not determined and the speed of variable display is not reduced, the second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of Form 2-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-28,
The first identification information (eg, first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is established. Variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed based on what has been done (for example, the winning of the game ball into the second starting prize opening), and an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103, normal state, special symbol (especially second special symbol) variation efficiency A portion that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves, a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserve storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process), and
Second reserve storage means (for example, CPU103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) and,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the process);
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a probability variable state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means
In the first special state or the third special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is such that it is not determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state. , it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period that can be stored in the second reservation storage means;
In the second special state, when no pending storage is stored in the second pending storage means and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a shorter special variable display time than (for example, the CPU 103, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variable state or the time saving state A, the time to store the pending memory in the second pending memory While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time to earn (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds and SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), time saving state B When the number of retained memories is 0, the variable display time is longer than the deviation fluctuation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern (e.g., ultra-shortened unreached with variation time of 1.5 seconds or shortened unreached A with 3 seconds of variation time, see FIGS. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, considering that the period in which control was not performed in the advantageous state lasted for a long time, the variable display can be performed even when the pending memory is not stored. Since the predetermined variable display pattern with a long period is not determined and the speed of the variable display is not reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of Form 1-54 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state. A portion where the CPU 120 can execute the “plunging effect”),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The production executing means is
displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect when control of the first special state is started;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start presentation, and the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image in the probability change rush effect While displaying rush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush performance B, it is common with the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state. The part that displays the rush image 069SG470 and displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started. 19-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled continued for a long time, in the special state start effect, the first special state is changed. Not only the special state start display common to when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed, so that the start of the second special state can be livened up.

The gaming machine of form 1-55 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-54,
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern in step 069 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the processing);
with
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern for a variable display period during which the special state start effect can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state is started (for example, effect control The CPU 120 for relief may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time that can execute "rush effect" in the relief time reduction arrival variation.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state start effect can be preferably executed.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of Form 2-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) by performing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball winning a prize in a start winning hole). , a pachinko machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state. A portion where the CPU 120 can execute the “plunging effect”),
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ) is controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed (for example, time saving state B), and when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends A third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by
The production executing means is
displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect when control of the third special state is started;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start presentation, and the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image in the probability change rush effect While displaying rush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush performance B, it is common with the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state. The part that displays the rush image 069SG470 and displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started. 19-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time, the third special state is changed in the special state start effect. Not only the special state start display common to when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed, so that the start of the second special state can be livened up.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of Form 1-56 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-55,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step 069SGS111 A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B),
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C ( 10R)) and
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means It is possible to execute a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) that stops after the specific display result to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined period,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to the second Higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined to control in an advantageous state (for example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production The ratio (for example, 100%) at which the control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" is determined by the production control CPU 120 as "SP reach" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A. D (full rotation)" execution ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) is higher than, and when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the effect control CPU 120 A portion higher than the percentage of executing "SP reach D (full rotation)" (for example, 0% (non-execution)), see FIGS. 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the second advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled lasted for a long time. is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
The special identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the game ball enters the starting prize-winning opening), and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state improves the variation efficiency between the normal state and the special pattern (especially the second special pattern). A part that can be controlled in a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control, a variable probability state, and a time-saving state B),
Determining means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the big hit determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process),
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variable display result in the variation pattern setting process of );
Decoration variable display means for variably displaying the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol and uses a plurality of types of decoration identification information as The part that executes the variable display of the decoration pattern) and
with
The special state is the first special state (e.g., time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times ), which is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed (for example, time saving state B), and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state and a third special state (e.g., variable probability state) that is controlled when is finished,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C ( 10R)) and
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means It is possible to execute a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) that stops after the specific display result to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined period,
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state to the second When it is determined by the determining means in the third special state that the control to the second advantageous state is performed at a rate higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is performed when it is determined to control to the advantageous state (For example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production control CPU 120 executes "full rotation production" The ratio (for example, 100%) is the ratio of the performance control CPU 120 to execute “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state A ( For example, when it is higher than 0% (non-execution) and "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" higher than 0% (non-execution), see Figures 19-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after the predetermined number of times of variable display, the second advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the advantageous state was not controlled has continued for a long time. is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so a suitable second special state can be provided.

(Characteristic part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The game machine of form 1 of the characteristic part 099SG is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 110, is obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110 From the period value χ small part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-100) The game machine of form 2 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the The one variable not controlled to the advantageous state is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state by the first number of times, and the one variable not controlled to the advantageous state executed in the third special state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the display by the first number (for example, as shown in FIGS. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is Part smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-101) The game machine of form 3 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state performed in the second special state is the period value performed in the first special state. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1100, is the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 1100 '),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-102) The game machine of form 4 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state performed in the second special state is the period value performed in the first special state. The one variable not controlled to the advantageous state is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state and performed in the third special state. A period value that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the display by the second number (for example, as shown in FIGS. The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ′ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuations of 1 in the time saving state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ ' is the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 1100 The part smaller than the period value ω ')
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-103) The game machine of form 5 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-21, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 0 Start when The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-104) The game machine of form 6 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is zero, less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said first number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-21, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 0 is out by 110 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A is less than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display results start when the number is 0 by 110, and the period value ξ Part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-105) The game machine of form 7 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-22, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 0 Start when The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value ν′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-106) The game machine of form 8 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 0 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is zero, less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said second number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying 1100 by the average variable display period of the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 0 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A The period value ξ' is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is started when the number of memories is 0 and the variable display result is not correct by 1100, and the period value ξ' is Part smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the probability variable state is lost by 1100 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-107) The game machine of form 9 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-19, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 1 Start when The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-108) The game machine of form 10 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. Said advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in said pending memory means in said third special state is one less than the duration value obtained by multiplying said first number of times by said variable display duration. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-19, the second special figure The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 1 is lost by 110 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order when the number is 1 by 110, and the period value λ is A portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-109) The game machine of form 11 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 1 Start when The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value κ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-110) The game machine of form 12 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means is 1 in said first special state. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is one less than the duration value obtained by multiplying the variable display duration by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value λ ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 1 is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A The period value λ is smaller than the period value κ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is lost when the number of memories is 1, and the period value λ is probability variable. Part smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 in the state is lost by 1100) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-111) The game machine of form 13 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-17, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 2 Start when The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-112) The game machine of form 14 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is two, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value θ obtained by multiplying 110 by the average variable display period of the variable display results that are started when the number of pending memories is 2 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number is 2 is out of range by 110, and the period value θ is in the probability variable state A portion smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-113) The game machine of form 15 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The second number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-18, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 2 Start when The period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A portion smaller than the period value η′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-114) The game machine of form 16 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The second number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state. The multiplied period value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved stores stored in said reserved storage means in said first special state is 2. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is two, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value θ ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is started when the number of pending memories is 2 and the variable display result is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A It is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the error in the variable display result starting when the number of memories is 2 by 1100, and the period value θ' is A portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the probability variable state and multiplied by 110 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-115) The game machine of form 17 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times in the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-15, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 3 Start when The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 110 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A A portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-116) The game machine of form 18 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The first number of times in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is 3, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ε obtained by multiplying 110 by the average variable display period of the variable display results that are started when the number of pending memories is 3 is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order when the number is 3 by 110, and the period value ε is A portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is lost by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

(SG2020-117) The game machine of form 19 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1) comprising:
Controllable between a non-special state (for example, normal state) and a special state (for example, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, probability variable state) in which the variable display is more frequently executed in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state. State control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the second special figure pending storage number in the time saving state B is 3 Start when The period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost by 1100 is started when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A The portion smaller than the period value δ′ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display at which the variable display result is out of range by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's amusement.

(SG2020-118) The game machine of form 20 is
A game machine (e.g., a game machine capable of performing variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning a game ball into a starting winning hole) and controlling an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) for a player (e.g., A pachinko machine 1),
Controllable state control means (for example, CPU 103 is a part that executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 14),
The special state is the first special state (for example, time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) Variable display is executed A second special state (e.g., time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that it is performed, and a third that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends Including a special state (for example, a probability variable state),
The end condition of the first special state includes that the variable display is performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The end condition of the second special state includes that the variable display is performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is larger than the first number of times in the second special state,
The end condition of the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a pending storage means (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to variable display as a pending storage,
The average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, is set to the second number of times. The multiplied duration value is the average over variable representations of 1 not controlled to said favorable state initiated when the number of reserved memories stored in said reserved memory means in said first special state is 3. The advantage initiated when the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means in the third special state is 3, which is less than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. Less than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the second special figure in the time saving state B The period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that is started when the number of pending memories is 3 is lost by 1100 is the second special figure pending in the time saving state A The period value ε' is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display results in which the variable display results start when the number of memories is 3 and is not correct by 1100, and the period value ε' is A portion smaller than the period value ζ 'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is lost by 1100 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by performing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the game interest of the state.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots game media into game areas where game media can flow down (for example, a right game area and a left game area),
As variable display, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a portion that can perform variable display of special symbols and variable display of normal symbols),
Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a state in which the game medium is more likely to enter than the first state. A variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B that forms a second starting winning opening) that is changed to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to enter;
Reservation storage means (for example, first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable display of the special identification information as reservation storage,
with
The game area has a special path (e.g., left game area) provided with the variable means and a non-special path (e.g., right game area) different from the special path,
The upper limit number of pending storage that can be stored by the pending storage means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending The number of pending memories that can be stored in the storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, FIG. 20-2 ( As shown in B), the part where the probability per normal pattern is the same even if the game state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state),
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, in FIG. 20-2(D) As shown, the part where the opening time of the second start winning opening is 3 seconds even if the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state),
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is shot toward the special path (for example, in both the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a game ball is launched toward the right game area state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the portions in which the game playability is shared between the first special state and the second special state, and the game playability is increased between the first special state and the second special state, which are the same special state. Players can be prevented from being confused by a large difference.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
When the period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the variable display not controlled to the advantageous state is performed for the first number of times or the second number of times in each special state, the start point of the measurement is , including the point at which the game medium is started to be launched (for example, the variable display period in which the variable display result is lost), the timing at which the game ball is launched, or the timing at which the launched game ball enters the start winning opening A portion that calculates the average variable display period as the period from the start timing to the end timing of the variable display based on the start winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the measured period value can be obtained appropriately.

The game machine of form 23 is the game machine according to any one of form 2, form 6, form 10, form 14, and form 18,
A holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to variable display as holding storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first Part where the number of pending memories that can be stored in the special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, FIGS. 20-6, 20-8, and 20- As shown in 10, since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern that causes the variable display result to fail differs according to the number of reserved memories, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to fail is stored. different parts depending on the number of retained memories),
The period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the percentage of the first number of times variable display performed with each number of reserved memories multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of reserved memories (for example, FIG. 20-13 , the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display executed with each reserved memory number to the 110 variable displays. is),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period A. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio a (for example, A is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A. Average variable display period, a is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display of the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period B. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio b (for example, B is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, b is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of reserved memories is C. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio c (for example, the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A is out. The average variable display period, c is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special pending memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of reserved memories is D. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, D is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 3 The variable display result is out The average variable display period, d is the ratio of the variable display when the number of second special pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, and the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α is the part calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the number of reserved memories is equal to E. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, E is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, e is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period F. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio f (for example, F is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 1 The variable display result is out The average variable display period, f is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period G. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio g (for example, G is a variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, g is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of reserved memories is H. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio h (for example, H is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state B. Average variable display period, h is the ratio of the variable display when there are three second special-figure pending memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, and the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β is the part calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate second special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 23 to 25,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period I. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is the average that the variable display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out Variable display period, i is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of reserved memories is equal to J. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio j (for example, J is the average that the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories in the probability variable state is 1 The variable display period, j is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is one in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of reserved memories is K. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio k (for example, K is the average number of variable display results when the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 in the probability variable state. The variable display period, k is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of reserved memories is L. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio l (for example, L is the average that the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability variable state is out Variable display period, l is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 3 in the probability variable state to the 110 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The period value of the third special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, and the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J. A hold 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the above, a hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ is the part calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate third special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The game machine of form 27 is the game machine according to any one of form 4, form 8, form 12, form 16, and form 20,
Hold storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B) that can store a plurality of information related to variable display as reservation storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first Part where the number of pending memories that can be stored in the special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of the variable display differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-6, 20-8, and 20-10, the variable Since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern that causes the display result to be wrong differs according to the number of reserved memories, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to be wrong differs according to the number of reserved memories that are stored. part),
The period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the percentage of the second number of times variable display performed with each number of reserved memories multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of reserved memories (for example, FIG. 20-14 , the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display performed with each reserved memory number to 1100 variable displays. is),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period A. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio a' (for example, A is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, a' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period B. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio b ' (for example, B is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, b' is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure reservation memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of reserved memories is C. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio c ' (for example, C is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, c ' is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of reserved memories is D. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio d' (for example, D is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state A. The average variable display period, d' is the ratio of the variable display when there are 3 second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period B, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c', and the average variable display period C, the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average (For example, the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The game machine of means 29 is the game machine according to form 27 or form 28,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the number of reserved memories is equal to E. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e' (for example, E is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, e ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period F. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio f' (for example, F is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reservation memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period G. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio g' (for example, G is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, g' is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special pending memories in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of reserved memories is H. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio h ' (for example, H is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 in the time saving state B. The average variable display period, h' is the ratio of the variable display when there are 3 second special pending memories in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period F, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average (For example, the period value β' is calculated by the value of Exe'+Fxf'+Gxg'+Hxh' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate second special state period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 27 to 29,
The upper limit number of the pending storage means is 4 (for example, regardless of the gaming state, the number of pending storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4 some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of reserved memories is equal to the average variable display period I. The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio i ' (for example, I is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, i ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of reserved memories is equal to J. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio j ' (for example, J is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the probability variable state. The average variable display period, j 'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is one in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display in the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of reserved memories is K. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio k ' (for example, K is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, k' is the ratio of variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is two in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state),
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 not controlled to the advantageous state executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of reserved memories is L. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio l' (for example, L is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability variable state. Average variable display period, l' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure reserved memory is 3 in the probability variable state to the 1100 times variable display of the probability variable state),
The period value of the third special state is a holding 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display. A holding 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the period J, a holding 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average (For example, the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

(Characteristic part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) Characteristic part 018 The game machine of form 3-1 of SG form,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Light emitters (for example, movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
a movable body (eg, movable body 32);
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a specific effect that notifies whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state and a special effect that causes the movable body to operate and the light emitter to emit light) A part that can execute SP reach performance A to E and movable body performance),
with
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) in which a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) is displayed and whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state is displayed. ), and a second specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect A) for notifying whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state without displaying the specific character,
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the specific effect execution period (for example, the SP reach effect execution period (of ta2 to ta5 The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the first specific effect, the specific character (eg, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with the effect image (eg, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body (FIGS. 21-14). (D2) (see D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body in a mode common to the first specific effect is displayed while the specific character is displayed. is not displayed (see Figure 21-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode (e.g., light emission pattern LP3-2) of the light emitter in the special effect is determined when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect and when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect. and (see FIG. 21-6 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first specific effect in which the specific character is displayed and the second specific effect in which the specific character is not displayed are made common in the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitter in the special effect, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. While reducing , the relevance between the specific performance and the special performance can be enhanced depending on whether or not the specific character is displayed during the execution period of the special performance, and the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific effect is executed than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, super reach β than the variation pattern of super reach α Since the expectation of a big hit is higher in the variation pattern of , the expectation of a big hit is higher in SP reach production B and SP reach production C than in SP reach production A (Big hit expectation: SP reach production A < SP reach production B <SP reach production C) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1 or form 3-2,
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the "determined effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is the SP reach It is common in productions A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach production A = SP reach production B = SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the special effect, the control data for the movable bodies and the light emitters in the special effect can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period after the first period,
While the effect mode in the first period is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the effect mode in the second period is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect ( For example, the execution period of the movable body production includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the production mode in the first period is common to the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 21-14 (C) is common), the production mode in the second period is different between SP reach production B to E and SP reach production A. In FIG. Parts different from the images shown in FIGS. 21-14 (D2 to D5)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production mode common until the first period, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and either the first specific production or the second specific production can be used until the first period. Since it is unclear what the specific performance is, the performance interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
The effect executing means can execute a third specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect E) for displaying a special character (for example, enemy character X-2) different from the specific character as the specific effect,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the third specific effect is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state The determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect E when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. is 800/997),
In the third specific effect, an effect image common to the first specific effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body during the execution period of the special effect executed when the control to the advantageous state is notified. (For example, effect image 018SG250B) is displayed and the special character (for example, character image 018SGX2) is displayed,
The light emission mode (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) of the light emitter in the special effect executed in the third specific effect is different from the light emission mode of the light emitter in the special effect executed in the first specific effect. are common (see FIG. 21-6 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitter in each special effect are made common to reduce the manufacturing cost, and at the same time, it is possible to increase the specific effects in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is different. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which specific effect is executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-5,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
Light emission of the light emitter in the special effect regardless of the detection timing at which the action of the player is detected by the action detection means in the action valid period before being notified that the control to the advantageous state in the specific effect is performed. The end mode is common (for example, an arbitrary timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when is completed, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission end mode of the light emitter can be changed by changing the timing at which the player moves, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-6,
The production executing means can execute a post-period production (jackpot notification) in a post-period after the special production during the specific production,
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific effect in which the post-period effect is executed (for example, in the post-period after the movable body effect during execution of the SP reach effect A to E, the jackpot is confirmed as the post-period effect Notification can be executed, and in the big hit confirmation notification, regardless of the type of SP reach production A to E, the light emission pattern of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and movable body LED 208 is common (for example, light emission pattern LP3 -2) part, see Fig. 21-6(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the production cost can be further reduced because the production in the later period is executed with the common light emission pattern regardless of the type of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-7,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
The effect executing means can output a special effect sound from the sound output means in the special effect,
The output pattern of the special effect sound is common to any type of the specific effect (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to any type of SP reach effect A to E (sound Pattern BP0-1 to 3) part.Refer to FIG. 21-6(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the output pattern of the special effect sound, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is the gaming machine according to form 3-8,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
Regardless of the detection timing at which the action of the player is detected by the action detection means in the action valid period before being notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect sound in the special effect The output end mode is common (for example, an arbitrary timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the “pass/fail button effect” is executed, or when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation is valid) Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when the period ends, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the mode of ending the output of the special effect sound can be changed by changing the timing of the action of the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special effect executed in the first specific effect is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIGS. 21-14 (D2 to D5), the movable body 32 The effect image 018SG250B displayed according to the vibration is displayed in a display color common or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a portion displayed in a similar color),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the specific character and the effect image can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special presentation can be enhanced.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of Form 3-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body (eg, movable body 32);
Effect executing means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a specific effect of notifying whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state, a special effect of moving the movable body, and a post-effect to be executed after the special effect. A part where the CPU 120 for SP can execute SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B),
with
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a first mode (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) is an effect in which a specific character (for example, an enemy character) is displayed and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state using the specific character. It is executable with the second mode (for example, SP reach production D),
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the specific effect execution period (for example, the SP reach effect execution period (of ta2 to ta5 The part where the movable body effect can be executed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first mode and the second mode, the specific character (eg, character image) together with the common effect image (eg, effect image 018SG250B) related to the motion of the movable body 018SGX1) is displayed,
When the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the first mode is not executed, and the specific effect is performed in the second mode. mode, the post-production using the specific character that was displayed in the specific production of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of the SP reach production B, in the SP reach production Instead of the post-effect B using the displayed enemy character X-1, the post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIG. 21-17), while in the case of the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect A portion where the post-effect B (see FIGS. 21-18 and 21-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the common specific character is displayed with different effects while reducing the manufacturing cost by standardizing the action mode of the movable body in the specific character and the special effect between the first mode and the second mode. As a result, the relevance between the specific effect and the special effect and between the specific effect and the post-effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-12 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect of changing the specific character to a special mode after the special effect executed in the specific effect,
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second mode is executed after the post-effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, in the big hit notification before the post-effect A, the player is knocked down. A character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out (see FIG. 21-15 (E2)). After being skipped, a special image 018SGXZ that disappears and becomes a star is displayed (see FIG. 21-19 (G1-5)) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the mode of the specific effect, so the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-13 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the post-effect during a variable display period in which one variable display is being executed,
In the post-effect, game value information capable of specifying the size of the game value to be given in an advantageous state in which it is notified that the specific effect related to the post-effect is controlled is notified (for example, SP The execution period of "post production A, B" in reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, SP reach production A to E From the timing ta5 at which the determined decorative symbols forming the predetermined big winning combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification of the determination of the big win, the determined decorative symbols forming the predetermined big winning combination are stop-displayed (the variable display ends) at the timing ta7. up to (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the post-effect in which the game value information is notified, and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 3-14 is the gaming machine according to form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine that notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state by deriving and displaying a specific display result as a result of variable display,
The effect execution means can execute the post-effect when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is , During the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns that become the predetermined jackpot combinations in the jackpot decision notification of the SP reach performances A to E are temporarily stopped. From the displayed timing ta5 to the timing ta7 (the end of the variable display) at which the finalized decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing at which the post-effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the post-effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the game value given is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The rate of being controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific effect of the second mode is executed than when the specific effect of the first mode is executed (for example, in the low base state SP When the SP reach performance B is executed when the reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined, a "jackpot B (6R)" (first 2 advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state and the SP reach production D is executed, “jackpot B (6R)” (second 1 advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), the ratio of which is controlled to 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-15,
When the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the effect executing means can execute the post-effect in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, the post-effect A of the SP ready-to-win effect A). Then, since the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the post effect A. In addition, in the post effect A of the SP reach effect B and C, the character appears in the SP reach effect B and C, The part where the character does not appear in the post-production A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the post-effect is executed even when the specific effect of the first mode is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 3-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect during one variable display,
A variable display period of variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the first mode,
During the period from the end of the special effect in the specific effect of the second mode until the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is derived after the special effect is completed in the specific effect of the first mode. Longer than the display period (for example, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7) in the SP reach β Longer than the period (ta4-ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body production" is completed to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed (ta4-ta7; SP reach γ > SP Reach β)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the specific effect of the second aspect executed in a short variable display period, the period after the end of the special effect is lengthened, so that even if the variable display period is short, the impression of the variable display is enhanced. be able to.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of Form 3-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A specific effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect to be executed when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is performed in the specific effect, and a post-facto effect to be executed after the special effect Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effect A to E, the movable body effect, and the post effect A, B),
The production executing means is
As the specific effect, a specific character (for example, an enemy character X-1) and a special character (ally character A-1) are displayed, and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the specific character and the special character. and a special character (enemy character X-2) different from the specific character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1) are displayed, and the special character and a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the special character,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character and the special character displayed in the first specific effect are displayed and operated to achieve the advantageous state. can execute a first post-effect (e.g., post-effect B) that reports game value information (e.g., scheduled number of balls put out) that can specify the magnitude of the game value to be given in
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, the special character displayed in the second specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated to achieve the advantageous state. can execute a second post-effect (e.g., post-effect B) that reports game value information (e.g., scheduled number of balls put out) that can specify the magnitude of the game value to be given in
At least the action mode of the special character is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (see FIGS. 21-18 and 21-19),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a common character in the specific performance and the post-performance, the production cost can be reduced and the relationship between the specific performance and the post-performance can be easily understood, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of form 3-19 is the gaming machine according to form 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is common to the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is all common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period, it is possible to easily divert the control data of the post performance, especially the action control data of the special character, so that it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost. .

The gaming machine of form 3-20 is the gaming machine according to form 3-18 or form 3-19,
The effect executing means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-effect,
The light emission pattern of the light emitter is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball-out addition part of the post-effect B). The light emission pattern is common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission pattern can also be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-20,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-effect,
The background image is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is the post-production B of the SP reach production D and the post-production B of the SP reach production E). (see Figures 21-18 to 21-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the background image can also be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of form 3-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the ally character A-1 is the post-production B of the SP reach production D and the post-production B of the SP reach production E). common (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special characters can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-22,
The production executing means is
In the first post-production, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at a common time,
In the second post-effect, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 are displayed at the same time, and in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E, an image of the enemy character X-2 fighting against the ally character A-1 is displayed at the same time (FIG. 21-18). ~ see Figure 21-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since each character is displayed at the same time, it is possible to enhance the impression of the post-production and improve the production effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-18 to 3-23,
The production period of the post-production includes a first production period and a second production period after the first production period,
The production executing means is
In the first effect period, a suggestive display regarding the size of the game value to be given in an advantageous state informing that the control is performed by the specific effect related to the post-effect, and the size of the game value to be added to the suggestive display. is displayed (for example, a scheduled ball throw addition part in which the scheduled number of balls thrown is displayed by addition in response to the friendly characters appearing in the SP reach effects D and E attacking the enemy characters),
In the second presentation period, the game value given in the advantageous state is added to the game value indicated by the suggestive display by adding the magnitude of the game value indicated by the addition display. (For example, after the ally character gives the last blow to the enemy character, the scheduled number of balls to be put out is stopped and notified, and then the final decorative pattern for the big hit combination is displayed. Scheduled pitch notification part where the variable display ends with the stop display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the suggestive display and the addition display are displayed in the post-effect, the magnitude of the game value to be given in an advantageous state is announced, so the effect of the post-effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of Form 3-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A specific effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect to be executed when it is notified that the control to the advantageous state is performed in the specific effect, and a post-facto effect to be executed after the special effect Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach effect A to E, the movable body effect, and the post effect A, B),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, "jackpot A (6R)" in the low base state/"jackpot B (6R)" in the high base state) and a state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a second advantageous state (for example, "jackpot B (6R)" in the low base state/"jackpot C (10R)" in the high base state);
The production executing means is
As the specific effects, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D), a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) different in effect mode from the first specific effect, the first specific effect and It is possible to execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) in which the effect mode is different from the second specific effect,
As the post-production, when the special production is executed in the first specific production, a first post-production in a production mode related to the first specific production (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-1 appear It is possible to execute post-production B) to
As the post-production, when the special production is executed in the second specific production, a second post-production in a production mode related to the second specific production (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-2 appear It is possible to execute post-production B) to
As the post-performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-performance (for example, post-performance A) in a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed,
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which one of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect is executed (for example, SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation in high base state When the pattern is determined, the ratio controlled to the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantage state) that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantage state) is the SP reach. It is 40% when the performance D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach performance E is executed, and when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, "jackpot A (6R)". The proportion controlled to the "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state) that is more advantageous to the player than the (first advantageous state) is 100% when the SP ready-to-win effect A is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, not only is it notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, but the ratio of control to the second advantageous state differs depending on which specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is controlled. The degree of attention of the player can be favorably increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-26 is the gaming machine according to form 3-25,
While the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production are common,
The production period of the third post-production is different from the production periods of the first post-production and the second post-production (for example, the execution period of "post-production A" corresponding to each of the SP reach productions A to C (ta5 to ta7) are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to SP reach effects D and E are all common, while the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" ) and the execution period (15 seconds) of “post-effect B”),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production common, it is possible to easily share the production content and control between the first post-production and the second post-production. The cost can be reduced, and by executing the third post-performance with a different performance period, the post-performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine of form 3-27 is the gaming machine according to form 3-25 or form 3-26,
The effect execution means is capable of causing the light emitter to emit light in the post-effect,
While the light emission pattern of the light emitters in the first post-effect is common to the light emission pattern of the light emitters in the second post-effect,
The light emission pattern of the light emitter in the third post-effect is different from the light emission pattern of the light emitter in the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the light emission pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E) While the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5 and LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball release notification part of the production B are common, the post-production corresponding to the SP reach production A. A movable body LED208 and frame LED9L1 ~ 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12 light emission pattern (light emission pattern LP4-2, LP4-3), SP reach production D and SP reach production E movable body LED208 in post-production B corresponding to A portion different from the light emission pattern (light emission pattern LP4-5, LP4-6) of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 (see FIG. 21-6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the light emission pattern of the first post effect and the light emission pattern of the second post effect common, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost, and the third post effect with a different light emission pattern. By executing the production, the production effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece moves to the winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (the second start winning opening) by moving the movable piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the special prize winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change-over switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the throwing rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability / high base state, a variable probability state is a high probability / high base state, and a normal state is also called a low probability / low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S906 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of putting out balls are changed according to set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball-out rate are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the odds of winning a big hit change according to the set value, the throwing rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 15(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the variable special figure is set to 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, the variable special figure is as shown in FIG. 15 (B) when the set value in the second special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 17 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S90175 described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 069SG in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 19-1 to 19-64. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flow chart in this characteristic part 069SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", and "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach" or "super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as “SP reach”. Further, in the characteristic portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "fluctuation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 19-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side. The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

[Embodiment 1]
The first embodiment of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described below. Pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. A game machine in which the probability of a big hit is set to about 1/319 is explained.

Also, after turning on the power to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after the occurrence of a big hit, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) continuously in a low probability state When the next big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or a relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big win despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the jackpot A among a plurality of types of jackpots, 110 times of variable display is performed in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state) among a plurality of types of time saving states, While the number of variable display times remaining from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times, if it is controlled to either the jackpot B or the jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots, the probability variable state (high probability / High base state) 110 times of variable display is performed, so the number of variable display times from after the end of the probability variable state to reaching the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of variable display is 1100 times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming “0”.

In the present embodiment, in the variable display at the time of the relief time reduction, by displaying the shutter image (see FIGS. 19-23 (B) (C)) on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variable before the relief time reduction In the display, after reducing the visibility of the first background image (see FIGS. 19-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state displayed as the background image, the third background image corresponding to the relief time saving as the background image (See FIG. 19-23(D)) is displayed.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in the left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is It is formed in the right game area in which game balls can flow down. A game ball weakly launched by the shooting device flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball strongly launched by the shooting device flows down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the flowing direction of the game balls. The first big winning hole is opened and closed to allow game balls to enter and closed to prevent game balls from entering by driving the solenoid 069SG2A (see FIG. 19-2) to open and close the big winning door (not shown). It is possible to change between states. The second big winning gate is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 069SG2B (see FIG. 19-3) to open and close the door of the big winning gate (not shown) to allow game balls to enter and closed to prevent game balls from entering. It is possible to change between states.

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first big prize opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second big prize opening. there is

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area (first route) can win the general winning hole 10, the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right game area (second route ), the game ball flowing down wins the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. As well as being able to pass through the passage gate 41 .

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 incorporated in the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

Between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area cannot win the first starting winning opening. there is

As shown in FIG. 19-2, at a predetermined position (for example, lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the present embodiment, the first special figure can be displayed in a variable manner. 1 special symbol display device 069SG004A, second special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of executing variable display of the second special symbol, first suspension display device 069SG025A capable of displaying the number of first pending memories, capable of displaying the number of second pending memories A second pending display device 069SG025B, a normal pattern display device 069SG020 that can execute variable display of normal patterns, a normal pattern pending display device 069SG025C that can display the normal pattern pending memory number, the number of rounds of the big hit game during the big hit game ( A game that launches a game ball such as a round indicator 069SG131 that can display a jackpot type), a jackpot game state, a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), a low probability / high base state (time saving state), etc. toward the right game area In the right-handed lamp 069SG132 that lights up in the state, the probability variable lamp 069SG133 that lights up when it is in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the low probability / high base state (time saving state) A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 069SG134 are collectively arranged. When the game state is the normal state, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops when the variable display results in a big win.

As shown in FIG. 19-2, the main board 11 transmits game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). An information output circuit for output is installed.

In the present embodiment, a V winning opening and a discharge opening downstream of the V winning opening are provided in the second big winning opening. A variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by means of a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. shall flow down to the outlet without being able to pass through the

As shown in FIG. 19-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect that a game ball has passed through a V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole via a switch circuit 110. and a discharge switch 069SG023B2 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the discharge port.

Also, the effect control board 12 is connected with a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 . In addition, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED 069SG031 for prompting a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during variable display of the first special symbol, and a lighted during variable display of the second special symbol. The second special figure LED069SG033, the first pending storage LED069SG034A that lights when the first pending storage number is 1 to 2, and the first pending storage LED069SG034B that lights when the first pending storage number is 3 to 4 , a second pending LED 069SG035A that lights when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 069SG035B that lights when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, and a push button 31B. A button LED 62, a movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 19-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 19-3 (A), in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for use, the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value within the range shown in FIG. 19-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of each random number MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern determination table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns, etc., is stored.

FIG. 19-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 069SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 069SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 069SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes higher (in this feature part 069SG about 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

In the determination table stored in the ROM 101, in addition to the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. For the first special symbol), in addition to the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. A determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value, but the probability of winning a big win (ball throwing rate) does not change according to the set value. ) may be changed.

(Jackpot type determination table)
Figure 19-3 (C1) and Figure 19-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 19-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 19-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19-3(D). In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Also, these jackpots A, jackpots B, and jackpots C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open state period and a long open state with a long open period. state (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot C'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or less jackpot types, or Four or more types may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (C1), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (C2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are carried out after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even in the case of a jackpot A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in a short-circuited open state, but it is extremely rare. Description will be made on the assumption that no V prize is won and the variable probability control is not executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C capable of executing variable probability control and time saving control of 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state was illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time saving control is performed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) jackpot D etc. may be provided, By doing this, the interest is improved because the next big hit is rich, and after the end of the big hit D, even if the probability change control ends without the big hit occurring in the 110 times probability change state, the time saving state A (low After executing variable display 899 times without a big hit in the high/high base state), it is controlled to the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), which will be described later, only by executing the variable display once in the normal state. Therefore, interest increases.

(Time saving times)
FIG. 19-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 19-4, in this example, when a game ball does not win a prize in the probability variable region due to the occurrence of a big hit A, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low probability Control is performed 110 times in a time-saving state A (in this example, it is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with a time-saving number of times of 110 times. In addition, either a big hit B or a big hit C occurs and the game ball is placed in the probability variable area. When winning a prize, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability-variable state in which probability-variable control is performed 110 times (in this example, extreme battle rush (extreme / BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time reduction) In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low-probability control is 1100 It is controlled to the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of times of time-saving 1100 times, 1100 battle rush (play-1100 BATTLE RUSH)).However, after the time-saving state B ends, it is controlled to a big hit in a low-probability state. Even if the change is performed 900 times again without being changed, it will not be controlled to the time saving state B again based on this.

In addition, when the lost symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) time saving state B (in this example, time saving control is performed 1100 times) 1100 times of play/1100 battle rushes) may be controlled. In this case, even if lost symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed in a high base state (probability variable state, time saving state), transition control of the game state is not performed (control is not performed to the time saving state of 1100 times of time saving). This is in order not to reduce the degree of relief for the player. For example, if it is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 1100 times of time-savings based on the stopped display of the lost symbols with time-saving when being controlled to the probability variable state that tends to be a big hit, the player This is not preferable because it results in control from an advantageous state to a disadvantageous state. Therefore, only when the game state under control when the missing symbols with time saving are stopped and displayed is the normal state, the game may be controlled to the time saving state of 1100 times of time saving.

In addition, the relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is as follows. can be calculated as

K={(1−ML)̂n}×100
(K = time saving arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display count)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is approximately 1/319, the relief short-time arrival rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which setting values can be set, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is, so that even if the jackpot probability is a low setting value, the player can be saved. can do.

(fluctuation pattern)
19-5 to 19-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

FIG. 19-5, (A) is a specific example of a change pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories in the normal state is 0 to 2, and (B) is a variation for loss when the number of retained memories is 3 A specific example of a pattern determination table, (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 19-5 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach B, and SP reach A Two judgment values are assigned, and SP reach B is assigned one judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-5 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, and SP reach A is assigned two determination values, and SP reach B is assigned one determination value.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-5 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP non-passing B, SP Reach A is assigned 40 determination values, and SP reach B is assigned 50 determination values.

In addition, FIG. 19-6 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the probability variable state is 0, (B) is for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 (C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 2 to SP reach C is assigned, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-6 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 85 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, and non- Ten determination values are assigned to the reach A, two determination values are assigned to the SP reach C, and three determination values are assigned to the SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-6 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0, five determination values are assigned to SP non-passing A, and SP reach C is assigned 80 determination values, and SP reach D is assigned 15 determination values.

In addition, FIG. 19-7 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state A is 0, and (B) is a case where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. (C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 19-7 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 to SP reach E is assigned a judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-7 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 90 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, and non- Five determination values are assigned to reach A, and five determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-7 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, five determination values are assigned to SP non-passing A, SP Reach E is assigned 95 decision values.

In addition, FIG. 19-8 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss in the case of 3, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 19-8 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 to SP reach D is assigned a judgment value. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach, SP Reach D is assigned three decision values.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-8(C), 100 determination values are assigned to the SP reach D in the variation pattern determination table for the big hit when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 19-6 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the probability variation state is about 8.2 seconds {(( 7 s × 95) + (40 s × 2) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 4.8 seconds {((3s*85)+(7s*10)+(40s*2)+(25s*3))÷100=4.8}.

Here, assuming that the first variable display after the probability change state is started has a reserved memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in the probability change state. is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8*109))/110=4.83}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the variable probability state is about 51.1 seconds {( (22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined in the variable probability state is about 51 .1 second.

As shown in FIGS. 19-7 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A is about 9.15 seconds {( (7 s × 95) + (50 s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 5.55 Seconds {((3s*90)+(7s*5)+(50s*5))÷100=5.55}.

Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state A is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 110 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state A The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55*109))/110=5.58}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the time saving state A is about 62.8 seconds { ((22s*5)+(55s*95))/100=62.85}.

As shown in FIGS. 19-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B is about 7.54 seconds {( (7 s × 97) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 2.205 Seconds {((1.5s*97)+(25s*3))÷100=2.205}.

Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state B is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 1100 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state B The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205*1099))/1100=2.20985}.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds. , The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big win that can be determined in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds.

In this way, the number of fluctuation patterns for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is three for the probability variable state, two for the time saving state A, two for the time saving state B, and the number of pending memories is 1 to The number of variation patterns for loss that can be determined in the case of 3 is four for the variable probability state, three for the time saving state A, and two for the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable deviation variation pattern is 4.83 seconds in the probability variable state, 5.58 seconds in the time saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in the time saving state B.

In addition, the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is three for the variable probability state, two for the time saving state A, and one for the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable big hit variation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the variable probability state, 62.8 seconds in the time saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time saving state B.

That is, the number of types of determinable loss variation patterns decreases in the order of probability variation state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probability variation state> time saving state A> time saving state B), determinable loss variation pattern variable The average time of the display time is shortened in order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In addition, the types of determinable jackpot variation patterns decrease in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (variable probability state > time saving state A > time saving state B), variable display of determinable jackpot variation patterns The average time of time is shortened in order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B). In this way, the time saving state B has fewer variation pattern types and a shorter variable display period of 1 than the variable probability state and the time saving state A. That is, monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, the number of types of variation patterns for loss and the number of types of variation patterns for big hits that can be determined exemplified a form in which the probability variation state is more than the time saving state A, but the time saving state A is more than the probability variation state Alternatively, the variable probability state and the time saving state A may be the same.

Also, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 19-5 to 19-8 are commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Especially in the time saving state B, the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Since the number of variable pattern types that can be determined is smaller than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, and the average time of the variable display time is short, monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, when V winning occurs in the jackpot game state by "jackpot A", similarly to "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", the probability variable state in which the probability variable control and the time saving control are executed after the jackpot game state is completed. Since it is controlled, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-6. In addition, when V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state by "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", time-saving state A in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "jackpot A". , the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-7. That is, the variation pattern determination table does not use the variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type, and since an irregular state may occur in the jackpot game state, it is linked to the state after the jackpot game state. A variation pattern determination table based on

That is, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) V When a V winning occurs in a jackpot game state in which a prize can be won, control is performed to a probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state, while when a V prize does not occur in a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be won, the game is controlled. In the one which is controlled to the first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is controlled to the second time-saving state after the end of the big win game state when the V prize does not occur in the jackpot game state where it is difficult to win a V prize, The first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are common time-saving states, and the variable display period of 1 in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is the variable display of 1 in the time-saving state B of the present embodiment. Shorter than the period is preferred.

(Variation pattern without reach)
In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns without reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-through A, SP non- Via B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the variable display result is ``losing'' or ``jackpot'' without establishing a reach after the variable display is started is displayed in a stopped manner. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-via A, SP non-via B" collectively simply "non-reach" or " It is also called "non-reach fluctuation pattern". In addition, "SP non-passing A, SP non-passing B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a big win in which reach or SP reach does not materialize.

In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reach, the variable display period is 7000 ms when it is determined to be the "non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, and the "SP non-via A" fluctuation pattern is determined. The variable display period is 7,000 + 15,000 ms, and the variable display period is 12,000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach B", and the variable display period is determined to be the "non-SP B" variation pattern. is 12,000 + 15,000 ms, the variable display period is 3,000 ms when it is determined to be the “shortened non-reach A” variation pattern, and the variable display period is 5,000 ms when it is determined to be the “shortened non-reach B” variation pattern. , the variable display period is 1500 ms when the variable pattern is determined to be "ultra-shortened non-reach". Of these, the variation pattern of "super-shortening non-reach" is a variation pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, and when it is controlled to another game state (time-saving state A, probability variable state) in which time-saving control is executed The variable display period is shorter than any of the fluctuation patterns determined in .

(Variation pattern with super reach)
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation patterns with super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"), the reach state was established Later, as an SP reach performance, a bowling performance (SP reach A) for notifying whether or not a jackpot is won by bowling between an ally character and an enemy character, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character are performed. A battle performance (SP reach B to E) for informing whether or not a big win is won is executed by , and the final display result is fixed and stopped after the end of the bowling performance or the battle performance. Here, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is a "big hit", an effect (victory effect) is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, or an effect (defeat effect) is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. After being executed, an effect (resurrection effect) in which the ally character revives and wins over the enemy character is executed.

In addition, the “variation pattern without reach” is a variation pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becoming the predetermined reach mode. In addition, it includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without the final reach mode even if there is a reach bias such as "reach notice" to be described later. In addition, the "variation pattern with super reach" means that the display result is displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, the reach effect develops, and the SP reach effect is executed. It is a variation pattern.

In addition, the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is given in the big win game state after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed and the victory performance and the revival performance of the variable display part are completed. and a post-production part for identifiably announcing the scheduled number of put-out balls.

The variable display period of the variable display part is 45000ms for SP reach A, 80000ms for SP reach B, 40000ms for SP reach C, 25000ms for SP reach D, and 50000ms for SP reach E. For each type of SP reach A to E different. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-production part is 15000 ms, common to SP reach A to E. In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 15000 ms) in the variable display period is assigned to the post-effect part, but the predetermined period may differ according to the type of SP reach. Also, a fanfare period or the like in the jackpot game state may be assigned to the post-effect part.

In the present embodiment, all variation patterns involving reach are super reach variation patterns, and the normal reach variation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, normal reach variation A pattern may be set.

(Production control command)
FIG. 19-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 19-9(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-9 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. Different EXT data are set according to (predetermined result) and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types of jackpot types should be set when the variable display result is "a jackpot."

As for the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command with a variable display result of "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8FXXH stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a design determination designation command that designates a design determination period until it is done.

In the symbol confirmation designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9(C), the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command that terminates the variation of the special symbols and sets the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a design determination B designation command that terminates the special design variation and sets the design determination period to 20 seconds.

In the present embodiment, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, and (ii) after the big hit, when the relief time reduction is reached with the variable display of 900 times, the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation , a pattern confirmation designation command in which different EXT data is set is transmitted. Specifically, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, a symbol confirmation A designation command is transmitted in which the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation. In addition, (ii) after the big hit, when the relief time reduction is reached with 900 times of variable display, a symbol determination B designation command is transmitted in which the symbol determination period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding relief working time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variable count notification command for notifying the remaining probability variable control count in the probability variable state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying that the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned off.

Command 91XXH is a restoration time reduction time number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the value of the relief time reduction counter by converting it into a hexadecimal number at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction time count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 (D), each digit (first digit, second digit, 3 digit, fourth digit), different EXT data is set.

In the recovery time reduction time number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 (D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction time number designation 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the relief time reduction number is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are restoration time reduction number designation 2 commands that designate the second digit of the value of the number of times of restoration. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number designation 3 commands that designate the third digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number designation 4 commands that designate the fourth digit of the value of the number of times of reduction in restoration time.

The command 94XXH is a relief time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 (E), different EXT data is set according to the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the relief time reduction .

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-9 (E), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that designates that the relief time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that designates that the remaining 1 to 125 times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that the remaining 127 times or more is reached until the relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display number is 700 times, relief A command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number of times 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specifying command for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 19-10 is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the present embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the production control command for instructing restoration from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction. Then, the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to transmit a recovery time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the relief time-saving number counter and transmit a relief time-saving number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the relief time reduction number designation command is sent, and the remaining variable display up to the current relief time reduction You will be notified of the number of times.

In addition, in this example, when the power is restored, aside from the command at the time of restoration, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery and the number of times of recovery is transmitted. However, it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, in the EXT data of the recovery command (eg, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be set and transmitted. .

Also, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, in the initialization process of step S8, the area of the relief time reduction counter Perform clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power supply to the game machine is turned on, if the big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state B is controlled. will be In addition, in this example, since the effect control command for instructing initialization to be transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set to the relief time reduction number counter, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the transmission of the directed effect control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (“900” in this example), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into hexadecimal, and sets the relief time reduction counter. Control is performed to transmit the number-of-times designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the case of setting the relief time reduction number counter to "900" and initializing it is shown. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (Steps S4 and S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, it may be configured such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is performed.

(Time saving flag, variable probability flag)
In this Embodiment, when one of the conditions for being controlled by a time saving state is satisfied, a time saving flag can be set. The time saving flags include a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (when the big hit occurs during the time-saving state A, 110 times of time-saving control ends and the normal state controlled timing).

The time saving flag B is set when it is controlled to the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving. This time-saving flag B is when variable display is executed 900 times in which the display result does not become a big hit pattern after RAM clearing, or when the display result does not become a big win pattern in a low probability state after the end of the big win game state, variable display is performed 900 times. is executed, and when the time-saving state B ends (the timing of the big hit during the time-saving state B, the timing of the time-saving control ending 1100 times and being controlled to the normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when V is won in the first round of the big win game, when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, and a variable probability flag is set. This variable probability flag is erased at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the timing when the variable probability state becomes a big hit, the timing when the variable probability control is executed for the 110th time and the timing is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the variable probability flag is erased based on the 110th time since the variable display is controlled to the variable probability state when step 069SGS69A in FIG. 19-12 described later is YES.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 19-11 and 19-12 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the combined reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 069SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for winning determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61), and executes the big winning determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 uses the low probability jackpot determination value to perform the big hit determination. Further, if the variable probability flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the high-probability big-hit determination value to perform the big-hit determination. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values.

If it is determined to be a big hit (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 069SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value matching the random number is determined as the jackpot type (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for type determination extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted and becomes "0" ) can occur. In this example, the time-saving state A is entered based on the big hit A, and the time-saving state is based on the fact that the next big hit does not occur even after the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times). Although it is controlled to B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is established becomes a big hit, it is configured to control to the time saving state A based on the big win.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 069SGS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended when the variable display ends (step 069SGS69).

In addition, in this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the number of times of variable display until relief time saving after step 069SGS71 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such processing It is not limited to modes. For example, after executing the counting process of the number of times of variable display up to relief time saving in step 069SGS71 and thereafter, the subtraction process of the time saving number counter may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "110" to the time saving number counter (see step 069 SGS172), the value of the time saving number counter will be 1 extra. Since it will be subtracted, in the variable display which becomes relief time saving, 1 may be added again to the value of the time saving frequency counter after the subtraction process. Moreover, you may comprise so that "111" which is one more may be set to the number-of-times-savings counter beforehand.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS69A, if it is in the variable probability state, the processing after step 069SGS70 (especially the processing of step 069SGSS71) is not performed, so when the gaming state is a variable probability state ( In this example, even if the variable display is executed during pole/battle rush, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not subtracted. If the variable probability flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is set, the processing after step 069SGSS70 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not updated, the relief time-saving number designation command or the relief time-saving number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 at this point, the timing after it has already been controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state B) via the relief time-saving (time-saving state B or time-saving state B The timing is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in ), and the big hit that triggers 900 to be set to the relief time reduction number counter has not occurred. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time-saving number designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 069SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time-saving number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time-saving number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating control to the time reduction state B at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 069 SGS75 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as the EXT data, and issues a command 957FH as a relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control for transmission to the CPU 120 is performed (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times) It is checked whether or not (step 069SGS77). Incidentally, whether or not the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and produces a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 069 SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9601H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction, and transmits a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining variable display times until relief time reduction and execute a fan effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

Also, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs for the first time It is configured to transmit a relief time-saving number designation command and a relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command, and when the relief time becomes short after the second time, it is configured not to transmit the relief time-saving number designation command and the relief time-saving number of times 2 designation command. good too.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a big win A, the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "2", and when it is determined to be a big win B, the special symbol stop symbol is "3". When it is determined to be a big win C, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be ``7'', and when it is determined to be a loss, the stop design of the special design is determined to be ``-''. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 19-13 and 19-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 069SGS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. It is checked whether or not it is set (step 069SGS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability variable flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of execution times of the variable display during the time saving state if it is set. The time saving number counter is cleared (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set to the relief time reduction number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and when the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times in the low probability state after the big win game is over. will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled to the time reduction state B.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 069 SGS135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "900" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction number counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to be initialized. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start turning on the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a time timer before the opening of the big winning opening for measuring the time (fanfare time) before opening the big winning opening 069SG007A or the second big winning opening 069SG007B. (Step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time reduction flag B and controls to the time reduction state (step 069SGS171A). . Then, "1100" is set in the time saving frequency counter (step 069SGS172).

Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state B designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 069SGS174). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069 SGS174B). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In addition, although this example shows an example in which the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling to the time reduction state B at the timing of the relief time reduction, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state B at the timing of the relief time saving and to set the relief time saving number counter (set "900"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time-saving counter, "900" is set. ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "900". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS172, it shows a case where 1100 times, which is a value larger than the variable display count (900 times) until relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction count. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, in step 069SGS172, a value equal to or less than "900" may be set in the time saving number counter.

Further, in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of times of shortening of working hours may be set in the number of times of shortening of working hours counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "110", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "1100". good too.

Further, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of time saving by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving determined by the lottery process may be set in the time saving number counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 110 times with a probability of 10% and may be determined to be 1100 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Moreover, if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, CPU103 will confirm whether the time reduction end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets one of the time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to B) that has been set, and terminates the time saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command for notifying the right-handed LED 069SG031 to be extinguished to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 069SGS141-S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated with the transition to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation. It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

Moreover, in step 069SGS141, if the time saving end flag is not set (step 069SGS141; No), it will transfer to step 069SGS175.

At step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state change)
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described. 19-15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 19-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), when the big hit B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, it is controlled to the probability variable state, and when the big hit A occurs 2, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state (low probability / high base state) via the jackpot). In addition, although not shown, even when the big hit B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled. Also, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit will not occur When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability / high base state)).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 19-15, in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the variable probability state is entered again. controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 19-15, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-15, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable region, the probability variable state controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is again controlled. Further, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without occurrence of a big hit, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit will not occur When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this example, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but only such a control mode can't For example, comparing the number of times the current number of times of saving time and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (in this example, 110 times), the number of times the number of remaining times of the current time saving number is greater For example, the present time saving state B may be continued as it is.

In addition, in this example, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or during the probability changing state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of 1 special symbol is executed.

(Explanation of play time)
Next, the feature of "idle time" which is the time saving state B (relief time saving state) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-16 to 19-18. 19-16, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where the "free time" is not installed, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where the "free time" is installed. FIGS. 19-17 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of deviation variation in a normal state. Fig. 19-18, (E1) and (E2) are explanatory diagrams of free time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state, and (F1) to (F4) are explanatory diagrams of the idle time in this case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state. is. 19-16 to 19-18, for the convenience of explaining the features of the "play time", images for explanation that are different from the effect images explained below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko machine not equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. state (low probability / low base state)) without being controlled by a big hit (for example, 900 times when the probability of a big hit is about 1/300, about 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit). Even if you are caught, you will not be controlled to "play time", that is, to reduce working hours. At this point, since the player has already got into the game about three times as much as the denominator of the probability of a big win, the player continues playing for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low-probability/low-base state) continues until a big win occurs, requiring further investment, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Accurate / low base state)))) without being controlled by a big hit, and if a variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit), it becomes “play time”, and a specific number of times ( For example, it will be controlled to the time saving state B over a variable display of about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator at maximum, such as 1100 times. At this point, the player has already been hooked about three times as much as the probability of a big win, so the player continues the game for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is quite large. However, by controlling the "play time", that is, the time-saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit is increased, so that the decline in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19-17 (A) to (D), the player continues the game without winning a big win for a period of time from the end of the big win to the "play time". (“I am addicted”), and during that period, various announcements are being made and continue to be aroused. Also, when the variable display is 900 times, for example, when the variable display is performed the first number of times (for example, 105 times) after the end of the big hit (see FIG. 19-17 (A)), the variable display is the second number of times ( For example, 213 times) is executed (see FIG. 19-17(B)), and when the variable display is executed a third time (for example, 506 times) (see FIG. 19-17(C)), the variable display is When the 4th time (for example, 882 times) is executed (see FIG. 19-17 (D)), at least the production with high expectations for a big hit such as SP reach (for example, SP reach production of "hot heat") is predetermined It is highly likely that it is quite depressing because it has been executed a number of times and all of these SP reach effects continue to miss.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 19-18 (E1) (E2), even if it is finally controlled to "play time" (time saving state B) after 900 times of variable display, this time saving state B is normal When the variation efficiency is low like the state (low probability/low base state), the number of useless shots increases, which may lead to further additional investment and prolonged play. In addition, since the SP ready-to-win effect is completely removed in the 900th variable display, the player is quite depressed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 19-18 (F1) to (F4), the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment has a higher variation efficiency than the normal state (low probability / low base state) Since it is a time-saving state, it is possible to continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control is controlled to a big hit during the period controlled to the time-saving state B by executing the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, etc., a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of a big hit). Since there is a high probability (for example, about 97%) that the For example, if the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/319.9, the probability of not hitting the jackpot with one variable display is about 99% {(319.9−1)÷319.9=0.996874}, and 1100 rotations The probability of not hitting the jackpot within that time is about 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1100 spins is about 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

In addition, in "play time", the variable display period of the selected variable pattern is short, so the variable display is more efficient than other time-saving states, so it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display and draw a big hit in a short period of time. In addition, it is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that an advantageous big win (for example, big win B, big win C, etc.) will be given to the player by making a big win in the second special game due to the right-handed game. be. In addition, since the advance notice effect and the SP ready-to-win effect, etc., which will be described later, are unlikely to be executed, and there are few opportunities to be aroused by the losing effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the desire to play. In other words, the "play time" of the present embodiment is different from the game state for waiting for the next big hit while enjoying the production, such as the variable probability state and the time saving state A. This is a game state in which priority is given to efficiently digesting and winning the next big hit. Details of the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment will be described below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot A, the production mode is controlled to "battle rush". FIG. 19-19(A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 19-19 (A1), the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state A), and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 110, the production mode is " A second background image 069SG320 representing the scenery of the town in the evening is displayed as the background image of the decorative design in correspondence with the fact that it is "Battle Rush", and "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. An effect mode display 069SG221 made up of characters is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX= 0 to 110) are displayed, and in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed.

At this time, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013 corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Four second suspension displays 069SG002 are displayed in the second suspension display area 069SG012. In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, the number of the first reserved memory, the number of the second reserved memory, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, the time saving remaining display 069SG201, and the right hitting notification image 069SG400 For such, by displaying it on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image such as the character, the effect image overlaps and the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small patterns and error display On the other hand, by displaying the decoration pattern on the back side (lower layer) than the production image, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the production image from being reduced due to overlapping of the decoration patterns. You may do so.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. It is variably displayed according to the operation (see the small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 19-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is entirely or partially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED069SG032 and the second special symbol LED069SG033 The pattern displayed on the device is also called a fourth pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A is completed, it is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) In this case, the first background image 069SG310 representing the scenery of the town in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and is executed after being controlled to the low probability/low base state in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. A variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, characters of "game 0 times") corresponding to the variable display count is displayed. At this time, the production mode display 069SG221 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 0 to 100), the image The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" in the lower right portion of the screen of the display device 5 are erased.

In addition, when it is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state), if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less, the countdown effect described later is executed, and the screen right of the image display device 5 A special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX more times", and a triangular object, XXX=1 to 300) are displayed at the bottom.

(Yu 1100 Battle Rush [Yu Time])
In this embodiment, when it is controlled to the time saving state B via relief time saving, the production mode is controlled to "play 1100 battle rush" (also referred to as "play time"). FIG. 19-19(B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 19-19 (B1), the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state B), and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 1100, the production mode is " 1100 Battle Rush”, a third background image 069SG330 representing a nighttime townscape is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed as “Yu 1100 Battle Rush”.・An effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, in correspondence with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low accuracy / high base state, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=0 to 1100) are displayed, and a right-handed informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, for the time saving remaining display 069SG201, the display mode (for example, design, font, color, etc.) is common to the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, so that the cost can be reduced. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when controlled to the low probability / low base state, The first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. At this time, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 0 ~ 1100), the right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit occurring in the time saving state B, even if the 900th variable display is executed without a big hit in the low probability state, the time saving is performed. It is never controlled to state B. Therefore, after the 110th variable display is completed without occurrence of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state described later, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit occurring in the time saving state B, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5 . By doing so, after the 1100th variable display is completed without the occurrence of a big hit in the time saving state B, if the 900th variable display is executed without the occurrence of a big hit in the low probability state, the time saving state It is possible to prevent the user from thinking that B is controlling him/her.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-19 (B1), during the period that is controlled to the time saving state B, active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, in the second pending display area 069SG012 Although the form in which the second pending display 069SG002 is displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display 069SG003 and the second pending display 069SG002 are displayed during the period when the time saving state B is controlled. You may choose not to do so. In addition, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the active display 069SG003 and the second pending display 069SG002 may be displayed or may not be displayed.

Also, after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A ends, when it is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, for example, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" are displayed. After that, it may be controlled to the low accuracy/low base state. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when it is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" as described above should not be displayed.

In addition, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when it is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, the shutter effect performed at the time of transition to the time saving state B ( 19-23(B)) may be performed before controlling to the low accuracy/low base state.

In addition, when the 101st variable display starts when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A, the countdown notification indicating that the number of times of the time saving is remaining is 10 times, while the game state is the time saving state. Even if the 1091st variable display when controlled by B starts, the countdown notification may not be performed, and by doing this, the time saving state B (play time) is about to end You can prevent it from being lost.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when controlled to the probability variable state via the big win B or the big win C, the production mode is controlled to "extreme/battle rush". FIGS. 19-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "extreme/battle rush".

As shown in FIG. 19-20 (A), the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), and when the value of the time saving counter is 11 to 110, the production mode is "extreme・A fourth background image 069SG340 representing a landscape of a wilderness in the daytime is displayed as a decorative design background image corresponding to "Battle Rush". RUSH" is displayed. In addition, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX= 11 to 110) are displayed, and in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are displayed. In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decoration pattern (For example, an arrow "↓↓↓") is provided in a display area 5SL, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-20 (B), the game state is controlled to a high accuracy/high base state, and when the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 10, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 In the part, the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 in a mode expanded from the time saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time saving counter is 11 to 110 (in this example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX = 0 to 10 ) is displayed. In addition, the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to the mode in which the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is enlarged, and the display color of the time saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed or an effect display may be added to the time saving remaining display 069SG201. Further, at the timing when the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched to the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201, a dedicated sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speaker.

Further, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the remaining time saving display may be displayed in the same manner as the variable probability state. Further, in the time saving state B, stress may not be applied to the player by not performing the emphasized time saving remaining display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-20(C), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state, when the 110th variable display is executed with the display result being "loss". , the result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. FIG. In the result image 069SG500, the characters "Extreme / BATTLE RUSH end" that informs that the pole / battle rush has ended, and the characters "BONUS x 〇 times" indicating the number of hits (〇 is the number of hits) are given. "XXXX pt" (where XXXX is the total number of awarded game balls) indicating the total number of game balls awarded.

It should be noted that the number of big hits included in the result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive big hits based on variable display in a high probability state (so-called number of consecutive games), and the total number of given game balls is the number of consecutive games. It includes the number of prize balls given in the big hit of .

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-20 (D), after 110 times of variable display when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state, it is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state. , the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the variable display count corresponding to the variable display count executed after being controlled to the low accuracy/low base state in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 A display 069SG202 (in this example, characters of "Game 0") is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG223 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the emphasized time reduction remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", X = 0 to 10), The right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In addition, when the game state is controlled from the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B to the normal state, the left hitting notification performance for instructing the left hitting may be executed based on the completion of the time saving control. In the left-handed notification effect, the left-handed notification image, the characters "left-handed" and the arrow image are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the sound "Please hit left" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. be done.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when being controlled to the time saving state A is completed, or as shown in FIG. And after the 1100th variable display is completed when it is, or after the 110th variable display is completed when it is controlled to the variable state as shown in FIG. 19-20 (D), By displaying the variable display count of the variable display count display 069SG202 as common “0 times” when the control of the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started, the state of the pachinko machine 1 (the previous big hit type, time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state, etc.) cannot be easily grasped, and expectations for being controlled to the time saving state B can be enhanced.

In addition, when the control of the low probability / low base state (normal state) is started, as the variable display number displayed in the variable display number display 069SG202, when the control of the time saving state A is completed, "110 times", The number of times of variable display executed in each state may be displayed, such as "1100 times" when the control of the time saving state B is finished, and "110 times" when the control of the variable probability state is finished. By doing so, the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (kind of the previous big hit, time saving state A, time saving state B, whether it was controlled to any of the probability variable state) can be generally confirmed, thereby making it possible to confirm the time saving state B Since it becomes easier to predict the number of times of variable display until the control is executed, it can lead to an improvement in motivation to play.

Also, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a common song (for example, song A) is fixedly reproduced as BGM, and in the variable probability state, a plurality of songs including song A (for example, songs A to X). Any one of them may be selectable, and the selected music may be replayed.

Also, when the music A flows in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. are emitted in a light emission pattern corresponding to the music A (e.g., a light emission pattern matching the rhyme of the music). can be

In addition, when the music A is played in the time saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. are displayed in a light emission pattern (e.g., a light emission pattern that matches the background image) that is different from when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. It may be made to emit light.
In addition, the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state A and the probability variable state (pattern according to the rhyme of the song) is better than the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B The light emission pattern is emphasized more than (the pattern matched to the background image), and the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B becomes a calm light emission pattern. Note that the light emission pattern to be emphasized includes a pattern with a higher luminance than the calm light emission pattern, a pattern with a short switching interval of the light emission data, a pattern with a short flickering cycle, and the like. By doing so, in the time saving state B, as described in the above flow, the player may be depressed, so the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 is overemphasized. It is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player by calming down the player.

Further, for example, a common background image is displayed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, but in the time saving state B, by making the perspective (visibility) of the background image different from that in the time saving state A, the same background image is displayed. Even if the image is used, it can be understood that it is in a completely different state (a different impression is given).

In addition, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the size of the decoration pattern is also different (for example, the time saving state A: normal, the time saving state B: large), and even if the background image is diverted, the state is completely different. can be understood (to give an impression).

In addition, after execution of the variable-probability rush effect/time-saving rush effect A, a prepaid card prevention display or a gaming machine maker display may be performed. In this case, after execution of the time-saving rush effect B, it is preferable not to display the prepaid card forgetting prevention display and the game machine maker display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent stress from being given to the player by performing the above display when entering the time saving state B without going through the big win.

(variable number of times display, special number of times display)
In the present embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed after being controlled to the low probability/low base state. A variable display number display 069SG202 corresponding to the number of variable display times (in this example, characters such as "game XXX times") and a special number display 069SG203 corresponding to the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is reached (in this example , characters such as "Yuu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", characters "XXX more times", triangular objects, etc.). In the present embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is displayed is called a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, it is determined which of the variable display number display and the special number display is displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter. Moreover, the display mode of a special number display can be changed according to the value of a relief time reduction counter. FIGS. 19-21 are diagrams showing examples of effects on the image display device 5 when the variable display count display or the special display count display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19-21 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 301 to 900, the variable display number display 069SG202 (in this example, "Game XXX times” characters, XXX=0 to 699, etc.) are displayed. The number (XXX) of the variable display frequency display 069SG202 is added and displayed each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-21 (B), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 31 to 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number display 069SG203 in white mode is displayed at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. (In this example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", white characters "XXX more times", and white triangular objects, XXX=31 to 300) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19-21 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 30, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 (this In the example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red characters "XXX more times", and the red triangular object (XXX=30) are enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 3 seconds). As shown in 19-21(D), the image is shifted to the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in reduced size. Then, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red mode special number display 069SG203 (in this example, "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH characters "until", red characters "more XXX times", and a red triangular object (XXX=1 to 30) are displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0, the special number display is not displayed, but not limited to such a form, the relief time reduction number counter value In the variable display when is 0, a special number display may be displayed. For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, after the red mode special number display is displayed, when the variable display in which the relief time reduction number counter value is 0 is executed, the gold mode special The number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, characters such as "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", gold characters of "none more", gold triangular objects, etc.) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the special number display 069SG203 is displayed, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the display count display 069SG202 is displayed, and the addition display of the variable display count display 069SG202 and the subtraction display of the special count display 069SG203 may be performed along with the variable display. In this case, the variable number of times display 069SG202 is displayed in a mode with lower visibility than the display mode of the special number of times display 069SG203 (for example, the variable number of times display 069SG202 is displayed in a smaller size than the special number of times display 069SG203). ) is preferred.

In addition, the trigger for starting the display of the special number display 069SG203 is when the variable display is started when the number of remaining variable display times before being controlled to the time saving state B is a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 50 times). It may be a fixed timing, the timing of winning by executing the display start lottery of special number display 069SG203, the timing of ending the fluctuation pattern of SP reach out, or until it is controlled to the time saving state B The timing may be irregular, such as when it is suggested that the number of remaining variable displays has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 remaining times) by executing a remaining number of times indication effect or the like. Further, when the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is started, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by displaying it on the full screen. Also, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, it is possible to execute a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "Extreme heat when reaching").

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 301 to 900, the SP reach variation pattern will be more difficult to determine than before the relief time reduction number counter value is 301 to 900. Switch to the fluctuation pattern table. may By doing so, it is possible to play the game with a variable display that reflects the intention of the player who wants to rush into relief quickly.

In addition, during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period), execution of various advance notice effects described later may be restricted (for example, not executed, or displayed in an unobtrusive manner). . In addition, when the execution time of the notice effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 is displayed without being highlighted, or a pre-reading notice to be described later is displayed. When the performance execution time and the display period of the special count display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) overlap, the special count display 069SG203 is displayed when the variable display is started after the end of the look-ahead preview effect. If a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the full screen display period) results in a big hit, the display of the special number display 069SG203 is restricted (for example, not displayed or conspicuous) may be displayed in a form that does not exist).

(Example of production when reaching short relief time)
As described above, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed (when the relief time reduction is reached without hitting once after the RAM is cleared), the pattern is determined in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation A pattern confirmation A designation command with a period of 0.5 seconds is transmitted, and (ii) after a big hit, when a short relief time is reached with 900 variable displays (one big hit, then a short relief time without a big hit) ), a symbol confirmation B designation command is transmitted in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation. In the present embodiment, since the pattern fixed period is different between the case of (i) and the case of (ii), the low probability / high base state after the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation in the low probability / low base state is completed The effect mode of the period (that is, the pattern determination period) until the relief time saving game is started after being controlled to (time saving state B) is different.

Next, (i) an example of an effect when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-22 to 19-25. In this example, (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) deviation".

(Example of production in case of (i))
FIG. 19-22 shows the execution of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed. 19 to 23 are time charts showing timings, and FIGS. 19 to 23 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol variable display (relief time reduction number counter At the timing of ending the variable display when the value is 1 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 19-22), the effect control CPU 120 that receives the design decision A designation command, the design display area of the image display device 5 In 5L, 5C and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("146" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, displays the reserved display 069SG001 in the first reserved display area 069SG011. I am letting In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image of the decoration pattern based on the fact that the game state is the normal state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory number is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved memory number is 0. ing. Also, a combination of small symbols ("146" in this example) is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display area. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0) (in FIG. 19-22 At the timing T2 shown), the effect control CPU 120 executes the shutter effect and causes the entire screen of the image display device 5 to display the shutter image 069SG250.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 19-22), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation A designation command The control CPU 120 fixes and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 . That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped. In addition, when the variable display ends, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-handed A right-handed informing image 069SG401 larger than the informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are faded-in displayed. By doing so, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player continues the left-handed game and loses interest. By fade-in displaying the notification image 069SG401, it is possible to favorably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (D), at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 19-22), When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), the production control CPU 120 responds to the production mode becoming "play 1100 battle rush", as a background image of the decorative pattern A third background image 069SG330 is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters “Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH” on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (this In the example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display the previously executed combination of decoration symbols (“234” in this example). Also, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before ("234" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display area.

Next, (ii) an example of an effect in the case of reaching a relief time reduction with 900 variable displays after a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24(A) and 19-25. In this example, (ii) after the big hit, the case where the short relief time is reached by the variable display of 900 times, the case where the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" will be explained.

(Example of production in case of (ii))
Fig. 19-24 shows (A) when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" when the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit. (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time-saving rush effect B. FIG. FIGS. 19-25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

First, the production configuration in FIGS. 19-25 (A) and (B) is shown in FIGS. 19-23 (A) and (B). Description is omitted because it is the same as the production configuration in the variation pattern of reach or non-reach).

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-25(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 19-24(A)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 . That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed, and the image display device 5 At the center of the screen, a right-handed informing image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and characters of "Right-handed" are faded in. By doing so, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player continues the left-handed game and loses interest. By fade-in displaying the notification image 069SG401, it is possible to favorably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-25 (D), at the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed in the design confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the design confirmation B designation command (in FIG. 19-24 (A) At the timing of T4 shown), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting notification image 069SG401 while displaying the right hitting notification image 069SG400. After the fade-out display, time-saving rush performance B is executed, and a rush image 069SG473 (in this example, an image including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving effect B, the player is notified that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) by displaying a rush image 069SG473 including characters of "play 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush". ing.

In addition, the rush image 069SG473 is the rush image 069SG470 that is displayed in common even when control of the time saving state A and the variable probability state is started, and the minimum size at the lower left of the display screen. and a leisure time image 069SG473B composed of characters "1100" and "play".

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-25 (E), at the timing when the design confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the design confirmation B designation command has passed (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 19-24 (A)) , When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), the production control CPU 120 responds to the production mode becoming "play 1100 battle rush", the background image of the decorative pattern to display the third background image 069SG330. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters “Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH” on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (this In the example, the characters “remaining XX times”, XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed informing image 069SG400 and the characters “right-handed” are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to display the previously executed combination of decoration symbols (“234” in this example). In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before ("234" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display area.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 19-24 (A) and 19-25, at the timing when the design confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the design confirmation B designation command passes and the game state is controlled to the time saving state B , the production mode is set to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. Seconds) has passed and the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, and at a timing different from the timing, the production mode may be changed to “Yu 1100 Battle Rush” and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. For example, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, (A) the timing at which the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B is started At the timing, the effect mode may change to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. Also, the timing at which 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the design determination period specified by the design determination A designation command) has elapsed in the design determination period (20 seconds) specified by the design determination B designation command. (In this example, at the timing of T4), without executing the time-saving rush effect B (Fig. 19-25 (D)), the effect mode becomes "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. You may do so.

Also, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in FIGS. 19-23 (B) and 19-25 (B), an image that suggests that it is controlled to the time saving state B (for example, characters such as “play”) may be displayed. In this way, when the shutter image 069SG250 is commonly displayed at the timing when the time saving state B is controlled and the timing other than when the time saving state B is controlled (for example, the timing when the production mode is switched) , easier to distinguish.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described in FIGS. 19-22 to 19-25, (i) when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM, and (ii) after the big hit, relief is performed with variable display of 900 times. Although an example of a form in which the production mode differs depending on when the time is reached, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production of a common mode between the time of (i) and the time of (ii) may be executed. That is, the time reduction rush production B may be executed at the time (i) and the time (ii), or the time reduction rush production B may be executed at the time (i) and the time (ii). may not be executed. Further, the time-saving rush performance B may be executed in different modes between the time of (i) and the time of (ii).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 19-24 (A) and 19-25, the pattern confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command was illustrated to execute the time saving rush production B, but the present invention. is not limited to this, for example, after being controlled to the time saving state B, the time saving rush performance B may be started. Hereinafter, modified examples of execution timing of each effect when the relief time is reached will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-24(B), 19-26, and 19-27.

FIG. 19-24(B) is a time chart as a modified example showing the execution timing of each effect when the relief time reduction is reached. FIGS. 19-26 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect operation when the number of pending memories is 0 when the relief working time is reached.

First, the effect configuration in FIG. 19-26(A) is the same as the effect configuration shown in FIG. 19-25(A), so the description is omitted. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0) (FIG. 19-24 ( At the timing of T2 shown in B), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-26(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 19-24(B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in which the display result is "lost". , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is determined and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display is performed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the notification of hitting to the right is started.

Then, at the timing (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 19-24 (B)), the time saving state B control is started, Although the variable display can be started, if the number of pending memories is 0, the display of the right-hand hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in FIG. 19-26(D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (E), the first variable display starts based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second start winning (may be the first starting winning) has occurred 19-24(B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state of being displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (F), the effect control CPU 120, after the first variable display is completed, at the timing when the second variable display is started (in FIG. 19-24 (B) At the timing T6 shown), the shutter effect is ended, and after the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving rush effect B is started.

In addition, the time-saving rush production B is started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, during the first variable display or at the start of the second and subsequent variable displays). good. Also, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms), such as when an ultra-shortened variation pattern is determined as the variable display variation pattern, the variable display may be performed continuously over multiple times of variable display. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving rush effect B is continuously displayed without depending on the variable display of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the variable display of the big hit is started during the execution period of the time-saving rush performance B, the time-saving rush performance B being executed is interrupted or ended, and the performance (for example, SP reach performance etc.) according to the variation pattern is performed. Alternatively, the big hit notification performance may be executed without performing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, FIGS. 19-27 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect operation when the number of pending memories is 1 or more when reaching the relief time saving.

19-27(A) to (C) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 19-26(A) to (C), so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 19-24(B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in which the display result is "lost". , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of the small symbols whose display result is "loss" is confirmed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display is performed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the notification of hitting to the right is started.

Here, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 19-24 (B)) , Since the control of the time saving state B is started and the first variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 5, the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen. In addition, the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the near side of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-27(E), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display ends, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed. and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed, and the time-saving rush effect B is started.

In this way, the effect control CPU120, when the variable display of the relief time-saving reach fluctuation is completed, based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, lights the right-handed LED069SG031, to the display screen of the image display device 5 In order to display the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters “Right-handed” and start the right-handed notification, the control of the time saving state B is not started after the control of the time saving state B is started. Even when the shutter performance indicating the start or the time-saving rush performance B is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that it is controlled to the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加

Further, in the above embodiment, when the time saving is reached after clearing the RAM, 0.5 seconds is set as the pattern confirmation period, and after the big hit, when the time saving is reached with the variable display of 900 times, the pattern confirmation period is reached. 20 seconds is set as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common pattern fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set when the relief time is reached. In addition, even in this case, the time-saving state B is controlled by executing the right-handed notification and the time-saving rush effect B after the variable display is started after the control of the time-saving state B is started. To prevent a player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing it.

In the above-described embodiment, when reaching the relief time saving after clearing the RAM, at the timing when the pattern confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern confirmation A designation command has passed, the shutter effect is finished, and the shutter image This shows an example of ending the display of 069SG250 and displaying the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush. Here, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation A designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation A designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or due to the symbol confirmation A designation command being garbled. , If the received command could not be recognized as the pattern confirmation A designation command, then (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B At the timing of receiving a command (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern designation command, etc.) corresponding to the start of the variable display for the first time, the shutter It is also possible to end the effect, end the display of the shutter image 069SG250, and display the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush. It should be noted that at the timing of receiving another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern confirmation designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B, the shutter effect is ended and the shutter The display of the image 069SG250 may be ended and the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the big hit, 0.5 seconds out of the pattern confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command has passed when the relief time is reached with the variable display of 900 times. At this timing, the shutter effect is finished, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is finished, and the time-saving rush effect is executed. Here, if the effect control CPU 120 could not normally receive the symbol confirmation B designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation B designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 was missed, or if the symbol confirmation B designation command was garbled. , If the received command could not be recognized as the design confirmation B designation command, then (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B At the timing of receiving a command (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern designation command, etc.) corresponding to the start of the variable display for the first time, the shutter At the same time as ending the production and ending the display of the shutter image 069SG250, the time saving rush production B may be executed. It should be noted that at the timing of receiving another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern confirmation designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B, the shutter effect is ended and the shutter You may make it complete|finish the display of image 069SG250, and to perform time saving rush production|presentation B. FIG.

In addition, in Figures 19-22 to 19-25, the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened Each effect executed when it is determined to be non-reach B or non-reach B) lost" was explained, but although not shown, the variation pattern was determined to be "SP reach A lost or SP reach B lost" When, an SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type (for example, bowling effect for SP reach A, battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in the bowling effect or battle effect. After the image to be displayed is displayed and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, the shutter performance is started, and the time reduction rush performance B may be started in the pattern fixing period after the shutter performance is finished.

In addition, when the variable display (relief time-saving arrival fluctuation) in which the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0 is a big hit, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) If the big hit variation pattern “SP reach B (battle SP)” is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a shutter effect is performed at the start of the variable display (for example, 19-23 (B)), for example, the shutter effect is completed at the timing of developing into the SP reach effect B (refer to the timing of FIG. 21-11 (A2)), then the SP reach effect B is executed, and the big hit may be notified.

(2) If the variation pattern for the big hit “SP Reach B (Battle SP)” is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the special number display remains “1” and the shutter effect is not performed. It is also possible to execute a winning performance such that the SP ready-to-win performance B is executed at the beginning of the game.

(3) When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, a special big hit variation pattern (for example, shutter closed→shutter open with decorative patterns aligned→big hit) may be provided.

In addition, the execution of the look-ahead performance described later when the value of the relief time-saving counter reaches a specific number of times remaining to 0, and the execution of the look-ahead performance in the variable display when the relief time-saving number counter value is 0 are restricted. is preferred.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demonstration display designation command designating that the customer is in a customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration production is executed in which a demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. . FIG. 19-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in a customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 19-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing a teammate character, the words "demonstration video", and an announcement image 069SG700a (in this example, a triangular object with "play"). Image with the words "time loaded") and is included. Also, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the various images described above (friend characters, “demo video” characters, etc.), as well as a special number display 069SG203 (this In the example, a special number display in white mode is further included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player during the customer waiting state that the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is small (in this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less). can be used to facilitate operations.

(Modified example of customer waiting screen)
In the example of FIG. 19-28 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 shows an example in which the special number display 069SG203 is included, but not limited to such a form , Regardless of the value of the relief time-saving counter, the special number display 069SG203 is not included in the demo image 069SG700 in both cases where the value of the relief time-saving counter is 301 or more and 300 or less. good too.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-28(B), when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays a demonstration image 069SG700. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing a teammate character, the characters "demonstration video", and an announcement image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the characters "equipped with play time" are displayed on a triangular object). ) is included, but the special number display is not included regardless of the value of the relief time reduction counter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-28 (C), at the timing when a new start winning occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, and the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 A special number display 069SG203 is displayed at the bottom.

According to such a configuration, by not notifying the player of the number of remaining variable display times until the time-saving relief is reached during the customer waiting state, only gaming machines with a small number of remaining variable display times until the time-saving relief are selected. It is possible to prevent this, and suppress the occurrence of excessive bias in the operation of the game machine.

Regardless of whether or not RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and the special count display may be hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the power is turned on. .

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on, when the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on is 301 or more and when it is 300 or less, the predetermined number of times is variable. By hiding the display of the variable display count and the display of the special count until is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's play for the sole purpose of saving time. Also, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is displayed both when the value of the counter for reducing the number of times of relief at power failure is 301 or more and when it is 300 or less. By hiding the display of the variable display count and the display of the special count until execution, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game.

According to such a configuration, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on when the store is opened, the player who wants to save time can refer to the final variable display count at the time of power failure on the previous day. By doing so, it is possible to suppress playing a game by selecting a gaming machine with a small number of remaining variable display counts until the relief time reduction is reached. In addition, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on when the store is opened, a player aiming to save time can save time by referring to the final variable display count at the time of power failure on the previous day. It is also possible to prevent players from avoiding playing a game on a gaming machine with a large number of remaining variable display counts until reaching .

In addition, not limited to the above form, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes a specific value, even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is not executed after the power is turned on, the variable display number display and A special count display may be displayed.

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on is a specific value (for example, 20 or less) less than the value corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, 50) Alternatively, the display of the special number of times may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the RAM clear processing is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the time saving counter at the time of power on is not a specific value, but the number of times of saving time is displayed by the variable display executed after the power is turned on. When the value of the counter becomes a specific value (for example, 20 or less), even if the value of the relief time reduction counter does not correspond to the predetermined number of times, the special number of times display is displayed. good.

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 1)
Next, the characteristic part 069SG modified example 1 will be described. FIG. 19-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to transition to the customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG modification 1. FIG. FIG. 19-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the production operation example regarding the shift to the customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 1. FIG.

First, an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display after stopping, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and displays the image. A demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the device 5 to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 19-29 (A2)). After that, when the start winning is generated, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and variable display is started (see FIG. 19-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the production operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the relief time reduction will be described. As shown in FIG. When the number of pending memories is 0, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right hitting LED 069 SG 031 based on the reception of the right hitting LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, and the image display device 5 A right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen, and a right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is faded-in displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIG. 19-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms, etc.) has passed without starting a new variable display from when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation has stopped, the production control CPU 120 is a customer waiting demonstration Even if the display designation command is received, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 is maintained without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect (FIG. 19-29). (See B3)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter performance is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Note that the right-hand shot notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 19-29 (B4)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hitting notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 19-24 (B)), the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush performance B (see FIG. 19-29 (B5)).

Next, to explain an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-handed notification, as shown in FIG. When stopped, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on receiving the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display. Then, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the right hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hitting" are displayed, and at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a right hitting notification image larger than the right hitting notification image 069SG400 is displayed. The image 069SG401 and the characters "Right-handed" are faded in before the shutter image 069SG250, and the right-handed notification is started. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the design confirmation A specification command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started, and the first reservation storage is digested and the first variable display is performed. is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5 . The state in which the right-hand shot notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 19-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reservation memory becomes 0, the state where the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (Fig. 19-29 (C3 )reference).

Then, a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display since the variable display of the pattern stopped in the first variable display after the control of the time saving state B was started. When the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display specifying command, the demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without executing the customer waiting demonstration production. The state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 19-29 (C4)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the second variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter effect is finished, and after hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush effect B (Fig. 19-29 (C5) reference).

Thus, in the characteristic part 069SG modification 1, the production control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demonstration production during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation to the end of the time reduction rush production B. By restricting and executing the right-handed notification with priority, the display of the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the right-handed notification image 069SG400, does not disappear. 29 (A2), by displaying the demo image 069SG700, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In addition, in this modification, in the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect is restricted and the right-handed notification is preferentially executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, the CPU 103 issues a customer waiting demonstration display designation command. By not transmitting, the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be restricted.

Next, still another modified example of the production operation example regarding the shift to the customer waiting screen when reaching the relief time saving will be described.

As shown in FIG. 19-30 (D1), when the variable display of the symbols in the relief time reduction reaching fluctuation that has reached the relief time reduction has stopped, if the number of pending memories is 0, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display Based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response, the right-handed LED 069SG031 is lit, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. A right-handed notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fade-in to the front side of the decoration pattern, and the right-handed notification is started. do. In addition, at the timing when the design confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the design confirmation A designation command has passed, the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIG. 19-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30000 ms) has passed without starting a new variable display after the variable display of the pattern in the relief time reduction arrival fluctuation is stopped and controlled to the time reduction state B, production control Upon receipt of the customer-waiting demonstration display designation command, the CPU 120 displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer-waiting demonstration effect, and at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, hits right. The notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right shot" are displayed (see FIG. 19-30 (D3)).

After that, when the starting winning prize occurs, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning prize (may be the first starting winning prize) has occurred. At this timing, the shutter performance is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Note that the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 19-30 (D4)).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the player touches the touch ring of the batting operation handle 30. At this timing, the demonstration image 069SG700 is hidden and the customer waiting demonstration effect is finished, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right-handed" shown in FIG. The shutter effect may be started at the timing when is started.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hitting notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed to start the time-saving rush performance B (see FIG. 19-30 (D5)).

In this way, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed and the customer waiting demo effect may be executed during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation to the end of the time-saving rush effect B, but the demo image 069SG700 At the same time, the hitting to the right notification image 069SG400 and the characters "hitting to the right" may be displayed to notify the hitting to the right. In this way, the control for displaying the demonstration image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demonstration effect is common to the normal state, thereby reducing the processing load. By displaying the characters "Right-handed" in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game.

Further, for example, the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the demo image 069SG700. You may make it

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 2)
Next, characteristic portion 069SG modified example 2 will be described. FIG. 19-31 is a flow chart showing a game control timer interrupt process as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 19-32 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 19-33 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG. FIG. 19-34 is a flow chart showing the display processing as the characteristic part 069SG modified example 2. FIG.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19-13 and 19-14, the lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 in the special symbol stop process, and the right-handed LED lighting notification command to the production control board 12, right Although the form of transmitting the hitting LED extinguishing notification command is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of turning on and off these right hitting lamps 069SG132, and the right hitting LED to the effect control board 12 The process of transmitting the lighting notification command/right-handed LED extinguishing notification command may be executed outside the special symbol stop process. In addition, the subtraction of the value of the relief time reduction counter is executed in the special symbol normal process, and the relief time reduction determination flag is turned on when the relief time reduction is reached. is executed in the special symbol stop processing to turn on and off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 without using the relief time reduction determination flag, and send the right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED extinguishing notification command to the production control board 12 You can do it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-31 as the characteristic portion 069SG modification 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 turns on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24). And setting processing, display processing (step 069SGS24A) including transmission processing of right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED extinguishing notification command to production control board 12, and execution of normal symbol process processing (step S26) A display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 according to the setting process performed later in the display process may be executed.

In the characteristic part 069SG modification 2, in order to execute the above-described display processing (step 069SGS24A) and display control processing (step 069SGS26A), the CPU 103 executes special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 19-32 and 19-33. do.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 19-32 and 19-33, first, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 is similar to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 19-13 and 19-14. , step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS135 are executed. Then, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS138 and step 069SGS139 without starting the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and transmitting the right-handed LED lighting notification command, and then changes the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B described later. The memory is cleared (step 069SGS139a), the process of step 069SGS140 is executed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103, after executing the processing of steps 069SGS131 to step 069SGS133, specifies the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B at that time, and these time saving flag A and the time saving The state of flag B is updated and stored (step 069 SGS160). Also, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability variation flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E, if the probability variation flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is already 0 (Step 069SGS162).

If the value of the relief time-saving number counter is already 0, that is, if it is already in the time-saving state B (step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E, and if the value of the relief time-saving number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No ) decrements the value of the relief time reduction number counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after decrementing the value by 1 is 0 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then terminates the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command. After executing the processing of step 069SGS152 without executing transmission, the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS172 to step 069SGS174, and then starts lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED start notification command Information indicating that the number of variable display times has reached 1100 without the variable display result becoming a big hit is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like. A specific number (for example, 4) is set in a specific number of times reaching information output frequency counter indicating the number of times that the specific number of times reaching information is output, and a specific number of times reaching information output period timer indicating the output period of the specific number of times reaching information is set. Go to 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In the information output process (step S23) at the time of the next interruption, the CPU 103 sets the output of the specific number of times reaching information over the period set in the specific number of times reaching information output period timer to the specific number of times reaching information output counter. It should be executed the specified number of times.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 turns on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and transmits a right-handed LED lighting notification command/right-handed LED extinguishing notification command in the display processing (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interruption. After setting the shift flag, the process of step 069 SGS175 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-34, in the display processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the transition flag is set, that is, whether or not the special symbol stop processing in which the variable display result is lost at the time of the previous interruption has been executed. It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated, and if the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182) and stored The state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B being set is compared with the current state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B (step 069 SGS183), and the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B changes to the on state (set state) It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS184).

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the ON state, that is, if it is newly controlled to the time saving state A or the time saving state B (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right striking lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 While performing the lighting setting, the right hitting LED lighting notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the display processing is terminated (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

Also, if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the ON state (step 069SGS184; No), whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the OFF state (cleared state) is determined (step 069SGS187). If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069 SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, newly When it is controlled from the time saving state A or the time saving state B to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right hitting LED extinguishing notification command to the production control board 12 while performing the extinguishing setting of the right hitting lamp 069SG132 and the working hour saving lamp 069SG134 is transmitted, and the display processing ends (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting of step 069SGS185 or the lighting setting of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the right hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the characters "right hitting" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the right hitting LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, The display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the characters "Right-handed" in the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 may be ended in response to receiving the right-handed LED turn-off notification command from the CPU 103 .

(Characteristic part 069SG modification 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, by displaying the special number of times display on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is reached Although it was a production configuration that suggests that it is decreasing, it is not limited to such a form, it is a production different from the special number display, and the number of remaining variable display times until the relief time reduction is reduced You may perform the relief time-saving suggestion production to suggest.

19-35(A) and (B) are the same as those for the variable display count display and special count display (white mode) shown in FIGS. 19-21(A) and (B). Therefore, the description is omitted. 19-35 (C) and (D) production configuration other than the relief time-saving suggestion production is the same as the production configuration for the special number of times display (red mode) shown in FIG. 19-21 (C), Description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19-35 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 11 to 30, when the first step in the relief time reduction suggestion production is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, The first suggestion image 069SG800A) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of relief time reduction covering the upper quarter area of the background image is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestive image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the first suggestive image is superimposed appears to be lowered from the player's perspective. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestive image 069SG800A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (D), when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 10, when the second step in the relief time reduction suggestion production is executed, the second suggestion image (this example Then, the second suggestion image 069SG800B related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of relief time reduction covering the upper half area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestive image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the second suggestive image is superimposed appears to be lowered from the player's perspective. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestive image 069SG800B.

In the present embodiment, the background image including the suggestive image (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) by the relief time-saving suggestive effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as a background image even when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is displayed. In this way, by varying the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the relief time-saving number counter regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief time-saving It is possible to suggest that the number of remaining variable display times until the arrival is small, and to improve interest.

In this example, as an image that changes the interface image, an example of displaying a suggestive image (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) related to the shutter image at the time of relief time reduction is superimposed on the background image. You may superimpose-display the image unrelated to the shutter image at the time of relief time saving arrival|attainment not only in such a form but a background image. For example, an effect image with a different display area and display color may be superimposed according to the value of the relief time-saving counter, and when the value of the relief time-saving counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image is the first. area (for example, 25% of the screen) and the display color is blue, but when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image is a second area wider than the first area (for example, the screen 50%) and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various productions)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-36 to 19-50. 19-36 are diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects. FIG. 19-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIGS. 19-38 are diagrams similarly showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 19-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pending change notice. FIGS. 19-40 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the symbol chance eye notice. FIG. 19-41 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the effect display notice. 19-42, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing pre-reading notice type determination tables. 19-43, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the pre-reading announcement effect pattern determination table. FIG. 19-44 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. FIG. 19-45 is a flow chart showing an example of effect processing during variable display. 19-46, (A) is a reach announcement execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button announcement effect pattern determination tables. 19-47, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character announcement pattern determination tables. 19-48, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body motion pattern determination tables. 19-49, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable object announcement pattern determination tables. 19-50, (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each game state.

As shown in FIG. 19-36, the effect control CPU 120 provides a countdown notice and a pending change notice as a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). , the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice can be executed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a movable body announcement, a character announcement, a ready-to-win announcement, and a button announcement as announcement effects suggesting that a big hit will be controlled in the variable display.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has a hit/fail button effect and a movable body effect as a decision effect for informing whether or not the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is controlled to the big hit game state. and are executable.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, after the end of the variable display part in which the variable display of the decoration pattern in the variable display based on the super reach big hit variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is executed, is scheduled to be given in the big hit game state. A post-effect can be executed in a post-effect part that notifies the number of balls in a identifiable manner.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts control of each game state by displaying a state start display when control of any of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B as a special state is started. It is possible to execute a rush effect to notify.

(Look-ahead notice effect)
Next, the look-ahead preview effect will be described. In the present embodiment, in the starting prize determination process of step S101 in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the starting prize, stores hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updates the hold storage number. . When a start-up win occurs, random numbers for determining display results (including jackpot types) and fluctuation patterns are extracted and stored as pending information, and display results and fluctuation patterns are determined based on the extracted random numbers. Prefetch determination processing is executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, an effect control command for designating the determination results such as the generation of start winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination is transmitted to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

The effect control CPU 120 is based on the information received from the main board 11 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect that suggests being controlled, and if execution is decided, the type of pre-reading notice effect to be executed (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "symbol chance eye notice" , "effect display notice" and production patterns of various notices).

In the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined on the condition that the number of pending memories is "4". It may be determinable. Also, the type of pre-reading notice effect to be executed is exemplified as one of the countdown notice, pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, multiple notices may be executed simultaneously.

"Countdown notice" starts the variable display of the reserved memory that is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect until the variable display of the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as target reservation) starts. It is an effect of executing a countdown such as "3"→"2"→"1"→"0" every time.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the countdown notice is any one of a pattern that ends the countdown at "3", a pattern that ends at "2", a pattern that ends at "1", and a pattern that ends at "0". one pattern is determined. Expectations are higher in the order of patterns ending with "3", patterns ending with "2", patterns ending with "1", and patterns ending with "0" (Expectation: ending with "3" < " 2"<ends with '1'<ends with '0').

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-37 (A), when the start winning is generated, the execution of the countdown notice and the pattern ending with "0" are determined, after the variable display ends ( -37 (B)), when the next variable display is started, the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed (see FIG. 19-37 (C)), and the variable The display ends (see FIG. 19-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed (see FIG. 19-37 (E)), and the variable The display ends (see FIG. 19-37(F)).

Next, when the next variable display is started, the character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed (see FIG. 19-38(G)), The variable display ends (see FIG. 19-38(H)). Next, when the next variable display, that is, the target hold variable display (for example, the super reach variation pattern) is started, the character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG414 indicating "0" are displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 19-38(I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not shown, when the pattern of "3" is determined, the countdown notice is given when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in FIG. 19-37(C). When the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in FIG. When the pattern of 1" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in FIG. 19-38(G).

Moreover, the production pattern of the countdown is arbitrary, and five or more production patterns may be set. Also, the countdown may be started from a number other than "3". Alternatively, it may be counted up such as "0"→"1"→"2"→"3".

The "suspension change notice" changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) targeted for the look-ahead notice effect is notified of whether or not a big hit will be achieved. It is a performance.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the pending change notice is a pattern where the display color of the pending display finally becomes "blue", "green", "red", and "golden". , and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the hold display (for example, at the time of starting winning, at the time of hold memory consumption, variable display period of target hold, etc.) , If "red" is determined, whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change in stages such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be arbitrarily decided. . Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-39 (A), when the execution of the hold change notice and the pattern of "red" are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the target hold that is the target of the hold change notice is held After the display is displayed in white, the variable display ends. Next, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the pending target changes to "blue" (see FIG. 19-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Next, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the pending target changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 19-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started.

Incidentally, the number of effect patterns of the pending change notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more patterns. Further, pending changes are not limited to changing colors as described above, and may be changed to characters, items, and the like.

"Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is until the variable display of the reserved memory (target hold) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is started. It is an effect that is stopped and displayed at "combination of even numbered symbols" or "combination of odd numbered symbols".

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice is a pattern in which the winning symbols are "combination of even numbered symbols" (for example, "264" etc.) and a pattern in which the winning symbols are "combination of odd numbered symbols" (for example). For example, there is a pattern that is stopped at ``135'', etc.), and based on the result of the variable display, it is determined whether the missing symbols are a combination of even-numbered symbols or a combination of odd-numbered symbols. Further, one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations such as "combination of even numbered symbols" and "combination of odd numbered symbols" may be determined. In addition, the display color of the pedestal display portion 069SG052 (to be described later) that constitutes the decorative pattern includes a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "golden" pattern. A pattern is determined. The degree of expectation is higher for "combination of odd-numbered symbols" than "combination of even-numbered symbols". In addition, the pedestal display part becomes higher in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-40 (A), when the execution of the symbol chance eye notice and the production pattern are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display ends, and the symbol is displayed from the next variable display. Chance notice is started.

When the winning pattern is determined to be "a combination of even-numbered symbols" and the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is determined to have a pattern of "blue", the missing symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of even-numbered symbols of "246", and the pedestal is displayed. The part 069SG052 is displayed in "blue" (see FIGS. 19-40 (B1) and (B2)). On the other hand, when the winning pattern is "combination of odd numbered patterns" and the pedestal display part 069SG052 is determined to be "red", the odd numbered pattern of "375" is stopped and displayed, and the pedestal display part is stopped. 069SG052 is displayed in “red” (see FIGS. 19-40 (C1) and (C2)).

In the present embodiment, the decorative patterns are a number display portion 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a pedestal display portion displayed on a display layer (back side) lower than the number display portion 069SG051. 069SG052. The pedestal display portion 069SG052 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to surround the numbers “1” to “9” displayed on the number display portion 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white). , which is a display mode common to all numbers (“1” to “9”).

The number of effect patterns for the symbol chance eye notice is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations, the display color of the pedestal display portion 069SG052, and the like may have five or more patterns. A character image, a decoration image, or the like may be displayed on the pedestal display portion 069SG052. Also, for example, individual character images corresponding to each number (“1” to “9”) may be displayed.

"Effect display notice" is until the variable display of the pending memory (target pending) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect starts, and when the variable display of the pending memory that is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect starts , the effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 .

In the present embodiment, the effects pattern of the effect display notice includes a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "golden" pattern of the effect image. A pattern is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the effect image (for example, when "red" is determined, it is changed to "red" from the beginning, or "blue" → " It is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change stepwise from "green" to "red"). Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (A), when the execution of the effect display notice and the "red" pattern are determined with the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display ends (FIG. 19-41 ( B)), after the next variable display is started (see FIG. 19-41(C)), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 A “blue” effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIG. 19-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 19-41 (E)), and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable body on the display screen of the image display device 5 32, the "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIG. 19-41(F)). Then, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden when the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started (see FIG. 19-41(G)).

The effect display notice may have any number of production patterns, and may have five or more production patterns. Also, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied according to the degree of expectation. Also, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or during other periods.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161, based on the information received from the main board 11, to control the holding memory stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 to the jackpot game state. Prefetching notice effect type determination tables A to D used for determining whether or not to execute the suggested prefetching notice effect and the type of prefetching notice effect to be executed when execution is decided will be described. 19-42, (A) is the notice effect type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the notice effect type determination table B used in the variable probability state, and (C) is the notice effect used in the time saving state A The type determination table C, (D) is the notice effect type determination table D used in the time saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining various types of effects.

As shown in FIG. 19-42(A), in the advance notice effect type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 "non-execution" Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice" are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "suspension change notice" is assigned. , 15 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 19-42 (B), in the advance notice effect type determination table B used when the game state is the probability variable state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 "non-execution" Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice" are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "suspension change notice" is assigned. , 15 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 19-42 (C), in the notice effect type determination table C used when the game state is the time saving state A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 40 pieces are set to "non-execution" is assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice" Twenty decision values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "loss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", and "symbol chance number 10 determination values are assigned to "notice", and 10 determination values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 19-42 (D), in the notice effect type determination table D used when the game state is the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 70 pieces in "non-execution" are assigned, and 30 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when the variable display result is "loss", the proportion of "non-execution" increases in the order of the normal state, the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. That is, it is most likely to be executed in the probability variable state, and is not executed in the time saving state B (most difficult to be executed). The "countdown notice" is a notice that is not executed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and the "suspended change notice" and "effect display notice" are notices that are not executed in the time saving state B.

Here, the determination of the pre-reading notice effect type is compared in three game states (probability variable state, time saving state A, time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed.

First, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect is 80% in the probability variable state, 60% in the time saving state A, and 30% in the time saving state B, and the variable display result is "miss". The number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined in the case is 40% in the variable probability state, 30% in the time saving state A, and 0% in the time saving state B (non-execution).

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. , and the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is “miss” is “4 types” in the variable state, “3 types” in the time saving state A, and “0 types” in the time saving state B (non- execution)”.

Thus, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", only the "symbol chance eye notice" can be executed, and no other look-ahead notice effects are executed. , and when the variable display result is "missing", the pre-reading foretelling effect is not executed. That is, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect is lower than that in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the number of determinable effect types is small.

Also, in the time-saving state B, it is possible to execute a "symbol chance eye notice" as a look-ahead notice effect. This is because in the time saving state B, a variation pattern with a short variable display time (for example, ultra-shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and the time is shorter when executing the look-ahead effect in the variable display of 1. For example, , It is easy to miss color changes in small pending display areas such as "pending change notice". In addition, although the "countdown notice" is executed with a plurality of variable displays, the change in the count is difficult to notice because the count is displayed for a short period in one variable display. On the other hand, the "pattern chance eye notice" is executed in a plurality of variable displays, and the change in the display color of the decorative pattern and the pedestal can be suitably shown when the decorative pattern is stopped, so the time saving state B It can be said that it is a look-ahead forewarning effect suitable for execution in .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B If the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect when the variable display result is "miss" is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect when the variable display result is "miss" in the probability variable state or time saving state A, time saving state B In the case where the variable display result is "missing", the pre-reading announcement effect may be executed. In addition, if the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "missing" is less than the variable probability state or time saving state A, two or more types of pre-reading notice effects can be executed in time saving state B. may be

Next, the effect pattern determination tables A to F used when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect decided to be executed will be described. 19-43, (A) is the effect pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the effect pattern determination table B used in the variable probability state, (C) is the effect pattern determination table used in the time saving state A C, (D) are the effect pattern determination table D used in the time saving state B, (E) is the effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is the effect pattern determination table F used in the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 19-43(A), when the game state is the normal state, an effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice In A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 19-43 (B), when the game state is the variable probability state, the production pattern determination table commonly used when determining the production pattern of the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice In B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". are assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 19-43 (C), when the game state is the time saving state A, the production pattern determination commonly used when determining the production pattern of the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice In Table C, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "red". decision values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". A judgment value is assigned.

As shown in FIG. 19-43 (D), in the effect pattern determination table D used when determining the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is "big hit". , 90 determination values are assigned to "red" and 10 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", the "symbol chance eye notice" is not executed, so no judgment value is assigned to any effect pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-43(E), when the game state is the normal state, the effect pattern determination table E used for determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice shows that the variable display result is "big hit". , then patterns ending in "3" are assigned five decision values, patterns ending in "2" are assigned five decision values, and patterns ending in "1" are assigned Twenty decision values are assigned, and 70 decision values are assigned to patterns ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , ten determination values are assigned to patterns ending with "1", and five determination values are assigned to patterns ending with "0".

As shown in FIG. 19-43(F), when the game state is the probability variable state, the variable display result is "big hit" in the effect pattern determination table F used for determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice. 5 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "2", and 20 judgment values are assigned to patterns ending in "1". are assigned, and 70 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 20 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "1", and 10 decision values are assigned to patterns ending with "0".

In this way, the effect patterns in the pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice are set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" ( Expectation: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). In addition, the effect pattern in the countdown notice is set so that the expectation level is set to end at "3", end at "2", end at "1", and end in order until "0" (expectation level: "3"). ]<ends with '2'<ends with '1'<until '0').

Here, three game states (probability variable state, time saving state A, time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed are compared with respect to determination of production patterns of various notices.

In addition, the number of production patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probability variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. , and the number of production patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "miss" is "4 types" in the probability variable state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types" in the time saving state B (non execution)”.

Thus, in the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is possible to decide one of two types of "red" or "gold" as the effect pattern of "symbol chance eye notice". In addition, when the result of variable display is "loss", none of the effect patterns of "symbol chance eye notice" is determined (non-execution). That is, in the time saving state B, the number of production patterns that can be determined is smaller than that in the variable probability state and the time saving state A.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 19-36, "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" as notice effects are predetermined in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

"Movable body notice" is an effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is vibrated up and down when the variable display is started to control the big win (see FIGS. 19-57 (A1) (B1). ). The production pattern of the movable body notice has a "vibration (small) pattern" with a small vertical vibration width and a "vibration (large) pattern" with a larger vertical vibration width than the vibration (small), and the variable display result , one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

The movable body 32 can move vertically between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and an effect position approximately in the center of the display screen, and falls by its own weight from the origin position to the effect position. It is possible. The vibration in the advance notice of the movable body is an effect of vibrating the movable body 32 up and down between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position. Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "preview of character", a predetermined character appears during the period from when the variable display is started until the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the reach mode, and the lines of the character are displayed, and the characters are displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. This is an effect that prompts whether or not the reach mode will be achieved by outputting the voice of the displayed lines (see FIGS. 19-57 (A2) and (B2)). The production pattern of the reach notice is a "line A pattern" where the character's line is "Reach?" , non-execution, “serif A pattern”, or “serif B pattern” is determined. The contents of the lines are arbitrary, and lines other than the above may be used.

The character's line pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Also, although the type of character does not change, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of types of characters according to the result of the variable display.

The "ready-to-reach notice" is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L after the decorative patterns variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L are stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. Whether or not the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not the ready-to-win mode is set is produced (Fig. 19-57 (A3 to A5), ( B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative design variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the left decorative design is displayed before the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative design display area 5R. The deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the area 5L is started (see FIGS. 19-57 (A4) and (B4)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, if the ready-to-win mode is not established, the left decoration is performed. A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 19-57 (A5) and (B5)), and the ready-to-win mode. In this case, the decorative design of the same number as the decorative design stop-displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L is stop-displayed at the stop display position.

In addition, the reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns (for example, "333" etc.) that constitutes the big hit display result from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed. ), except for one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) (for example, left pattern and right pattern, etc.) are displayed in a stopped state, and the one decoration pattern (for example, middle pattern, etc.) is variably displayed. It is a mode (also referred to as reach effect) to perform.

When the variation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice regardless of whether or not the variable display result becomes the big hit display result in the reach notice execution determination process of step 069 SGS278 to be described later. It is decided by lottery whether or not, and a production control pattern (process table) corresponding to the content of the decision is set. Further, when the variation pattern is non-reach, the ready-to-reach mode is not entered after the ready-to-reach notice is executed, and when the variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win state, the ready-to-reach mode is entered after the ready-to-reach notice is executed, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. .

The "button notice" is issued after the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L in the right decorative design display area 5R is started when the ready-to-win notice is executed. , is an effect executed until a predetermined operation effective period elapses (see FIGS. 19-57 (A4) and (B4)). Specifically, during the period from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern to the elapse of a predetermined operation valid period, the operation prompting effect prompts the user to operate the push button 31B. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has passed, the operation prompting display and the button image are displayed. is hidden and ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice includes a "long press pattern" that encourages a long press operation of the push button 31B over a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that prompts the push button 31B to be repeatedly pressed over a predetermined operation period. and a "single-hit pattern" that prompts the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the results of the variable display, non-execution, "long-press pattern", "continuous-hit pattern", and "single-hit pattern" are available. one is determined. Incidentally, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation prompting display is "long press!" for the "long press pattern", "successive hits!" for the "continuous hit pattern", and "hit!" for the "single hit pattern".

(Decision production)
Next, the decision performance will be explained. As shown in FIG. 19-36, the determined effect is the effect that is executed before notifying whether or not the big hit is controlled at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (Fig. 19- 58 (C4-C8), see FIGS. 19-59 (A10-D3), (B7-D3)), which is executed during a predetermined operation valid period, and after the "success button effect" There is a "movable body effect" that is executed.

The "approve/fail button effect" is an operation prompting effect that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B until a predetermined operation valid period elapses. and a button image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. , the operation prompting display and the button image are hidden (see FIG. 19-58 (C4), FIGS. 19-59 (A8 to A10), and (B7)).

The effect pattern includes a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red, which will be described later. If "pattern A-1", "pattern A-2", "pattern B-1", and "pattern B-2" are determined in the "movable body motion pattern determination process", "white pattern" is determined When "pattern B-3" is determined, "red pattern" is determined. Either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined according to the result of the variable display, regardless of the "movable body motion pattern determination process". Also, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

"Movable body effect" is a effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to a big win game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period in the "win/fail button effect", or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has passed, the movable body 32 is moved to the origin position. If the movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position to the performance position, it is notified that it will be controlled to the big win game state, and if the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, it is not controlled to the big win game state, that is, it is a failure. (See Fig. 19-58 (C6) and Fig. 19-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 built in the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. , an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 does not fall, the lighting of the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9, the display of the image in which the enemy character is defeated, the effect image, etc. are not executed.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hit/fail button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the big hit, and the variable display result is not lost. In some cases, after the hit/fail button effect is performed, the loss notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

(post-production)
Next, the post-production will be described. As shown in FIG. 19-36, the post-production is the after-effect after it is reported that the variable display part in which the variable display of the decoration pattern in the variable display of the super reach big-hit variation pattern is executed is controlled to the big-hit game state. In the production part, it is a production (see FIGS. 19-60 (D4 to D10)) in which the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state is announced so as to be identifiable.

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot variation pattern to the notification of the variable display result, and the post-effect part is the period during the variable display period of the super reach jackpot variation pattern. It is a period from the end of the variable display part to the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display period of the super reach big hit variation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-effect part period. The post effect is performed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the pattern confirmation period after the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern. You may do so.

In the post-production, a friendly character and an enemy character appearing in the SP ready-to-win production, and a scheduled number-of-balls-out counter display indicating the number of scheduled balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the friendly character attacks the enemy character. is added, the display of the scheduled pitch count counter increases. Next, during a predetermined operation effective period, an operation prompting display consisting of the characters "Press!" and a button image imitating push button 31B are displayed. Alternatively, when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has passed, the friend character defeats the enemy character, a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the counter display of the number of scheduled balls, and the scheduled number of balls during the big win is displayed. The number of balls is reported. After the end of the post-performance, the jackpot game state is started.

(Rush performance)
Next, the rush effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 19-36, the rush effect is the “rush introduction effect” executed before the start of the “variable probability rush effect” and the “time-saving rush effect A”, and the control of the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state. A ``probability variable entry performance'' executed when starting, a ``time reduction rush performance A'' executed when control of the time reduction state A is started after the end of the big win game state, and a jackpot game state in the low probability state. There is a "time saving rush performance B" that is executed when the control of the time saving state B is started due to the execution of 900 times of variable display without being controlled. In addition, the timing to start the relief time-saving arrival variation (variable display when the value of the relief time-saving counter is 0) in which the "time-saving rush effect B" is executed, that is, before the execution of the "time-saving rush effect B""Shuttereffect" (see FIGS. 19-23(B)(C) and FIGS. 19-25(B)(C)) is executed.

Specifically, the “probability variable entry performance” and the “time reduction rush performance A” are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the “time reduction rush performance B” is the 900th time when the start condition for the control of the time reduction state B is established. After the variable display (relief time reduction arrival fluctuation) is completed, it is executed during the symbol determination period (for example, 20 seconds, etc.).

"Time saving rush production A" is a time saving state A by displaying the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" 19-63(D)).

"Probability change rush effect", after the rush introduction effect (see Figure 19-63 (A) ~ (C)) is displayed, in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" By doing so, it is an effect that informs that the control of the variable probability state is started (see FIGS. 19-63 (D) and 19-64 (A1 to A4)).

In addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" By displaying characters, it is an effect to notify that the control of the time saving state B is started (see FIGS. 19-63 (D) and 19-64 (B1 to B4)).

Further, as for the probability variable rush effect/time-saving rush effect B, the characters “BATTLE RUSH rush!!” may be displayed after the characters “pole” and “play 1100” are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 19-44 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS271; Yes), corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning The various command data and various flags stored with the buffer numbers are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 069SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0", Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", and the first special figure reservation storage Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the buffer number "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage ” is shifted so that the various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers “1-3” are stored in correspondence with buffer numbers “1-3”.

In addition, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not on (is off) at step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on ( step 069 SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are shifted upward by one buffer number. (Step 069 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0", 2 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", and the second special figure pending storage Various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage ” is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-3”.

After executing step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern specification command is stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area upon receipt of the variation pattern specification command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 14, and is erased when the variable display ends. It should be noted that the variation pattern designation command may be erased according to reading.

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do. In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 14, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command. erased. It should be noted that the display result specifying command may be erased according to reading.

In addition, in this characteristic part 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a symbol other than "7" as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of even symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", "888"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" is used as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are not aligned is determined as a stop pattern.

Also, in the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the production control process processing of FIG. is determined to be either a combination of even-numbered symbols or a combination of odd-numbered symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 stores a relief time reduction number A designation command specifying that the relief time reduction has been reached in the command storage area, that is, whether the variation is a relief time reduction arrival variation (Step 069SGS276A). If it is a relief time-saving arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), shutter effect setting processing is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a relief time-saving arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter effect setting process, a period until the start of effect is set in the shutter effect start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter effect is started at the timing when the effect start waiting timer is timed up.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS283. If the fluctuation pattern is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069 SGS277; No), reach notice execution decision processing is executed (Step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for reaching notice execution determination is extracted, and whether or not to execute reach notice is determined using the reach notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 19-46 (A). do.

In the reach notice execution determination table, as shown in FIG. 19-46 (A), for each of "non-execution" and "execution", when the game state is "normal state" , “time saving state A” and “time saving state B”, different determination values are assigned so as to have the number of determination values shown in FIG. 19-46(A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is the "normal state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is the "probability variable state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is "time saving state A", 60 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 40 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the game state is "time saving state B", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, the reach notice is set so that the execution ratio becomes lower in order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution ratio: probability variable state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reach notice is exemplified with a probability of 20% in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice is not executed in the time saving state B You may do so.

Returning to FIG. 19-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not execution of reach notice is determined in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A), and if it is determined that execution of reach notice is not determined (step 069SGS279A; No), proceed to step 069SGS280, if it is determined that the execution of reach notice is determined (step 069SGS279A; Yes), after selecting the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice (step 069SGS279B), button notice A pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button notice pattern determination process, for example, a button notice pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and as shown in FIGS. A button notice pattern is determined using Tables A to D.

In the button notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 19-46 (B) to (E) show different determination values for each of the variable display results of "jackpot", "reach failure", and "non-reach failure". are assigned as numbers.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-46(B), in the button notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 determination values are assigned to "single blow", 20 determination values are assigned to "continuous hits", and "long press" is assigned. 20 decision values are assigned to . In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit". 10 determination values are assigned to the "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach out", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-46(C), in the button notice pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "non-execution , 40 judgment values are assigned to "single blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Twenty decision values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "hit". 10 determination values are assigned to the "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach out", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-46 (D), in the button notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 20 determination values are assigned to "execute", 40 determination values are assigned to "hit", 20 determination values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 decision values are assigned to each. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 determination values are assigned to "hit", and 10 determination values are assigned to "continuous hit". Five determination values are assigned to the "long press", and five determination values are assigned to the "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "no reach out", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 determination values are assigned to "hit", and "continuous hit" is assigned. , and 10 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-46 (E), in the button notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 90 determination values are assigned to "execute", and 10 determination values are assigned to "hit". Further, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 5 determination values are assigned to "hit". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the button notice is set so that the execution ratio becomes lower in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

Especially in the case of time saving state B, when the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but the execution ratio of reach notice is low , Even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice will not be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B is "missing", even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice is not executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A is at a rate lower than the execution rate of the button notice in the case of "missing" A button notice may be made executable.

In addition, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0", the button notice is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach notice. The present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the number of pending memories, if the variable display result is "missing", the button announcement may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a big hit or a loss of reach, a pattern of "hit" that prompts the player to perform one operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and the player is not allowed to perform the operation for a predetermined operation valid period. The "continuous hit" or "long press" operation, which is more troublesome than the "single hit" operation that prompts the player to perform one operation, is not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 19-44, when it is determined that execution of the reach notice is not determined in step 069SGS279A (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button notice pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the effect control CPU 120 Character announcement pattern determination processing is executed (step 069 SGS280). In the character notice pattern determination process, a character notice pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and a character notice pattern determination table A corresponding to the game state is created as shown in FIGS. ~D is used to determine the character announcement pattern.

In the character announcement pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. For each pattern of ", if the variable display result is "big hit", the different judgment value for each case of "loss" will be the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 19-47 (A) to (D) so that it is assigned.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-47(A), in the character notice pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-47(B), in the character notice pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "non-execution , 30 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "word B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-47 (C), in the character notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non 20 determination values are assigned to "execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "serif A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "serif B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "word A", and "word B" is assigned. , 10 decision values are assigned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-47 (D), in the character notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "big hit", "non 90 judgment values are assigned to "execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "serif B". Further, when the variable display result is "miss", 95 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "serif A". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the character notice is set so that the execution ratio decreases in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: variable probability state > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

Especially in the case of time saving state B, if the variable display result is "off" when the number of pending memories is "0", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but in the variable display of any fluctuation pattern Character announcements are never executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the character notice is not executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if it is possible to execute the character notice at a rate lower than the character notice execution rate when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A good.

Also, in the time saving state B, when the number of pending memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "missing", the character notice is executed at a rate of 5%, but the present invention is limited to this. Regardless of the number of pending memories, if the variable display result is "miss", the character announcement may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19-44, after executing the character notice pattern determination process in step 069 SGS280, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a super ready-to-win variation pattern. Judge (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), proceed to step 069SGS282. When the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), movable body motion pattern determination processing is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern corresponding to the game state is determined as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion pattern is determined using determination tables A to D.

In the movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 19-48(A) to (D), the movable body announcement is not executed, and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (determined performance). "Pattern A-1" for a big hit, "Pattern A-2" for a big hit where the movable body notice is vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body production, the movable body notice is vibration (large), "Pattern A-3" for a big hit in which the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body production, and "Pattern B-1" for a loss in which the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is not dropped in the movable body production of the fixed production. , "Pattern B-2" for missing the movable body notice is vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is not dropped in the movable body presentation, the movable body notice is vibration (large) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body presentation 19-48 (A) to ( It is assigned so that the number of judgment values shown in D) is obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-48(A), in the movable body movement pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", , 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern A-3". has been assigned a value. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-48(B), in the movable body motion pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", the "pattern A-1" is assigned 20 determination values, "Pattern A-2" is assigned 10 determination values, and "Pattern A-3" is assigned 70 determination values. It is In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-48 (C), in the movable body motion pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "big hit", " 10 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 10 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 80 decision values are assigned to "pattern A-3". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-48 (D), in the movable body motion pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 90 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1", 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3". assigned. In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-1" when the variable display result is "miss".

In this way, when comparing the movable body motion pattern when the variable display result is a big hit in the three game states excluding the normal state, "pattern A-" in which both the movable body announcement and the movable body effect are executed 2”, the execution ratio of “pattern A-3” is higher than the time saving state B in the probability changing state and the time saving state A. On the other hand, the rate of execution of “Pattern A-1” in which the movable body announcement is not executed and only the movable body presentation is executed is higher in the time saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body motion patterns when the variable display result is lost in the three game states excluding the normal state, "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3" in which only the movable body notice is executed ', the probability variable state and the time saving state A are higher than the time saving state B (non-execution).

That is, in the case of the time saving state B, the execution ratio of the movable body notice is lower than that of the variable probability state and the time saving state A (execution ratio of the movable body notice: variable probability state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, execution of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable object announcement is not executed and only the movable object effect is executed. Although the ratio illustrated the form of 90%, the present invention is not limited to this, "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the variable probability state or the time saving state A If it is higher than the execution rate of , it may be 90% or less. Further, the execution ratio may be 100% when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B.

Returning to FIG. 19-44, when the variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern in step 069SGS281A, that is, when it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the movable body notice pattern. Processing is executed (step 069SGS282). In the movable body notice pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body notice pattern is extracted, and a movable body notice pattern corresponding to the game state is determined as shown in FIGS. The determination tables A to D are used to determine the movable body advance notice pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 19-49A to 19-49D, in the movable body advance notice pattern determination tables A to D, the respective patterns of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)" On the other hand, if the variable display result is "big hit", different judgment values for each case of "loss" are assigned so that the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 19-49 (A) to (D) ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-49(A), in the movable body notice pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", , 10 decision values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 decision values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 decision values are assigned to "vibration (large)". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-49(B), in the movable body announcement pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability variable state", when the variable display result is the "jackpot", "non 10 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". there is In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (C), in the movable body notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration (Large)” is assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (D), in the movable body notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", super Since only the reach variation pattern is determined, no determination value is assigned to any of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)". In addition, if the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution". there is

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the movable body notice is set so that the execution ratio decreases in the order of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state>time saving state A>time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the non-reach variation pattern is determined, the movable body announcement is not executed, including when the number of pending memories is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missed" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body notice is not executed. It is not limited, and the movable body notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable body notice when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or the time saving state A. It may be possible.

In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body notice is exemplified as a non-execution form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, if the variable display result is "missing" when the number of pending memories is other than "0", the movable body announcement may be executed.

When execution of any of the effect patterns is determined in the above-described button notice pattern determination process, character notice pattern decision process, or movable body notice pattern decision process, the period until notice start is set in various notice start waiting timers. , the corresponding advance notice is started at the timing when the various advance notice start waiting timers are timed up.

Returning to FIG. 19-44, if the variation pattern is the shortened non-reach variation pattern or the ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern in step 069SGS277, if the movable body motion pattern determination process of step 069SGS281B is executed, the movable body announcement pattern determination of step 069SGS282 When the process is executed, in step 069SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 069SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 069SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process ends.

(Effect processing during variable display)
Next, FIG. 19-45 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has various effect start waiting timers set (determined to perform the notice effect etc.), or the notice effect execution flag is ON (execution of the notice effect In the case (step 069SGS304; Y), various effect processing is executed (step 069SGS305). If both the effect start waiting timer and the notice effect executing flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without executing the effect processing of step 069SGS305.

At step 069 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 069 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 069SGS314). If the definite command reception flag is not ON (step 069SGS314; No), the process is terminated.

If the variable display time timer has timed out at step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the determination command reception flag is ON at step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), right-handed LED lighting start command reception It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step 069SGS315). When the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-handed hitting LED 069SG031 starts lighting, and the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start the right-handed notice. After (step 069SGS316), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

If the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether or not the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS317; Yes), the lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 is terminated, and after the right-handed notification is finished by hiding the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the like ( Step 069SGS318), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Also, if the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319) , terminate the process.

In addition, although not shown in a particularly detailed illustration, after executing the processing from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318, after the pattern confirmation period specified from the symbol confirmation designation command based on the confirmation command reception flag has passed, the effect control process flag The value of is updated to a value according to the special figure per waiting process (step S173).

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to the control of stopping the fluctuation. Even when the designated command is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the normal variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the processing of step 069 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

(Various action examples by game state)
Next, examples of various operations for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-50. 19-50, (A) is a diagram showing an example of variation operation by game state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of effect operation by game state, (C) is for explaining the characteristics of time saving state B It is a diagram.

First, as shown in FIG. 19-50 (A), the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" are compared. .

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of deviation variation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. Reach" and "SP Reach D" are "two", and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIGS. Shortened non-reach A”, “non-reach A”, “SP reach C”, “SP reach D” “four”, and in “time saving state A”, shown in Figure 19-7 (A) (B) Thus, when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3, the maximum is "3" of "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

That is, when the variable display result is "missing", the number (for example, two) of the missing variation patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (for example, 3) and less than the number (for example, 4) of determinable deviation variation patterns in the "probability variation state".

In addition, the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, or the case of the time saving state B is more than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state. If less, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for is about 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for possible misses is about 2.205 seconds {((1.5s*97)+(25s*3))/100=2.205}. Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state B is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 1100 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state B The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205*1099))/1100=2.20985}.

In the "probable variable state", as shown in FIGS. 19-6 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 is about 8.2 seconds {((7 s × 95) + (40 s × 2) + (25 s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, variable display time of fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 is about 4.8 seconds {((3s*85)+(7s*10)+(40s*2)+(25s*3))/100=4.8}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after the probability change state is started has a reserved memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in the probability change state. is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8*109))/110=4.83}.

In the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIGS. 19-7 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is about 9.15 seconds {((7s×95)+(50s×5))/100=9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 is about 5.55 seconds {((3s×90)+(7s×5)+(50s×5))÷100=5.55}. Here, assuming that the number of retained memories is 0 in the first variable display after the time saving state A is started, and the number of retained memories is 1 to 3 in the variable display of 2 to 110 times, it is possible to determine in the time saving state A The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55*109))/110=5.58}.

That is, the average time of the variable display time of the missing variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "off" (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is in the "time saving state A" Less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (e.g., about 5.58 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability variation state" (e.g., about 4.83 seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B" is the pending memory in "time saving state A" Less than the average time (for example, about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined when the number is 0, and the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "probability variation state" is less than the average time of the variable display time (eg, about 8.2 seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 in "time saving state B" is, in "time saving state A" Less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (eg, about 5.55 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability variation state" (eg, about 4.8 seconds).

According to the items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. The variable display in which is not determined has fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average time of variable display time, so that the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that of the variable probability state and the time saving state A, so it provides a suitable time saving state B. can do.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern is longer in the order of time saving state B, probability variable state, and time saving state A, or the case of time saving state B is more than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state If shorter, the time can be varied.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. ”, and in the “variable probability state”, as shown in FIG. ”, and in the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. is "two" of ".

That is, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (for example, 2) and less than the number (for example, 3) of determinable deviation variation patterns in the "probability variation state".

In addition, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, or the case of the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state. If less, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. is about 40 seconds.

In the "probability variable state", as shown in FIG. 19-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is about 51.1 seconds { ((22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined in the variable probability state is about 51.1 seconds.

In the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 19-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for the big hit that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is about 62.8 seconds. {((22s*5)+(55s*95))/100=62.85}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the big hit variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "big hit" is determined in the "time saving state A". Less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in the "probability variable state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds) less than

According to the items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. The variable display for which is determined has fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average time of the variable display time, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases more than the probability variable state and the time saving state A, so the suitable time saving state B is selected. can provide.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern is longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A, or the time saving state B is longer than at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state. If shorter, the time can be varied.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of the non-reach deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. , In the "variable probability state", as shown in FIGS. 19-6 (A) (B), the number of pending memories is 0, 80% when 1 to 3, and in the "time saving state A", FIG. As shown in -7 (A) and (B), it is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3.

That is, the ratio (for example, 97%) in which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is the variable display result in the "time saving state A" is higher than the ratio (for example, 95%) at which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "missing", and when the variable display result is "missing" in the "variable probability state", the CPU 103 higher than the proportion (eg, 95%) determined by the "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern".

According to the item (A5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is not decided to control to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B because it is less likely to be mischievous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach loss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "missing" is 97% for the time saving state B, and both the probability changing state and the time saving state A At 95%, the form in which the time saving state B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A are lowered in order is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B (eg, 97%), the probability variable state (eg , 95%), the time saving state A (for example, 94%) may be lower in order, or if the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the above The ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state B", the ratio of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 is 97%. The present invention is not limited to this, the ratio of determining the "non-reach loss variation pattern" by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time saving state B" is 100%, that is, " If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B", the reach variation pattern may not be determined.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 can determine in the "time saving state B" loss variation pattern (for example, "non-reach A"), and "time saving state A" and "probable variable state" determined Since the possible deviation variation pattern (for example, “non-reach A”) is common, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 can determine the loss variation pattern in the "time saving state B" (for example, "SP reach D"), and the loss variation pattern that can be determined in the "probability variation state" ( For example, "SP reach D") is common, so that the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-50 (B), compare the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" do.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution ratio of "movable body notice" and "character notice" as a jackpot suggestion effect in the variable display of the loss variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, in "time saving state B", Fig. 19-49 ( As shown in D), the execution ratio of "movable body notice" is 0% (non-execution), and as shown in FIG. Yes, in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. 19-49 (B), the execution ratio of "movable body notice" is 40%, as shown in FIG. The ratio is 30%, and in the “time saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 19-49 (C), the execution ratio of “movable body notice” is 30%, as shown in FIG. The execution ratio of "character announcement" is 20%.

In other words, it should be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state A", and when the variable display is performed in the variation pattern, and when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "probable variable state" When the variable display is executed in the variable pattern, while the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B" When the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined in (1), suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are not executed in the variable display.

According to the item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time. To provide a suitable time-saving state B because there is no mischief caused by a movable body notice or a character notice in variable display of a variable pattern (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach). be able to.

To explain in detail, when the control of the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B is started, since the left-handed game in the normal state has been performed until then, the reserved memory is stored in the first reserved memory. Even if there is, it is conceivable that there is no reserved memory in the second reserved memory. In other words, when the variable probability state or time saving state A is started at the first hit, or when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times, the time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory In order to earn money, the deviation variation pattern that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 is a deviation variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation time of 25 seconds and 40 seconds of SP reach) are determined at a high rate. Then, when a loss variation pattern whose variable display time is longer than that of shortened non-reach is determined, suggestive effects such as "notice of movable body" and "notice of character" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of the time saving state B is started, the player has a high possibility that various outage notices have been executed in the long game period so far, so even in the time saving state B "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed, it will be annoyed, so when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, "movable "Body notice" and "Character notice" are not executed.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", "movable body notice" or " Although a form in which suggestive effects such as "character notice" are not executed has been exemplified, for example, when variable display is executed in a deviation variation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B", The execution ratio of suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in variable display is better It is preferable to make it lower than the execution rate.

In addition, when the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed is the time saving state B If the execution ratio of "movable body notice" or "character notice" in is lower than the execution ratio of "movable body notice" or "character notice" in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable state, the above ratio is various can be changed to

In addition, in the time saving state B, if it is a losing variation pattern, "movable body notice" and "character notice" are not executed, and if it is a big hit change pattern, "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed. You may do so. By doing so, in the time saving state B, interest can be enhanced by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect such as "notice of movable body" or "notice of character" is executed.

In addition, the suggestive effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is "reach notice" or " It may also include a button notice. By doing so, in the time-saving state B, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the "ready-to-reach notice" and the "button notice" are executed, thereby increasing interest.

Further, based on the variable display result, a first suggesting effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and a second suggesting effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state than when the first suggesting effect is executed. By being able to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a suggestive effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest. can be enhanced.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. ”, and in the “probability change state”, as shown in FIG. There are, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG.

That is, when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B", the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 0 pieces) is the variable display result in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of pre-reading notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is less than the number of types (for example, 3), and when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state", the pre-reading that can be determined by the production control CPU 120. It is less than the number of types of notice (for example, 4).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is exemplified. It is not limited to this, for example, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is "time saving state A" and "probable variable state If the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in at least one of the above, one or more types of pre-reading notice may be executable.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is lost in the “time saving state B” is variable display in at least one of the “time saving state A” and the “variable probability state”. If the number is less than the number of types of pre-reading advance notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the result is a loss, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution ratio of "pre-reading notice" when the variable display result is lost, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. In state", as shown in FIG. 19-42(B), the total execution ratio of "countdown notice", "hold change notice", symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%", In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 19-42(C), the total execution ratio of "holding change notice", symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

That is, the execution ratio (for example, 0%) of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state A" (for example, 30%), and lower than the execution ratio (for example, 40%) of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "variable probability state".

According to the items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is controlled to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display in which is not determined, development costs can be suppressed by reducing the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined, and the pre-reading notice effects are less likely to be mischievous, so it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B. can.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is 0%, that is, the form in which the pre-reading notice is not executed was exemplified. It is not limited, for example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the variable display result in at least one of "time saving state A" and "variable probability state" If it is lower than the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice in the case of the loss, the pre-reading notice may be made executable.

In addition, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice in the case where the variable display result is lost in the "time saving state B" is the prefetching in the case where the variable display result is lost in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability variable state" As long as it is lower than the execution rate of the notice, the above rate can be changed in various ways.

In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance eye notice , and "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "hold There are "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the first prefetch notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, Fig. 19 -43 (D) reference) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 19-43 (C)), so that the time saving In the state B, since the first pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be mischievous, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, the first pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, “holding change notice”, “symbol chance eye notice , and "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice effect pattern (for example, "hold There are "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, Fig. 19 -43 (D) reference) is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 19-43 (C)) , In the time-saving state B, since the second foreseeing forewarning effect is likely to be executed, the suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A and the variable probability state and the pre-reading notice effect pattern executable by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, “symbol chance eye By not setting the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in at least one of the time saving state A and the variable probability state are common. By not setting a pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B and the pre-reading notice effect pattern that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state are common (for example, By doing so, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution ratio of "button notice" as an action promotion effect that encourages the player's action, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. In the case of "5%", in the "probability variable state", as shown in FIG. In state A", as shown in FIG. 19-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a loss. It should be noted that these execution ratios are the ratios when the "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for big hits, 5% for losing) is the execution of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" It is lower than the ratio (eg, 80% for the big hit, 20% for the loss), and the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "variable state" (eg, 80% for the big hit, 30% for the loss). low.

According to the item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, the player is instructed to push the button in the variable display of 1. Since the number of executions of the button notice, which is an operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of 31B, is small, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "time saving state B" is higher than the execution ratio of the button notice per variable display in the "time saving state A" and the "variable probability state" However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button notice may not be executed (execution rate 0%) in "time saving state B".

In addition, the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of button notice per variable display in "time saving state A" or "variable probability state", the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button notice, a "single hit pattern" as a first action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a single action, and a "continuous hit pattern, long hit pattern" as a second action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a predetermined action period. Regarding the execution ratio of "push pattern", in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. is "5%", and in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (non-execution)" in the case of a big hit or a loss.

In the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. 19-46 (C), the execution ratio of the "hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "10%" on average in the case of a miss. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "20%" on average in the case of a loss.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 19-46 (D), the execution ratio of the "hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "7.5%" on average in the case of a loss. , in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit, and "17.5%" on average in the case of a miss.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 can determine execution of both the "single blow pattern" and the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "variable probability state" and the "time saving state A", and in the "time saving state B" , the “single hit pattern” can be determined, but the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” is not determined.

In addition, the execution ratio of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for big hits and losses) is pattern, long press pattern” execution ratio (for example, 40% for big hits, 20% for misses), and the execution ratio of “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” per variable display of 1 in “time saving state A” (eg 40% for big hits, 17.5% for losers).

According to the item (B5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period not controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time, the player pushed over the operation valid period Since the player is less likely to be prompted to perform troublesome operations such as "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in which the button 31B must be operated continuously, the preferred time-saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the "single blow pattern" in the "time saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern". , The present invention is not limited to this, for example, the determination ratio of "hit pattern" in "time saving state B" is "hit pattern" in at least one of "time saving state A" and "probability variable state" If it is lower than the determined ratio of , the "hit pattern" may be made executable.

Also, in the time saving state B, the ratio (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a big hit is used for effect control when the variable display result is a loss. By making the rate (for example, 5%) higher than the execution rate of the "button notice" by the CPU 120, attention can be paid to the execution of the "button notice" in the time-saving state B, and interest can be improved.

In addition, as the effect pattern of the "button notice", a "single hit" pattern, a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "single hit" pattern is executed, There is a rate (eg, 10%) in which the “hit” pattern is executed in the time saving state B, and the rate at which the “continuous hit” or “long press” pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability change (for example, 40% ), but the rate of execution of the "hit" pattern in the time saving state B is higher than the rate of execution of the "continuous hit" and "long press" patterns in the time saving state A and the probability change good. By doing so, when the action promotion effect is executed in the time saving state B, the pattern of "one blow" is often used, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state and the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the "reach notice" is executed period), the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of "button notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state and the time saving state B.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 also provides an action promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated before the operation effective period starts) before executing the "button notice". When it is possible to execute a production that is displayed or an effect display is displayed), the period during which the operation promotion preparation production is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the operation promotion preparation production in the time saving state B It is preferable that the execution period and the period are the same. By doing so, the development cost can be reduced, and the execution of the "button notice" can be preferably notified.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution ratio per variable display of "movable body notice" as a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the jackpot game state, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 19-49 (D), 0% (non-execution) in the case of a big hit or loss, and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. In time-saving state A”, as shown in FIG. 19-49(C), it is 90% in the case of a big hit and 30% in the case of a loss.

That is, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% big hit, 0% loss) is "movable body" per variable display in "time saving state A" Lower than the execution ratio of "notice" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% loss), and the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "variable state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% loss) ).

According to the item (B6), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is suggested that it is controlled to the jackpot game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state continued for a long time. Since the number of execution times of the movable body announcement to be performed is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "movable body notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this. ,) is that the execution ratio of “movable body notice” per variable display in “time saving state B” is “movable If it is lower than the execution ratio of "body announcement", "movable body announcement" may be made executable in "time saving state B".

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, the proportion (for example, 0%) at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B is " Although it is lower than the rate (for example, 90%) at which "movable body notice" is executed, the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is that the variable display result is a big hit. In the case of , it may be higher than the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state. By doing so, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B.

In addition, the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "vibration (small)" pattern in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is the time saving state A and the probability variable state when the variable display result is a big hit Although the ratio (for example, 30%) of executing the “vibration (small)” pattern in , When the variable display result is a big hit, it may be higher than the ratio (for example, 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variable state. By doing so, interest can be improved by differentiating the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" in the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B.

<Item B7>
As shown in FIG. 19-47 (D), in the “time saving state B”, the execution ratio per variable display of “character notice” as a stimulus effect to instigate whether or not the variable display mode is a reach mode 2, 10% in the case of a big hit, 5% in the case of a miss, and in the "variable probability state", as shown in FIG. Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 19-47 (C), it is 80% for a big hit and 20% for a miss.

That is, the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% big hit, 5% loss) is "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (eg, 80% jackpot, 20% loss), and the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display in "variable state" (eg, 80% jackpot, 30% loss) than low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. B" is 20%, "variable probability state" is 50%, and "time saving state A" is 40%.

That is, the execution ratio of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 20%) is the execution ratio of "reach notice" per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example , 40%) and lower than the execution ratio (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "variable probability state".

According to the item (B7), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, whether or not reach is established is encouraged. Since the number of execution times of the reach notice and the button notice is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of "time saving state A" and "movable body notice". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of "character notice" per one variable display in "time saving state B" may be 0%, that is, may not be executed. In addition, if the execution ratio of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of "time saving state A" or "movable body notice", the above ratio can be changed in various ways. be.

<Item B8>
"Pattern A" that executes "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" is a movable body motion pattern of "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" that can be executed in the variable display of 1 by the presentation control CPU 120. -2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)” and “Pattern A-1 (first 2 effect execution pattern)”, and in the case where the variable display result is a big hit, regarding the execution ratio of “pattern A-1”, in “time saving state B”, as shown in FIG. 19-48 (D) is 90%, in the “probability variable state”, it is 20% as shown in FIG. 19-48 (B), and in “time saving state A”, it is 10% as shown in FIG. .

In other words, the execution ratio (for example, 90%) of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is the same as "time saving state A" when the variable display result is wrong. Higher than the execution rate (eg, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in the "variable state" (eg, 20%) high.

According to the item (B8), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big hit game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big hit game state continued for a long time. In this case, the movable body 32 is less likely to be unnecessarily operated in the movable body notice before the execution of the movable body performance in which the big hit is notified by the falling of the movable body 32, so a suitable time-saving state B. can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is lost in "time saving state B" is the variable display result in "time saving state A" and "variable probability state" Although the form lower than the execution ratio of "Pattern A-1" in the case is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" Pattern A-1" may be executed at 0%, that is, not executed.

Also, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the rate at which "pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed (for example , 80 to 90%), "pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B By being higher than the ratio (for example, 10%), in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, attention can be paid to whether or not the movable body 32 operates, and interest can be improved.

In addition, the execution frequency (eg, about 10%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state B is lower than the execution frequency (eg, 80 to 90%) of the “movable body effect” in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. Since the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the time saving state B, the suitable time saving state B can be provided.

<Item B9>
19-60 for the effect mode of the "post effect" in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies the scheduled number of balls to be given in the big hit game state in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the SP reach effect is controlled to the big win game state. As shown in , "time saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time saving state A" are common.

According to the item (B9), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big win game state considering that the period not controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the speed of digestion of the variable display increases, and after being notified that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, the time saving state Since A and the probability variable state can be excited by a common performance, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, a "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, and a "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B , are common (see FIG. 19-59 (D1)), the development cost can be reduced.

In addition, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the control data for the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-production" in the time saving state B The control data to be used is common (for example, light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post production" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post production" in the time saving state B , are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), the development cost can be reduced.

<Item B10>
When the time saving control is started, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the start of the time saving control by displaying a rush image 069SG470 (for example, characters such as "BATTLE RUSH rush!!") as a special state start display. Regarding the "rush performance" as the special state start performance, when control of the variable probability state is started, a rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the variable probability rush performance, and when the control of the time saving state B is started, the time saving rush performance B is displayed. In addition to displaying the rush image 069SG470, the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, characters such as “play 1100”) are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or time saving state A is started. (See FIGS. 19-63 (D), 19-64 (A4) and (B4)).

According to the item (B10), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, the probability variable state control is performed in the rush effect. Not only the rush image 069SG470 common to when it is started, but also the idle time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state is started, are displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B is excited. can be done.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 may be capable of determining a special fluctuation pattern having a variable display time during which the "rush production" can be executed in the relief time-saving arrival fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to suitably execute the "plunging effect".

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-50 (C), the difference between "time saving state B", "probability variable state" and "time saving state A" will be described.

<Item C1>
As described in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 19-50 (A), the number of loss variation patterns and jackpot variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 is the smallest in the case of the time saving state B, and the loss variation The average time of the variable display time of the pattern and the jackpot variation pattern is the shortest in the case of the time saving state B, and the determination ratio of non-reach loss is the highest in the case of the time saving state B. Therefore, the average digestion time per variable display in each of the “time saving state B”, “probability variable state”, and “time saving state A” in which time saving control is performed is the fastest in the time saving state B, and the probability variable state is medium speed , time-saving state A is slow.

In this way, among the time saving state B, the probability changing state and the time saving state A in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than the normal state by performing the time saving control, the probability changing state and the time saving state A are advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the time-saving state B is controlled via execution of variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without the occurrence of a big hit in the low-probability state. be.

In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the number of times of variable display in which the time saving control is performed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in the time saving state B, the number of times of variable display in which the time saving control is performed is It is a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times.

That is, in the case of the time-saving state such as the probability variable state and the time-saving state A, the player can wait for the next big hit while enjoying the reach and various effects while suppressing the investment compared to the normal state. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state B, there is no big hit and the game is controlled through a long-term game in a disadvantageous state for the player, and the number of times of variable display of the time saving control is larger than that of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. Considering that it is a time-saving state, by increasing the variation efficiency as described above, the number of wasteful hits is reduced and the investment is suppressed. By giving priority to winning a big hit in time, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

<Item C2>
In addition, as described in each item B1 to B10 shown in FIG. 19-50 (B), the execution ratio of the various notice effects described above is the lowest in the time saving state B, the highest in the variable probability state, and the time saving state A Medium.

In other words, in the game over a long period of time until it is controlled to the time saving state B, various announcement effects are executed, and the player is likely to be depressed by continuing to miss, so the time saving In the state B, the execution ratio of the notice effect is lower than that in other game states, so that it is possible to suitably prevent the player from losing the motivation to play due to the losing effect.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time saving state B has a higher variation efficiency than the other variable states and the time saving state A in which the time saving control is performed in the same way, and the opportunity to be fueled by the notice effect is reduced, so additional investment This is a game state characterized by suitably digesting the variable display and waiting for a big hit while suppressing the decline of the player's desire to play.

More specifically, the time-saving state B has an average normal figure fluctuation time (period for changing the normal figure), the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game, and the game ball is easy to enter the second start winning opening. While the control (high open control, high base control) etc. is common with other probability variable states and time saving state A, the average special figure fluctuation time (period of changing special figures) is changed to other probability variable states and time saving This is a time-saving state in which variation efficiency is prioritized over performance by lowering the execution frequency of various performances while increasing variation efficiency by shortening the time compared to state A. - 特許庁

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable loss variation pattern in time saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D), and determinable loss variable display pattern in at least one of time saving state A and probability change state (e.g., non-reach , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D), and the loss variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability change state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D ) and are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is controlled to the time saving state A. preferably shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time-saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases, thereby providing a suitable time-saving state B, and in the time-saving state A. The interest in the game can be enhanced by lengthening the average time of the control period.

In addition, the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, two) is less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (eg, three), and in the time saving state A The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the probability variable state (eg, 4). By reducing the number to give priority to the completion of the variable display, increasing the number of determinable loss variation patterns in the probability variation state can enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, SP reach D), and at least one of the time saving state A and the probability changing state (for example, the probability changing state) The big hit variable display pattern that can be determined in , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the big hit variation pattern in the time saving state B (for example, without SP) and the big hit variable display pattern (for example, without SP) that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the variable probability state. By doing so, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B.

In addition, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is controlled to the time saving state A. preferably shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time-saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, so that the digestion speed of the variable display increases, thereby providing a suitable time-saving state B, and in the time-saving state A. The interest in the game can be enhanced by lengthening the average time of the control period.

In addition, the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state B by the CPU 103 (for example, one) is less than the number of big hit variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, two), and in the time saving state A The number of determinable jackpot variation patterns (for example, two) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in the variable probability state (eg, three), so that in the time saving state B, the number of determinable jackpot variation patterns While the number is reduced to give priority to the completion of the variable display, the number of determinable big hit variation patterns is increased in the variable probability state, thereby making the game more interesting.

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable in the time saving state B non-reach out variation pattern (eg, non-reach), and the non-reach out variation pattern (eg, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state And are common, and by not setting the determinable non-reach deviation only in the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B (eg, non-reach) and the non-reach loss variation pattern (eg, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability variable state are common It is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity by not setting the determinable non-reach deviation only in the time saving state B.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in the time saving state B (for example, SP non-through), and the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, SP non Via) and are common, and by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, the CPU 103 is determinable in the time saving state B non-reach big hit variation pattern (for example, SP non-passing), and non-reach loss variation pattern determinable in both the time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, SP non-passing), is common, and by not setting a non-reach big hit that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and reduce the program capacity.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is exemplified as a form in which the probability is changed and the time saving state is lower than the time saving state A. For example, the normal state (low probability / Low base state) is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving arrival fluctuation) When the number of remaining variable display times becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 100 times or 50 times), the effect control CPU 120 may be made lower than the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the normal state. Also, in this case, the execution ratio of 1 production is lower than the execution ratio in the normal state, but may be higher than the execution ratio in the time saving state B (execution ratio of 1 production; normal state (remaining Number of times 101 times or more)> Normal state (Remaining number of times 100 times or less)> Time saving state B).

Also, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving arrival fluctuation) is less than a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 100 times or 50 times) At times, the contents of the items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may change to correspond to the time saving state B. By doing in this way, the troublesomeness until it is controlled by the time saving state B can be suppressed.

Also, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the remaining variable display count until it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving fluctuation) is a specific number (for example, the remaining 50 times or 10 times) or less. When the variable display result is a big hit in , the ratio of execution of low-expectation effects (for example, SP ready-to-win effect A, weak pattern advance notice effect, etc.) may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the pattern)
Next, the variable display mode of decorative patterns and small patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-51 to 19-55. FIG. 19-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in (A) the variable probability state, the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state A, and (B) the shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state B. . FIG. 19-52 is an example of the effect operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. FIG. 19-53 is an example of the effect operation of the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern of the probability variable state and the time saving state A. 19-54 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-time variation pattern in the time saving state B. FIG. FIG. 19-55 is an example of effect operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. FIG.

In the present embodiment, the decoration patterns variably displayed in the decoration design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R are a number display portion 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a number display portion 069SG051 lower than the number display portion 069SG051. and a pedestal display portion 069SG052 displayed on the display layer (back side). On the other hand, the left small pattern, the middle small pattern, and the right small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each composed of numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative patterns. Configured. The decoration design and the small design are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design.

The variable display modes of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R of the decorative patterns (for example, non-reach-type loss fluctuation patterns, etc.) are the normal state, the probability variable state/time saving state A, and the time saving state B. The case is different from the case of . Below, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the non-reach variation pattern (including shortened non-reach A, non-reach A) in the normal state, probability variable state/time saving state A, timing of FIG. 19-51 (A) Based on the chart, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 19-52 and 19-53. In addition, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach system off in the normal state, the variable probability state and the time saving state A is common, FIG. do.

As shown in FIG. 19-51 (A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the decorative design and small design of each decorative design display area 5L, 5R, 5R are variable The displays are started simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 19-52(A)). That is, the starting order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. In addition, each decorative pattern is changed to "medium speed" at timing ta2 after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display was started at "low speed", and at timing ta3 after a predetermined time has passed, it is changed to "high speed" which is the maximum speed. After that, the display is variably displayed at a constant rotational speed. On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the variable display start timing ta1. Incidentally, the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decoration pattern and the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative design display area 5L, the right decorative design display area 5R, and the middle decorative design display area 5C. . Then, at the timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 19-52(B)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size after a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 19-52(C)), the original size is displayed. At the timing of returning to , the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 19-52(D)).

Next, at a timing ta5 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 19-52(E)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size after a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 19-52 (F)), the original size At the timing of returning to , the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 19-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 19-53(H)). Next, after the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size after a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 19-53 (I)), the original size is displayed. At the timing ta6 after returning to , the decoration design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 19-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in a temporary stop display mode (for example, , swing mode, etc.).

Then, at timing ta7 when a predetermined time has passed from timing ta6 when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 5C (timing when the design confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle, and right small patterns are displayed at the same time. (All at once) Stop display (see FIG. 19-53(K)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific action. At the timing ta7 when the small symbols are stop-displayed, the three decoration symbols temporarily stopped-displayed in the decoration-design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stop-displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at timing ta8 after the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 ms) has passed from timing ta7 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed.

Next, the variable display mode of the non-reach-type off decorative symbols in the time saving state B will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-54 based on the timing chart of FIG. 19-51(B). In addition, since the variable display mode of the non-reach system off decorative symbols in the time saving state B is common, FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 19-51 (B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the ultra-shortened non-reach out in the time saving state B, the decorative design of each decorative design display area 5L, 5R, 5R and the small design are variablely displayed. They are started at the same time (all at once) (see FIG. 19-54(A)). That is, the starting order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. Further, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotational speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at timing tb2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the variable display start timing tb1. Incidentally, the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decoration pattern and the "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display is approaching, the variable display speeds of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are simultaneously (simultaneously) set to "medium speed", and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C At the timing tb3 when the decoration symbols are simultaneously (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 19-54(B)). Incidentally, the variable display speed of the decoration pattern may be changed from "high speed" to "low speed" without going through "medium speed". Next, the pedestal display portion 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, and a specific operation display (stop display action) is not performed, and a predetermined time has passed since timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed. At the timing tb4 (the timing of receiving the symbol confirmation designation command), the left, middle and right small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time (see FIG. 19-54(C)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific action. At the timing tb4 when the small symbols are stop-displayed, the three decoration symbols temporarily stopped-displayed in the decoration-design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stop-displayed.

Then, at timing tb5 after a symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 ms) has passed from timing tb4 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the next variable display can be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time saving state B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A, The time saving state B may be shorter than the probability variable state and the time saving state A. In addition, the period in which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the case of the time saving state B than in the case of the time saving state B and the time saving state A, but the time saving state B and the time saving state and the time saving state It may be common with A.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A (left, middle, right Although the decorative patterns are horizontally aligned and stopped display), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, While the decorative patterns are horizontally arranged and displayed stationary, in the time saving state B, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the time saving state B such that the left, middle and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at different positions in the vertical direction. The mode may be different from the stop display mode of the decorative symbols in the variable probability state or the time saving state A. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative design that is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A (variable display in the vertical direction). ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, while the display is variably displayed in the vertical direction, in the time saving state B the horizontal direction Variable display in the time-saving state B, such as variable display, or variable display of decorative patterns is reduced in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. are continuously displayed on the display screen. The mode may be different from the variable display mode in the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

Thus, the start order of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the probability variation state, when the time saving state A is a non-reach loss variation pattern, and the time saving state B is a non-reach loss variation pattern. Although it is common in the case, the time until the decorative design of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C reaches the maximum speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the variable probability state and in the time saving state A. (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, 5C is, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, if the non-reach loss variation pattern is present, the display is stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the time saving is performed. In the state B, when it is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the non-reach loss variation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B. Although it is common in the case, the time from when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative design is stopped and displayed is a probability variable state. , When it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state A, and when it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B may be different. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the number of output times of the pattern stop sound in the variable display of 1 is 3 times because the left, middle, and right are stopped at different timings in the case of a non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A. , in the time-saving state B, when it is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is one time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, the number of output times of the symbol stop sound in the variable display of 1 is the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and the case of the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. Even if it is common good. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and enhance interest.

In addition, when it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probability change state and the time saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B it is a non-reach deviation variation pattern Specific action display ( Symbol stop action) is not performed. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the performance effect is enhanced by the specific action display, while in the time saving state B, the specific action display is not executed, thereby realizing a smooth variable display.

In addition, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case of the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the non-reach deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B, so that the specific action Development cost can be reduced by sharing the mode of specific action display between the variable probability state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B, while increasing the presentation effect by the display.

In addition, the period from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the stop display of the small pattern is the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state and the time saving state A {t1(ta6-ta7)>t2(tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, in the time saving state B, smooth variable display can be realized.

In addition, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1, and the design determination period (ta7 to ta8) which is the minimum period until the variable display of the decorative design is started in the next variable display. And, in the time-saving state B, the symbol determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped in the first variable display to when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display, Common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control in consideration of the drawing process until the decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed.

Although the display of the specific action of each decorative pattern has been exemplified as an action display that is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode. is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, only the pedestal display portion 069SG052 performs the specific action display, and the number display portion 069SG051 does not perform the specific action display, so the specific action display enhances the performance effect while ensuring the visibility of the identification information However, the specific action display may be performed on the number display portion 069SG051 together with the base display portion 069SG052. Also, the specific action mode may be different for each decorative pattern with different numbers.

In addition, in the above description, the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern have exemplified a form in which the variable display mode is common, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variable display mode may be different between the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern.

In addition, the display position of the decoration pattern in the time saving state B may be changed between when the variable display is started and when the variable display is stopped. I can show you.

In addition, instead of speeding up the variable display speed of the decorative pattern to reach the maximum speed as in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is changed into a form that is difficult to see (for example, a dark form) during the variable display, and A variable display with a sense of speed may be realized by changing from a difficult-to-recognize mode to a normal mode when the decoration pattern is stopped.

Next, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-55.

First, in the variable display of the big hit variation pattern of the SP reach E, the variable display is started (see FIG. 19-55 (A)), and after the decoration design is stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L (FIG. 19-55 (B)), the decorative pattern is displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R at a reduced speed, and the reach notice and the button notice are executed (see FIG. 19-55 (C)), and the decorative pattern is displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. is displayed temporarily, the pedestal display portion 069SG052 of the decorative design temporarily displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then returned to the original size. A return reach specific action display is performed (see FIG. 19-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 19-55 (E)).

Next, although not particularly shown, when the big hit notification is performed through the SP ready-to-win production, the determined decoration symbols that are the predetermined big hit combinations are temporarily displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (FIG. 19). -55(F)). After that, after the pedestal display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a big hit specific action display is performed. (Refer to FIG. 19-55 (G)), and the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (Refer to FIG. 19-55 (H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot variation pattern of the SP reach D, the variable display is started (see FIG. 19-55 (I)), and the reach mode is not displayed, and the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, 5C are displayed in advance. Confirmed decorative symbols that will be a determined big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 19-55 (F)). After that, after the pedestal display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, a big hit specific action display is performed. (Refer to FIG. 19-55 (G)), and the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (Refer to FIG. 19-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E variation pattern, the reach specific operation display for performing the specific operation of the decoration pattern when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and the decoration patterns are stopped at the determined decoration pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination. A second specific action display for performing a specific action on the decorative pattern when displayed can be executed, and a reach specific action display and a jackpot specific action display are executed in the variation pattern of the SP reach E via the reach. However, in the variation pattern of the SP reach D that does not go through the reach, the big win specific action display is executed without the reach specific action display. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time saving state B, since it is less likely to be unnecessarily fanned, the suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, after the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 19-55(I), the reach mode is not displayed, and the decorative pattern Although the display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C have been exemplified as a mode in which fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is started. A "movable body presentation" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without intervention of the player's operation until the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined big winning combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. .

(Display mode of non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern)
Next, non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns are compared. FIGS. 19-56 are diagrams for comparison of production operation examples of non-reach loss variation patterns. FIG. 19-57 is a diagram for comparing production operation examples of non-reach loss variation patterns. In the following, a detailed operation example of the specific operation display executed when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19-56, when comparing the non-reach deviation variation patterns of the shortening system, first, in the "super-shortening non-reach" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of each At the same time, the variable display of decorative patterns is started (see FIG. 19-56 (A1)). At the same time, the variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 19-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the variable display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (Fig. 19-56 (B1) reference). Next, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 19-56 (B2)), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R (see FIG. 19-56 (B3)), A decoration design is stopped and displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C (see FIG. 19-56 (B4)).

As for the non-reach variation pattern of the shortening system in this way, in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, the variable display time is the shortened non-reach A with "3 seconds", and the decorative pattern is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds", which is super-shortened non-reach, and the left, right, and center decoration patterns are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-57, when comparing the non-reach out variation patterns, first, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the probability variation state, the decorative design display area 5L, 5C, 5R Each decorative design is started at the same time. At this time, a “movable body advance notice” may be executed in which the movable body 32 moves up and down (see FIG. 19-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative design is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of characters such as "Reach?" "Notice" may be executed (see Fig. 19-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 19-57 (A3)), the decorative design is displayed at a reduced speed in the right decorative design display area 5R. A button image 069SG441 imitating the button 31B and an operation prompting display 069SG442 such as "press and hold!" 57 (A4)). After that, a decorative pattern different from the left pattern is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 19-57 (A5)), and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C without going into the ready-to-win state. Then the variable display ends (see FIG. 19-57 (A6)).

In addition, "non-reach A" (see Figure 19-57 (B1) ~ (B6)) that can be determined in the time saving state A is a non-reach deviation variation pattern that can be determined in the probability variable state (Figure 19-57 (A1 ) to (A6)), so the description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the time saving state B, after the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. C1), the decorative design display area 5L , 5C, and 5R are stopped at the same time, and the variable display ends (see FIG. 19-57 (C2)).

In this way, for the non-reach variation pattern, the probability variable state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, the variable display time is common in "7 seconds", but in the probability changing state, the time saving state A, "movable body notice" , “Character notice”, “Reach notice” and “Button notice”, while the execution rate of various effects such as “Movable body notice”, “Character notice”, “Reach notice” and “Button The execution ratio of various effects such as "notice" is low (or not executed) compared to the case where the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation patterns are compared. FIGS. 19-58 are diagrams for comparison of production operation examples of super reach variation patterns. FIGS. 19-59 are diagrams for comparison of production operation examples of super reach variation patterns. FIGS. 19-60 are diagrams for comparison of production operation examples of post production in the super reach variation pattern.

Hereinafter, based on FIGS. 19-58 and 19-59, when comparing the super reach fluctuation patterns, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach E" that can be determined in the time saving state A, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C , and 5R, the variable display of the decoration patterns is started at the same time (see FIG. 19-58 (A1)). Next, a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, characters such as "Maybe reach!" "Character announcement" may be executed (see Fig. 19-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 19-58 (A3)). It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the ready-to-win state is reached, a "reach notice" or a "button notice" may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and character display such as "SP reach effect E" is displayed (see FIG. 19-58 (A4)). Also, at this time, the decorative designs variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Then, a "battle effect" is started in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other (see FIG. 19-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the battle presentation started, and the final showdown will begin (see FIGS. 19-59 (A6) and (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 simulating the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed. is executed (see FIG. 19-59 (A8)). If the player's long-pressing operation is detected within the operation valid period during which the operation prompting display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 19-59 (A9)).

In addition, before displaying the button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B during or immediately before the effect period of the win/fail button effect, a preliminary effect (for example, a light gathering effect in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) etc.) may be executable. Moreover, it is preferable that such a preliminary effect is not executed in the time saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the operation prompting display 069SG452 was started, the display of the operation prompting display 069SG452 is changed to "Release!!" to promote the release of the operation of the push button 31B. At the same time, the operation release operation time is displayed by the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 19-59 (A10)). Then, the teammate character attacks at the timing when the release of the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without the release of the pressing operation being detected. is displayed, and the movable body 32 drops from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see FIG. 19-59 (A11)).

Next, when the variable display result is a big win, the movable body performance is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and the image and the movable body 32 showing that the ally character's attack hit the enemy character are displayed. A movable body effect image 069SG456 consisting of an effect image for emphasis is displayed, and after the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 19-59 (D1)), the enemy character is defeated and becomes an ally. A notification image 069SG457 indicating that the character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 19-59 (D2)), and the determined decoration symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By being displayed, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit (see FIG. 19-59 (D3)).

19-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the scheduled number of balls to be played in the jackpot game state are displayed. A number counter display 069SG460 is displayed and the post effect is started (see FIG. 19-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional pitch display 069SG461 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 19-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled pitch count counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Press!!" An operation prompting display 069SG452 and a gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting the single-press operation of the push button 31B is executed (see FIG. 19-60 (D6)).

Next, at the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before a predetermined operation effective period elapses, or at the timing at which the operation valid period elapses without the pressing operation being detected, the teammate character attacks and the scheduled ball is released. The counter value of the number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 19-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 19-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled number-of-balls-out counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of expected number of balls-out that can be obtained in the case of a "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed. (See Figure 19-60 (D9)).

In the case of a jackpot A or a jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is not updated, and is controlled to the jackpot game state. After the counter value displayed on the number-of-balls counter display 069SG460 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", etc.) (see FIG. 19-60 (D10)), it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

When the result of the variable display is not shown in detail, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, and the enemy character is not knocked down. 19-59 (Fig. 19-59 ( D4)).

Returning to FIG. 19-58, in the "SP reach C" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 19 -58 (B1)). Next, at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect is started in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen (see FIG. 19-58 (B2)). After that, the variable display mode does not change to the ready-to-reach mode, and after the effects similar to those in FIGS. 19-59 (A10 to A11) is performed without the effect of -59 (A8 to A9) (see FIG. 19-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 19-59 (D1 to D3) and 19-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 19-58, in the "SP reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (Fig. 19-58(C1)). Next, at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect is started in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen (see FIG. 19-58 (C2)). After that, the variable display mode does not change to the ready-to-reach mode, and after the same effect as in FIG. (C3) reference), the same production as in FIG. 19-59 (A10-A11) is performed without the production of FIG. 19-59 (A8-A9) (see FIG. ). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 19-59 (D1 to D3) and 19-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation of super reach jackpot variation pattern)
Next, an example of the control operation of the big hit variation pattern of SP reach E, C, D will be compared based on FIGS. 19-61. 19-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operations in SP reach E, C, and D. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 19-61 (A) to (C), SP reach E, C, and D are obtained in a variable display part for executing variable display of decorative patterns and in a jackpot game state after the variable display part is finished. and a post-effect part for notifying the possible number of scheduled balls to be put out. In the variable display part, when the variable display is started, the above-mentioned "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", "button notice", etc. are executed, and after reaching the reach state, SP reach production "Battle production" and "Short battle production" are executed as. Then, at timing ta1, the "correction button effect" as the operation promoting effect is started in the "decision effect", and then at the timing ta2, the "movable object effect" is started. After that, after the result of the ``battle performance'' or ``short battle performance'' is notified, the confirmed decoration patterns which are the predetermined big win combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing ta3, and the big win specific action is displayed (big win pattern stop action. 19-55 (G)) is performed, the combination of the big hit confirmed symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing ta4 to notify that the big win has been achieved. After that, the post effect is executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP reach E that can be determined in time saving state A, 40 seconds for SP reach C that can be decided in variable state, and SP reach that can be decided in time saving state B. D is 25 seconds. On the other hand, the time (ta5 to ta6) of the post-effect part is 15 seconds in common for each of SP reach E, C, and D.

That is, the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state B (25 seconds) are different, while the time saving state A and The variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the probability variable state and the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B are common, and the time saving state A and the probability changing state and the time saving state B Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the post-production part while enhancing the production effect by giving different effects in the variable display part.

Also, the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) and the variable display time of the variable display part of the time saving state B (25 seconds) are different, while the time saving state A and The display time of the jackpot specific action display in the probability variable state (ta3 to ta4) and the display time of the jackpot specific action display in the time saving state B (ta3 to ta4) are common, so that various effects in the variable display part are different. The development cost can be reduced by sharing the display time of the big hit specific action display while enhancing the performance effect by having it.

Incidentally, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the "win/fail button effect" is common to the SP reach C and D, and only the SP reach E is different.

Further, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creating area. When performing display processing for outputting image data (display data) as a video signal, extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc.) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. (“X” is an arbitrary number)), and an extended command (for example, an extended command BXXX (“X ” generates an arbitrary number)) and transmits it to the effect control CPU 120 .

Based on the reception of the extension commands DXXX and SXXX, the effect control CPU 120 converts the operation control execution data of the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B described in the process data. Separately from the operation control based on the extension command DXXX, SXXX, the operation control for operating the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 for vibrating the push button 31B is started.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the extended command BXXX etc. separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data based on the reception of the extended command BXXX etc. Control for turning on/off the movable body LED 208 is started according to the lighting pattern (for example, refer to the light emission pattern shown in FIG. 21-6(B) in the characteristic portion 018SG).

Control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B and control data for lighting the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121 .

Here, control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A and the variable probability state And control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for controlling the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, an extended command (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. ("X" is an arbitrary number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. , extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX ("X" is an arbitrary number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. Although the generated form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. On/off control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12, and control of the movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are executed based on the extended command B000 as the lamp control information. may be made. In other words, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extension command).

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variable state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect", and in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, the "movable Since the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "body effect" is common, the development cost can be reduced.

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" ( For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), and control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. (For example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) are common, so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body motion control and the LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for the movable body motion control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extension commands used for the movable body presentation are divided into an extension command for controlling the motion of the movable body and an extension command for controlling the lighting of the LED, there is a risk that one of the extension commands may be missed due to a problem. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the movable body effect.

In addition, an effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body production" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the variable probability state (see movable body production image 069SG456 in FIG. 19-59 (D1)) And, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the “movable body production” (see movable body production image 069SG456 in FIG. 19-59 (D1)) By being common, the development cost can be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-62. FIG. 19-62 is a diagram comparing a super reach variation pattern and a non-reach out of reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 19-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern to the stop display is the decoration pattern in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. It is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of variable display to the stop display.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach loss variation pattern is the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the super reach loss variation pattern until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (tb0 By being shorter than tb3), the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until reaching the reach mode, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L to the stop display is the left in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern. Since the period (tb0 to tb2) from the start of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L to the stop display is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2), the variable display of the decorative design in the predetermined row is completed in a short period of time. A suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Rush performance)
Next, an effect operation example of rush effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-63 and 19-64. 19-63, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the rush introduction effect, and (D) an effect operation example of the time-saving rush effect A. FIG. Figure 19-64, (A1) ~ (A4) is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the probability variation rush effect, (B1) ~ (B4) of the short time rush effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 19-63 (A) to (C), in the "rush introduction effect", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and "BATTLE RUSH rush!!" The character image 069SG470B is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 by a predetermined number (for example, one character) and moved to the center of the display screen.

Then, an effect image 069SG470A that is maximized and the display color changes, and a character image 069SG470B consisting of characters "BATTLE RUSH rush!" It is notified that the control of the time saving state A is started by performing the rush performance A".

In addition, in the case of "variable rush effect", after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. 19-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. After the probability variation image 069SG471 having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in a display layer higher than the rush image 069SG470, it gradually shrinks toward the lower left of the display screen and moves while the transmittance decreases. It will be displayed (see Fig. 19-64 (A2 to A3)).

Then, a "probability change rush effect" is performed in which a rush image 069SG472 consisting of a rush image 069SG470 and a probability change image 069SG471 displayed at the lower left of the display screen with a minimum size and a transmittance of 0% is displayed. , It is notified that control of the variable probability state is started (see FIG. 19-64 (A4)).

In addition, in the case of "time saving rush production B", the "plunging introduction production" described in FIGS. 19-64 (B1) after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. As shown, after the idle time image 069SG473A having a predetermined transmittance, which is composed of the characters "1100" and the effect image, is displayed on a display layer higher than the rush image 069SG470, it is directed toward the lower left of the display screen. 19-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, a rush image 069SG470, a play-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen with a minimum size and a transmittance of 0%, and a play-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "play" The start of the control of the time saving state B is notified by performing the “time saving rush effect B” in which the rush image 069SG473 consisting of the image 069SG473B is displayed (see FIG. 19-64 (B4)).

In this way, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability variable are used in the probability variable rush effect. While displaying the rush image 069SG472 consisting of the image 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, in the time saving rush effect B, the rush image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time saving state A and the probability variable state A common rush image 069SG470 is displayed, and idle time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started.

Therefore, in the time saving state B controlled after the variable display of a predetermined number of times, considering that the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state lasted for a long time, in the time saving rush production B, the probability variable state and the time saving state A are controlled. Not only the rush image 069SG470 common to when it is started, but also the idle time image 069SG473B that is not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started is displayed, so the start of the time saving state B can be excited. .

[Embodiment 2]
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-65 to 19-69. FIG. 19-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 19-66 is a diagram showing part of the variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 19-67 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. FIG. 19-68 is an example of the effect operation of SP reach D. 19-69 are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each game state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment are omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

FIG. 19-65 shows (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, (B) is a case where the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 Specific example of variation pattern determination table for case loss, (C) Specific example of variation pattern determination table for big hit when number of pending memories is 0, (B) Big hit when number of pending memories is 1 to 3 4 shows a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for .

As shown in FIG. 19-65(A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-65(B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-65 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for the jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach E, SP reach D 90 decision values are assigned.

In the present embodiment, when variable display of the variation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 is described in the first embodiment as a variable display effect "Short battle On the other hand, when the variable display of the variation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 does not use the “short battle effect” as the variable display effect, but the “immediate effect” described later. Execute "hit effect" or "full rotation effect".

In addition, the variation pattern of the SP reach D that can be determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A is the reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode after the variable display is started. On the other hand, the variation pattern of the SP reach D that can be determined in the time saving state B is "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode after the variable display is started. is the non-reach variation pattern performed.

Next, FIG. 19-66 is part of a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 19-44. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S069SGS271 to step S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting processing, and then, in step S069SGS277, the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is shortened non-reach. If it is determined that it is not a fluctuation pattern or a super-shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), reach notice execution decision processing of step 069SGS278 Before execution, the processing of steps 069SGS277A to step 069SGS277D is executed.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and is the SP reach D variation pattern. In that case (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B). And when it determines with a game state being the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), a variable display production|presentation pattern determination process is performed (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display effect pattern determination process, for example, a variable display effect pattern determination random number (0 to 99) is extracted, and a variable display effect pattern is determined using the variable display effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 19-67, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" for each of the "instant hit effect" and the "full rotation effect", the "jackpot A, B(6R)” are assigned different determination values so as to have the number of determination values shown in FIG. 19-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", 10 determination values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect", and 60 determination values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". is assigned. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 determination values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect", and 30 determination values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". assigned.

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" are not executed in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and in the time saving state B It is a variable display effect that can be executed only in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and is executed by using the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined.

Also, the execution ratio of "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution ratio of "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)". On the other hand, the execution ratio of "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" is higher than "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" ” execution rate. That is, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpots A, B (6R)" and has a larger number of expected balls to be put out in the jackpot game state, "immediate hit performance". "Full rotation effect" is executed at a higher rate than.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the "immediate hit effect" and the "full spin effect" will be described. When the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined in the probability variable state and the time saving state A, after the variable display mode has changed to the reach mode after the variable display is started, the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle production. By doing so, the "short battle effect" that informs that the variable display result is a big hit is executed (see FIGS. 19-58 to 19-59), but in the time saving state B, the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined. In this case, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode does not become the ready-to-win mode, and ``immediate winning performance'' or ``full rotation performance'' in which the variable display result is announced as a big hit is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-65, the "immediate hit effect" is after the variable display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (Fig. 19- 68 (A1)), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the fixed decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 19-68 (A2)). ). After that, in the "determination effect", an operation promoting effect for promoting the operation of the push button 31B is executed by displaying a button image simulating the push button 31B, an operation promoting display such as "Press!!", and a gauge display. A movable body effect image 069SG456 indicating that the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed, and a "movable body effect" is executed in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position. (See Figure 19-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 19-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-effect part, after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIG. be done.

As shown in FIG. 19-65, the "full rotation production" is, in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, after the blackout production in which the display screen is displayed as a black screen with the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period (Fig. 19-68 (B1)), the variable display of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the third background image 069SG330 is simultaneously started (see FIG. 19-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time elapses, a full-rotation display is started in which the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state in which the fixed decorative patterns that form a predetermined jackpot combination are aligned. (See Figure 19-68 (B3)). After that, fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 19-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-effect part (symbol fixing period), after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIG. 19-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. It is controlled to a jackpot game state.

Thus, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the variable display notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot without going through the reach mode after the variable display is started. A player can enjoy the SP ready-to-win performance with peace of mind without worrying about being stirred up by the ready-to-win performance by executing the ``immediate hit performance'' or the ``full rotation performance'' as the performance.

In addition, in the "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B and "Press!! ” and other operation prompting displays and gauge displays are displayed to promote the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation prompting effect that requires the player to operate the push button 31B is not executed. , the player can preferably digest the variable display without prompting or performing troublesome operations.

(Various action examples by game state)
Next, examples of various operations for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-69. 19-69 are diagrams for explaining examples of various actions according to game states. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 19-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states of "time saving state B", "variable probability state" and "time saving state A" are compared.

<Item D1>
First, regarding the ratio of determining the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern CPU103 does not go through the reach mode, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. The determination ratio of "SP reach D (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the case is "90%", and in the "variable state", as shown in FIG. 19-6 (C), The determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in "time saving state A", Fig. 19-7 (C) , the determination ratio of "SP non-passing A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In addition, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, "SP reach D" is a reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach variation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

In other words, the ratio (for example, 90%) of determining "SP reach D big hit variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A Higher than the ratio (e.g., 5%) at which the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" is determined, and the ratio at which the "non-SP A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the probability variation state is determined (e.g., 5%).

According to the item (D1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is not decided to control to the big win game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big win game state continued for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the form of the variable display to the ready-to-win form, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state without being mischievous, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ratio of "SP reach D big hit variation pattern (immediate hit production or full rotation production)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined reach mode in the time saving state A and the probability variable state Although the form is exemplified by a higher ratio than the "SP non-passing A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through is determined, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state B , "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a "win/fail button effect" as an action promoting effect for prompting the action of the player, for example, in the SP ready-to-win effect. It is possible to execute "movable body presentation".

Then, in the variable probability state or the time saving state A, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined, the production control CPU 120 executes the "win/fail button production" in the "decision production" in the variable display of the SP reach D. While the first performance execution pattern for executing the "movable body performance" is executed later, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined, the "immediate hit performance" in the variable display of the SP reach D. , the second effect execution pattern is executed in which the "movable body effect" is executed without executing the "win/fail button effect".

Therefore, when the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the execution ratio of "immediate hit effect" that executes "movable body effect" without executing "win or fail button effect", in "time saving state B", Figure As shown in 19-65 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, it is "90%", and in the "probable state", as shown in FIG. 19-6 (C), the number of pending memories In the case of 0 to 3, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG.

That is, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio (for example, 90%) of the “immediate hit effect” that executes the “movable body effect” without executing the “win/fail button effect” in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (for example, 90%) is the time saving state A In the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" is higher than It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable object effect" without executing the "button effect".

According to the item (D2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of the predetermined number of times, it is determined to control to the big hit game state considering that the period of not being controlled to the big hit game state continued for a long time. Since the player is less likely to be urged to operate the push button 31B when the event is notified, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of executing "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B is the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A and the probability variable state Although a form higher than the ratio of executing "immediate hit production" or "full rotation production" is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time saving state B, the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern "immediate hit The ratio of executing "effect" or "full rotation effect" may be 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of retained memories is 0, the CPU 103 determines the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds). In time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 19-65 (A), it is "100%" when the number of pending memories is 0, and in "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 19-6 (A) , “0%” when the number of reserved memories is 0, and “0%” when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the number of retained memories is 0, the CPU 103 will detect that the variable display time is longer than the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern. Reach fluctuation, etc.), in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), when the number of pending memories is 0, it is "100%", and in "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 19-7 (A), the number of pending memories In the case of 0, it is "100%".

That is, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the variable probability state or the time saving state A, the variable display time is long to earn time to accumulate the pending memory in the second pending memory. While it is possible to determine non-reach of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation of 25 seconds and 40 seconds of fluctuation time), when the number of pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, the variable display time is long and the fluctuation pattern ( For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time than non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds shortened non-reach) can be determined.

According to the item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, even if the number of pending memories is 0, A deviation variation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened variation pattern (for example, non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.) is determined and the digestion speed of the variable display is determined. does not decrease, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in which a 6R round game is executed, and the degree of advantage for the player is higher than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" (for example, , the number of rounds, that is, the number of scheduled balls that can be obtained is large), or “jackpot C” (see FIG. 19-3 (D)).

In addition, when the SP reach D big hit variation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special variable display pattern " It is possible to execute "full rotation effect".

In addition, the rate at which the production control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is shown in FIG. As shown in 19-67, it is "90%", and in the "variable probability state", it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed) as shown in FIG. In state A", as shown in FIG. 19-7(C), it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed).

That is, when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the rate at which the production control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" (for example, 100%) is a big hit in the time saving state A When the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the type, the ratio of the production control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation production" (for example, 0% (non-execution)) is higher than the jackpot type in the variable probability state. is higher than the ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) at which the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined.

According to the item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the number of rounds is greater than the jackpot A or jackpot B, considering that the period of not being controlled in the jackpot gaming state continued for a long time. If it is determined to control the jackpot C, which has a high degree of advantage for many players, it is not executed (or the execution ratio is low) in the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A. A special variable display "all Since "rotation performance" is easily executed, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the ratio of the production control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation production" is 100%. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the production control CPU 120 executes "full rotation production". If the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the "full rotation production" when the "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the ratio is less than 100%. You may make it perform by the ratio. Moreover, when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the production control CPU 120 may execute the "full rotation production".

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 069SG)
In the characteristic portion 069SG, as an example of the "advantageous state advantageous to the player", the form in which the big hit game state is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability state and the small win game state , Reach state, pseudo continuous effect state, pending continuous, chance up effect, pre-reading notice effect, loss with time saving, ceiling time saving control, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a mode is illustrated in which a so-called pachinko game machine capable of being controlled to a variable probability state for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot When the type is a variable probability big hit, the pachinko game machine may be controlled in a variable probability state from the end of the big win game until it is controlled to the next big win, or it may be in the variable probability state from the end of the big win game until winning the variable probability fall lottery. It may be a pachinko game machine that is controlled. In addition, a so-called 1 type 2 type game machine that can be controlled to a big win game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in the time saving state after the end of the big win game may be applied, and the game characteristics can be changed in various ways. It is possible.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as a special state with a higher execution frequency of variable display than the non-special state (for example, normal state), the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B are applied. The invention is not limited to this, and four or more game states other than the above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the first special state controlled when the controlled advantageous state ends from the non-special state (for example, normal state, low probability / low base state), and the advantageous state in the non-special state As a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed without being controlled by the 2nd special state))), but the present invention is not limited to this, high probability height base probability variable state (first special state) and low probability height base time saving state B (Relief time reduction (second special state)) may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as the third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends, a form in which the variable probability state is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention Is not limited to this, for example, if it is a pachinko game machine of one type and two types, a time saving state different from the time saving state as the first special state {for example, the execution of the time saving state than the first special state time-saving state with a large number of times (long control period), etc.} may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, at least one special state of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state is, for example, a plurality of types of different execution frequency of time reduction control, execution frequency of variable display, etc. It may have a special state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, as a non-special state, the normal state (low probability / low base state) was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display than the special state is not limited to the low probability/low base state, but may be a high certainty base state, a low probability/high base state, or the like, as long as the game state has a low execution frequency.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the time saving state B (relief time saving state) as the second special state is variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in the non-special state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, the control may be performed when another condition is established in addition to the above conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probability variable state, the average normal pattern fluctuation time (the period during which the normal pattern is changed), the probability of becoming “per normal pattern” in the normal pattern game, the second Without changing the control (high open control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the 2 start winning opening, the average special figure fluctuation time (period of changing the special figure) in the time saving state B is changed to the probability variable state And the form of improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) by executing the control to be shortened than the time saving state A was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B , the average normal figure fluctuation time (period of changing the normal figure), the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (high open control, By making at least one of the high base control different from the variable probability state or the time saving state A, the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) may be further improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, the CPU 103 sets the variable display mode as a specific mode (eg, reach mode) as a variation pattern, and displays a display result deviated from the first non-specific variable display pattern (eg, "SP reach A ~E miss", etc.) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach miss", etc.) that displays the result of the miss display without specifying the variable display mode as a specific mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specified variable display pattern and the second non-specified variable display pattern may include variations patterns of types other than the above. In addition, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (eg, "SP reach A to C, E big hit", etc.) that displays a display result out of the variable display mode as a specific mode (eg, reach mode), A second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the result of the display without specifying the variable display mode is determined. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include variations patterns of types other than those described above.

In addition, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", and includes, for example, "chance mode (eg, "133")", "pseudo-continuous mode (eg, 122)", "normal reach Various aspects such as "aspect" and "super reach aspect" may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, as a suggestive effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to a big hit, a form in which "notice of movable body" or "notice of character" is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. If it is a production that suggests that it is controlled to a jackpot game state, for example, it includes various productions such as stop pattern notice, pseudo consecutive notice, dialogue notice, operation notice, reach notice, and look-ahead notice production. You can

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, as a pre-reading forewarning effect suggesting that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory is controlled in an advantageous state, "countdown notice", "holding change notice", and "symbol chance notice" are provided. , Although the form in which "effect display notice" is applied has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, even if it includes various reading notices such as "continuous effect" and "prediction effect" good.

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, the mode in which the "button notice" and the "win/fail button effect" are applied as the action promoting effect to prompt the player's action was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may include various productions other than. Also, the "player's action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but is an effect prompting the operation of other operation means (for example, a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B, or an operation Instead, it may be an effect that encourages the action (movement) of the player.

Further, in the characteristic part 069SG, as an example of the first effect execution pattern in which the "appropriate button" as the action promotion effect is executed and then the "movable body effect" as the specific effect is executed, "Pattern A-2, A-3 ” is applied, and as an example of the second effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed without executing the action promotion effect, the form in which the “pattern A-1” is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, other operation promotion effects such as "button notice" may be applied as action promotion effects, and effects other than "movable body effects" (for example, battle results in SP reach effects, etc.) may be applied as specific effects. You may

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, as the first action promotion effect prompting the player to perform one action, a mode is exemplified in which the operation promotion display of the "hit" operation is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of prompting the player to perform a single push operation, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform a single pull operation, a rotating operation, a reciprocating operation, or the like.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a mode is exemplified in which the operation prompting display of the “continuous hit” or “long press” operation is applied as the second motion prompting effect to prompt the player to perform the motion over a predetermined motion period. The invention is not so limited and may facilitate pulling, rotating, reciprocating, etc., over a predetermined period of motion. Further, the motion over a predetermined motion period is not necessarily limited to continuously detected motion, and may include an intermittent operation, an operation according to a predetermined pattern, and the like.

In addition, in the characterizing section 069SG, a mode is exemplified in which "character notice" and "reach notice" are applied as a production including a stimulating production for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is to be a specific mode, but the present invention is this. However, it is not limited to "chance mode (for example, "133" etc.)", "pseudo consecutive mode (for example, 122 etc.)", "normal reach mode", "super reach mode". It may include various effects such as.

Further, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the post-effect, the expected number of balls to be put out is notified as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be given in an advantageous state in which control in the specific effect is notified. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (for example, 6R, 10R, etc.) may be reported. In addition, in the state where the big hits are continuous, such as the occurrence of a big hit in the probability variable state, the planned total number of balls obtained by adding the planned number of balls in this big hit and the total number of balls won in the predetermined period of the big hit The number of balls or the like may be displayed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to inform the start of the control of the special state. , time-saving rush performance A, time-saving rush performance B, and shutter performance have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various rush performances other than the above may be executed. Also, the effect mode of each rush effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 069SG, a form in which the variable probability rush effect and the short time rush effect A are separately shown has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability rush effect and the short time rush effect A may be used as one common rush effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, when the time-saving rush effect B is executed, the form in which the rush introduction effect is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rush introduction effect is executed instead of the shutter effect. may be executed. Also, when the time-saving rush performance B is executed, the rush introduction performance may be executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the troublesomeness of the performance, it is preferable to set a rush introduction performance with a short performance period as compared with the case where the probability variable rush performance or the short time rush performance A is executed.

In the characteristic portion 069SG, as an example of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous state, the jackpots A and B ( 1st advantageous state) and the jackpot C (second advantageous state) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage for the player is higher than the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state means not only the jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state, such as the number of game rounds and the number of balls that can be obtained, but also the game state after the jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a big hit (for example, a big hit with a long time-saving control after the big hit game state, or a "small hit rush" in which the execution frequency of the small hit game state increases after the end of the big hit, etc.). .

(Description of Characteristic Portion 099SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 099SG in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 20-1 to 20-22. In addition, in this characterizing portion 099SG, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 069SG are omitted, and differences are mainly described. Further, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 069SG.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG is formed in the left game area where game balls can flow down on the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. The right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area in which game balls can flow down. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 099SG, the game ball weakly launched by the shooting device due to the game state being the normal state flows down the first path in the left game area, and the game state is the time saving state. A, the time-saving state B, or the variable probability state causes the game ball strongly launched by the launcher to flow down the second path in the right game area. In addition, part of the game balls flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (on the right side of the image display device 5). Based on passing through 41, the variable display of normal symbols is executed. Then, the second starting prize opening provided on the second path changes from the closed state to the open state based on the variable display result of the normal pattern being hit (normal pattern hit), and the second start A game ball can win a prize in the winning opening. Incidentally, in the characteristic portion 099SG, "variable display" may be described as "fluctuation" or "variable display".

FIG. 20-1(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 099SG. As shown in FIG. 20-1 (A), in this characteristic portion 099SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern determination Numerical data representing the random number MR3, the random number MR4 for judging the result of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for judging the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65535". The random value MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is a random value used to determine the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to be one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C". and takes a value in the range of, for example, "0" to "299".

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 99”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

FIG. 20-1 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In this feature part 099SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature part 099SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic portion 099SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then the probability of being determined (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG) is higher than the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state (in this feature part 099SG about 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

20-1 (C1) and FIG. 20-1 (C2) show a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In FIG. 20-1 (C1), when it is determined that the variable display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state at the time of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the random number MR2 for judging the big win type is set to 20-1 (C2) is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B, and FIG. '' to determine the big win type from the big win B and the big win C based on the random number value MR2 for judging the big win type.

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 099SG will be described with reference to FIG. 20-1(D). In this characteristic portion 099SG, as the jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are maximized after the jackpot game ends by entering the V prize opening after the game ball enters the second jackpot in the first round of the jackpot game state. It is also a big hit in which probability variable control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this characteristic part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) is a short open state (for example, 0.1 seconds) with a short open state period and a long open state with a long open state period. state (eg, 15 seconds). In the big win A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the big winning game state, and in the big wins B and C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the big winning game state. and

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot A'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to let the game ball enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control cannot be executed. Since it cannot be expected, it becomes a substantial normal jackpot.

In the jackpot game state by ``jackpot B'', the second big prize opening is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first big prize opening is advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so that it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In the jackpot game state by the ``big win C'', the second jackpot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and the first jackpot is opened in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in the "jackpot C", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the V winning hole, and variable probability control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial hit.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or less jackpot types, or Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot A. , and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3 (B2), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

That is, in this characteristic part 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball easily enters the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. Both the variable probability control and the time saving control are carried out after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning opening in the first round of the big win game state with a probability of 100%, so that the probability change control is performed after the big win game ends. and time saving control are both implemented.

In this characteristic part 099SG, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win the V prize when the V lid is in a short open state, but it is extremely rare, so when the jackpot A is achieved, will be described assuming that no V prize is won and variable probability control is not executed. Also, even in the case of the big win B and the big win C, it is possible that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, but it is extremely rare, so the big win B and the big win C are made. In this case, it is assumed that the V prize is won and the variable probability control is executed.

In this feature part 099SG, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

FIG. 20-2(A) shows whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol when the game state is the normal state. 20-2 (B) is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to for determining whether the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B, when the normal symbol A normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal pattern hit) based on the execution of the variable display.

In addition, the time saving state B in this feature part 099SG is a game state in a normal state (low probability / low base state where neither probability variable control nor time saving control is executed) Variable 900 times without being controlled to a big hit game state It is a game state controlled when the display is performed, and is a time saving state A (low probability/high base state) in which time saving control is performed over a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 20-2 (A), of the range 3 to 13 of the random number value MR4 for normal symbol hit determination, 3 is assigned to hit and 4 to 13 are assigned to lose. ing. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 20-2(B), 3 to 12 out of the range 3 to 13 of the random number value MR4 for normal symbol hit determination are assigned to the hit, and 13 is assigned to the hit. assigned to the outskirts. That is, in this characteristic portion 099SG, the ratio of the normal pattern when the game state is either the time saving state A, the variable probability state, or the time saving state B is higher than the ratio of the normal pattern when the game state is the normal state is also set high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-2 (C), the variation time of the normal symbol when the game state is the normal state is set to 60 seconds, while the game state is the time saving state A, the probability variable state , and the time-saving state B, the normal pattern variation time is set to 0.1 second. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning opening is set to 0.1 second when a normal game win occurs when the game state is the normal state. On the other hand, when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B, the opening time of the second starting winning port is set to 3 seconds when a normal hit occurs.

In other words, the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B in the present characteristic portion 099SG are compared to the normal state, "the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high", "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short", " Due to the long opening time of the second start winning opening when the hit of the normal symbol occurs, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening, that is, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time-saving state B are compared to the normal state. Variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the conditions of at least one of the following conditions: "the variable display time of the symbol is short"; may be set to have a high execution frequency.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 099SG is similar to the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 069SG (see FIG. 19-1), when the game state is the normal state, the player moves the game ball to the left game area 2L. While the game ball can win the first start prize opening by hitting toward, it is impossible to win the second start prize opening, the big prize opening, pass through the gate 41, etc., and the game ball is time saving. In any of the state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right game area 2R and the gate 41. can pass through. In addition, when the game state is the jackpot game state, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole and the big winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right game area, and the gate 41 can be passed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-12(A), when the game state is the normal state, the game ball launched toward the left game area 2L is started and won by a plurality of nails or the like arranged on the game board 2. is blocked, the winning probability of the game ball into the first start winning hole is about 5.5% (continuation by the player's operation of the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). The condition is that the game ball is launched to the left game area 2L. Further, when the game state is the normal state, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbol due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is 60 seconds, which is extremely high. As long as it is long, the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal game hit occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see FIGS. 20-2 (C) and 20-2 (D)), so the game ball Winning to the second start winning opening almost never occurs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), the game ball launched toward the right game area 2R when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B, the gate 41 It is possible to pass through, and the variable display time of the normal pattern due to passing through the gate 41 is as short as 3 seconds. Figure 20-2 (C), Figure 20-2 (D) reference), the winning probability of the game ball to the second start winning opening is about 55% (player's hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) The condition is that the game ball is continuously launched to the right game area 2R by the operation of 30).

FIG. 20-3 is a diagram showing variation patterns used in the variable display of the special symbols of the characteristic portion 099SG. In this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. Reach A missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time shortened by 5000 ms Non-reach B missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 7000 ms Non-reach A missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 12000 ms Non-reach B missed, Toku-zu fluctuation time 45000 ms Super reach Missing A, Missing Super Reach B with special figure fluctuation time of 80000ms, Missing Super Reach C with special figure variation time of 4000ms, Missing Super Reach D with special figure variation time of 25000ms, Missing Super Reach E with special figure variation time of 50000ms Each variation pattern is provided. It should be noted that the variation pattern of super reach A lost to super reach E lost is also a variation pattern for executing a super reach performance during variable display.

In addition, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a big hit, there is a 15000ms jackpot notification period after the variable display of 7000ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (special figure fluctuation time is 7000ms + 15000ms) without super reach After the variable display of 12000 ms in which the ready-to-reach performance of A big hit and super reach is not executed, there is a jackpot notification period of 15000 ms (special figure fluctuation time is 12000 ms + 15000 ms) B 45000 ms in which the ready-to-reach effect of big hit and super reach is executed After the variable display, it has a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (special figure fluctuation time is 45000ms + 15000ms) Super reach A jackpot, super reach reach effect is executed After the variable display of 80000ms, it has a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (special Figure fluctuation time is 80000ms + 15000ms) super reach B jackpot, super reach C jackpot with 15000ms jackpot notification period after 40000ms variable display in which super reach reach effect is executed (special figure fluctuation time is 40000ms + 15000ms), After the 25000ms variable display in which the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed, there is a jackpot notification period of 15000ms (the special figure fluctuation time is 25000ms+15000ms). Each variation pattern of super reach E jackpot is provided after (special figure variation time is 50000ms + 15000ms) having a jackpot notification period of 15000ms. The variation pattern of the super reach A is a variation pattern in which a bowling effect is executed to notify whether or not a jackpot is won by bowling between a friend character and an enemy character as a reach effect, and a super reach B. , Super Reach C, and Super Reach E are variation patterns for executing a battle rendition for informing whether or not a jackpot is won by a battle between a friend character and an enemy character as a reach rendition, and In the super reach D variation pattern, a friend character and an enemy character perform a battle shorter than the battle performance in the variation patterns of the super reach B, super reach C, and super reach E to win a big hit as a reach performance. It is a variation pattern that executes a short battle effect that notifies whether or not there is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 099SG, there is a game control data holding area 099SG 150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 20-4 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 099SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 099SG152. , a game control timer setting unit 099SG153, a game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 099SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). It should be noted that the upper limit that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit value that can store the pending data (holding storage) in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the game state. The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 099SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In other words, in this characteristic unit 099SG, as the first special figure pending storage (suspended storage that can be stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A), it is possible to store a maximum of four pending storages, and the second special figure pending storage A maximum of four pending memories can be stored as (holding memories that can be stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B).

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

It should be noted that, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103, first, if there is a second special figure reservation storage in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 14), random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B are shifted. That is, the CPU 103, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B, the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR3 are read, the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 is erased, and the reservation memory stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 2 is set as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 and the reservation memory of the reservation number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in 2nd special figure reservation storage part 099SG151B. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, after reading the random values MR1 to MR3 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, shift the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A. That is, the CPU 103, when the numerical values of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 of the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the random values stored as the pending storage of the pending number 1 The values of MR1 to random number MR3 are read, the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 is erased, and the reservation memory stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 2 is set as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 and the reservation memory of the reservation number 3. The reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 2 and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 4 are re-stored as the reserved memory of the reserved number 3.例文帳に追加

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a big hit, the random value Judgment of the jackpot type based on MR2) is executed), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 14), a variation pattern that differs according to the number of pending memories of the game state, the variable display result, and the special symbol that executes the variable display A decision table is used to determine a variation pattern.

That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory just before the variable display.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 099SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 099SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the aforementioned ball-out state flag.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 099SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the variation pattern determination table used when performing variable display of special symbols will be described. As shown in FIGS. 20-5 to 20-11, in this characterizing section 099SG, the game state when variable display of special symbols is executed and the number of pending memories of special symbols for executing variable display of special symbols A variation pattern can be determined using a different variation pattern determination table depending on the situation.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the loss variation shown in FIG. 20-5 (A) Using the pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B loss, super reach A loss, and super reach B loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, among the numerical values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment, 97 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach B deviation, and two numerical values are Super reach A is assigned to the variation pattern of loss, and one numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach B. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is 97% of the non-reach B deviation variation pattern. At a rate of 2%, super reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 1%, super reach B is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of short non-reach B deviation, super reach A deviation, and super reach B deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, 97 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach B loss, and two numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach A missing, and one numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach B missing. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 97% of the variation pattern is shortened non-reach B. At a rate of 2%, the super reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation, and at a rate of 1%, super reach B is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display (even if the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, it is common d), using the big hit variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super reach non-passing B big hit, the super reach A big hit, and the super reach B big hit. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 10 values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of B big hit without super reach, and 40 values. are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach A jackpot, and 50 numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach B jackpot. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern is determined to be the B jackpot variation pattern without super reach at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 40%. , it is determined to be a variation pattern of super reach A jackpot, and determined to be a variation pattern of super reach B jackpot at a rate of 50%.

In addition, if the game state is the variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern determination table C for loss shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) A variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A deviation, super reach C deviation, and super reach deviation D. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach A deviation, and two numerical values are Super reach C is assigned to the variation pattern of loss, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A failure variation pattern at a rate of 95%. Then, the super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using table D, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of short non-reach A loss, non-reach A loss, super reach C loss, and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss D, 80 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 15 numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach A, two numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 80% at a rate of 80%. It is determined, non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 15%, super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%. be.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using Table E, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of short non-reach A loss, non-reach A loss, super reach C loss, and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss E, 90 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach A, two numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 90% at a rate of 90%. It is determined, non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 5%, super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 2%, and super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation at a rate of 3%. be.

In addition, if the game state is a variable probability state, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. Using Table F, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortening non-reach A, super reach C deviation, and super reach D deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss F, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A loss, and 2 numerical values is assigned to the super reach C deviation variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 95% of the variation pattern is shortened non-reach A deviation. At a rate of 2%, the super reach C is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 3%, the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

As described above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the probability variable state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the definite variable state in this characteristic part 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbol to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol is the first special symbol The number of pending memories stored in the pending memory unit 099SG151A, and the number of pending stores stored in the second special figure pending memory unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol are different.

In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. It is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the via A jackpot, the super reach C jackpot, and the super reach D jackpot. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the A big hit without super reach, and 80 values. A numerical value is assigned to the super reach C jackpot variation pattern, and 15 numerical values are assigned to the super reach D jackpot variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern of the A big hit without super reach is determined at a rate of 5%, and the super reach is determined at a rate of 80%. It is determined to be a C jackpot variation pattern, and is determined to be a super reach D jackpot variation pattern at a rate of 15%.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), the loss variation pattern Using the determination table G, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A loss and super reach E loss. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table G, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values are Super Reach E is assigned to the deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is 95% of the non-reach A variation pattern. It is determined, and the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table H, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of short non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table H, 85 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 10 numerical values is assigned to the non-reach A-missing variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super-reach E-missing variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 85%. At a rate of 10%, the non-reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 5%, the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using the judgment table I, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of short non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table I, 90 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the non-reach A-missing variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super-reach E-missing variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 90%. At a rate of 5%, the non-reach A is determined to be a deviation variation pattern, and at a rate of 5%, the super reach E is determined to be a deviation variation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (D), the loss variation pattern Using the determination table J, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A deviation and the super reach D deviation. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss J, 95 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach A loss, and 5 numerical values is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 95% of the variation pattern. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 5%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the time saving state A in the characteristic portion 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbols to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the number of pending storage stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol) is different.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of non-passing A jackpot and super reach E jackpot. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table C, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the A big hit without super reach, and 95 values. Numerical values are assigned to variation patterns of the Super Reach E jackpot. That is, if the game state is the time saving state A and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, the variation pattern is determined to be the A big hit variation pattern without super reach at a rate of 5%, and 95% It is determined by the ratio to the super reach E jackpot variation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table K, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B deviation and super reach D deviation. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table I, 97 numerical values among the possible values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation pattern, and 3 numerical values are Super Reach D is assigned to the deviation variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of pending memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is 97% of the non-reach B variation pattern. It is determined, and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table L, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super-short non-reach loss and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss L, 97 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss, and 3 numerical values is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is 97% of the variation pattern is ultra-shortened non-reach loss. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 3%.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table M, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super-short non-reach loss and super reach D loss. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss M, 99 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss, and one numerical value is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is 99%. , and the super reach D is determined to be a deviation variation pattern at a rate of 1%.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. Using the determination table N, the variation pattern is determined only from the ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table N, 100 numerical values among the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 100%. is determined by

As described above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs according to the reserved memory number of the special symbol for executing the variable display. That is, in the time-saving state B in this characteristic portion 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is lost is the number of pending memories of the special symbols to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage unit 099SG151A, the number of pending storage stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B if the variable display of the second special symbol) is different.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is a big hit, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in FIG. Only the variation pattern of the D jackpot is determined. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table D, 100 numerical values among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned to the super reach D big hit variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D big hit variation pattern at a rate of 100% regardless of the number of pending memories.

Here, time saving state A in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic portion 099SG, time saving state B, period values in the variable probability state will be described based on FIGS. 20-13 to 20-23.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (A) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the time saving state A is the period value α, the period value α is A × It is calculated by the value of a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A, a is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, c is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time reduction state A to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A is out, d is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state A. It should be noted that the variable display period in which the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 099SG is different refers to the period from the variable display start timing of the special symbol to the variable display end timing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (B) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state B is the period value β, the period value β is E × It is calculated by the value of e+F×f+G×g+H×h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B, f is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, g is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 2 in the time reduction state B to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B is out, h is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (C) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the game state is the variable probability state is the period value γ, the period value γ is I × i + J It is calculated by the value of xj+Kxk+Lxl. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out, i is the second special figure pending storage when the number is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j is in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state is the average variation time when is out, k is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 110 variation display of the probability variation state, H is the second special in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of figure pending memories is 3, l is the 110 times variation of the probability variable state when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state It is a percentage of the display.

Above, from FIGS. 20-13 (A) to 20-13 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A to L and a to l, and the period value α in time saving state A, in time saving state B When the period value β and the period value γ in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value α is a value larger than the period value β, and the period value γ is a value larger than the period value β (α>β, γ> β).

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. As shown in FIGS. 20-14 (A) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of 1100 fluctuations when the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α', the period value α' is It is calculated by the value of A*a'+B*b'+C*c'+D*d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A, a ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A is out, b ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display of the time saving state A, C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state A 1100 times of the time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, d ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (B) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the game state is the time saving state B is the period value β ', the period value β ' is It is calculated by the value of Exe'+Fxf'+Gxg'+Hxh'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is out, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B, G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state B 1100 times of the time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, h ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state B is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (C) and 20-23, when the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state is the period value γ', the period value γ' is It is calculated by the value of xi'+Jxj'+Kxk'+Lxl'. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state, i ' is when the second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 1100 variable displays of the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j' is the probability variable The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 in the state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variation when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state The average variation time when the display result is out, k 'is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 1100 variation display of the probability variation state, H is in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, l' is the probability variation state when the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 3 is the probability variation state This is the ratio of 1100 times of fluctuation display.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-14 (A) to 20-14 (C) and 20-23, the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A to L and a ' to l ' Period in the time saving state A When the value α ', the period value β ' in the time saving state B, and the period value γ ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value α 'is a value larger than the period value β ', and the period value γ' is the period value β (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, attention will be paid to the case of executing the variable display 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-15 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 110 times in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is executed is 3 is the period value δ, the period value δ is calculated by the value of D×110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state A as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-15 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 3 is the period value ε, the period value ε is calculated by the value of H×110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state B as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-15 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 110 times of fluctuations are made every time in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ζ, the period value ζ is calculated by the value of L × 110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability fluctuation state as described above.

Above, from FIGS. 20-15 (A) to 20-15 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra D, H, and L, the period value δ in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B When calculating ε and the period value ζ in the probability variable state, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ becomes a value larger than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε). .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value δ', then the period value δ' is calculated by the value of D × 1100 . Here, D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state A as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ε ', the period value ε ' is calculated by the value of H × 1100 . Here, H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state B as described above is off.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 fluctuations are made every time in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is the period value ζ ', the period value ζ ' is calculated by the value of L × 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the probability fluctuation state as described above.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-16 (A) to 20-16 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra D, H, and L, and the period value δ ' in the time saving state A, the period in the time saving state B When the value ε' and the period value ζ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value δ' is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' is larger than the period value ε' (δ' >ε', ζ'>ε').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-17 (A) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A When the period value of the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 2 is set to η, the period value η is calculated by the value of C×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-17 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B Variation, average variation when executed in a state where the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 110 times of variation display when the number of second special figure reserved memories is always 2 at the time of execution of fluctuation display Assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-17 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 110 times of fluctuations are made every time in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 is the period value ι, the period value ι is calculated by the value of K×110.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-17 (A) to 20-17 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra C, G, and K, the period value η in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B θ, when calculating the period value ι in the probability variable state, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-18 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Variation, the average variation time when it is executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 is period value η ', the period value η ' is calculated by the value of C × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-18 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 2 is the period value θ', the period value θ' is calculated by the value of G×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-18 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 fluctuations are made every time in the variable probability state. , The period value ι' is calculated by the value of K×1100, assuming that the average fluctuation time when the game is executed in the state where the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 is the period value ι'.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-18 (A) to 20-18 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra C, G, and K, and the period value η ' in time saving state A, the period in time saving state B When the value θ' and the period value ι' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value η' is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is larger than the period value θ' (η' >θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed is 1 is the period value κ, the period value κ is calculated by the value of B×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B The period value λ is the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is 1, and the period value λ is calculated by the value of F×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes 110 times in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value μ, the period value μ is calculated by the value of J × 110.

Above, from FIGS. 20-19 (A) to 20-19 (C), substituting the numerical value in this characteristic part for each algebra B, F, and J, the period value κ in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B λ, when calculating the period value μ in the variable probability state, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-20 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed is 1 is the period value κ', the period value κ' is calculated by the value of B×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-20 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state B Fluctuation, the average fluctuation time when it is executed in the state that the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value λ ', the period value λ ' is calculated by the value of F × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-20 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 fluctuations are made every time in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is the period value μ ', the period value μ ' is calculated by the value of J × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-20 (A) to 20-20 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra B, F, and J, and the period value κ ' in time saving state A, the period in time saving state B When the value λ' and the period value μ' in the variable probability state are calculated, the period value κ' is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is larger than the period value λ' (κ' >λ', μ'>λ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state A If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is executed in a state of 0 is the period value ν, the period value ν is calculated by the value of A × 110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (B) and 20-23, the player always continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., every 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B If the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending memories is 0 is set to the period value ξ, the period value ξ is calculated by the value of E×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 110 times of fluctuations are changed every time in the variable probability state. , When the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is the period value π, the period value π is calculated by the value of I × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-21 (A) to 20-21 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A, E, and I, and the period value ν in the time saving state A, the period value in the time saving state B When ξ and the period value π in the stochastic state are calculated, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π becomes a value larger than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ) .

In addition, attention is paid to the average fluctuation time when the number of times of fluctuation display in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state reaches 1100 times by being controlled multiple times each in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-22 (A) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Variation, the average variation time when it is executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is period value ν ', the period value ν ' is calculated by the value of A × 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-22 (B) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and every 1100 fluctuations in the time saving state B The period value ξ' is calculated by the value of E × 1100 when the average variation time when the variation and the second special figure pending memory number are executed is 0.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-22 (C) and 20-23, the player continuously hits the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., so that 1100 times of fluctuations are made in the variable probability state. , The period value π' is calculated by the value of I×1100, assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value π' when the second special figure pending memory number is executed in a state of 0 pieces.

As described above, from FIGS. 20-22 (A) to 20-22 (C), the numerical value in this characteristic part is substituted for each algebra A, E, and I, and the period value ν ' in the time saving state A, the period in the time saving state B When the value ξ' and the period value π' in the variable state are calculated, the period value ν' is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π' is larger than the period value ξ' (ν' >ξ', π'>ξ').

Next, when the test shooting test of the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature part 099SG is performed for 10 hours, the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, the actual shooting value in the probability variable state (number of game balls fired, special figure 1 start Number of winning prizes, number of starting prizes for special 2, number of special 1 fluctuation display, number of special 2 fluctuation display, total special 1 fluctuation time, total special 2 fluctuation time) and pachinko obtained from these shooting values Design values of the gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 20-24(A) and 20-24(B). In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), the total time of the test firing test time of the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state is less than 10 hours because the remaining time is in the jackpot game state. There is. In addition, the shooting value in the normal state is a condition that the game ball is continuously launched to the left game area 2L by operating the hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30, and in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability variable state The actual shooting value is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously hit to the right game area 2R by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), in the normal state, the test shooting test time is 346.08 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 34580, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 1939 times, the special figure 2 start opening The number of times of winning is 0 times, the number of times of special figure 1 fluctuation display is 1883 times, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 0 times, the total special figure 1 fluctuation time is 23840 seconds, and the total special figure 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state A, the test shooting test time is 77.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 7676, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0 times, the special figure 2 start opening number of wins is 4371 times, special figure 1 The number of fluctuation display is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 658 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 3548 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state B, the test shooting test time is 14.96 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 1494, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0, the number of special figure 2 start opening wins is 821 times, the special figure 1 The number of fluctuation display is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 594 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 954 seconds. In addition, in the variable state, the test shooting test time is 116.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 11515, the number of special figure 1 start opening wins is 0 times, the number of special figure 2 start opening wins is 6556 times, the special figure 1 fluctuation The number of times of display is 0 times, the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation display is 987 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, as a design value in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. Minutes, special figure 1 winning rate is 5.6 / minute, special figure 2 winning rate is 0 / minute, average special figure 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated as 0 seconds ing. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the time saving state A is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, the average special figure 1 It is calculated that the fluctuation time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the time saving state B is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 54.8 / minute, the average special figure 1 It is calculated that the fluctuation time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the probability variable state is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, the average special figure 1 fluctuation It is calculated that the time is 0 seconds and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 4.445 seconds.

In addition, when comparing the special figure 2 winning rate in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, only the special figure 2 winning rate in the time saving state B is different, but this is because the number of game balls fired in the time saving state B is different. This is due to the error caused by less than two states of

Here, based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in FIGS. 20-24, the average variation time in the normal state, time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability changing state is actually calculated.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 is lost, and the first special figure pending memory number For the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number is 1, and the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the first special figure reservation memory number is 2, the first special figure reservation memory number is 0 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/ It is calculated as 100=13340 (ms). Also, regarding the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of first special figure pending storage is 3, the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of first special figure pending storage is 3 and these variation patterns From the determined ratio (see FIG. 20-5(B)), it is calculated as 5000 (ms)×97/100+45000 (ms)×2/100+80000 (ms)×1/100=6550 (ms).

In addition, when calculating the ratio of the variable display executed in each case where the number of first special figure pending memories is 0 to 3 based on the normal state shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), FIG. 20-25 (B ), the percentage of the variable display that is executed when the first special figure pending memory number is 0 is 10%, and the percentage of the variable display that is executed when the first special figure pending memory number is 1 is 40%, the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of first special figure pending memories is 2 is 40%, and the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of first special figure pending memories is 3 is 10 %.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is 13340 (ms) × 10/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 6550 (ms) × 10 /100=12661 (ms).

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), in the time saving state A, the average fluctuation time A when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 is off, the second special figure pending From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 20-8 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 9150 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is out is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 20-8 (B)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 85/100 + 7000 (ms) × 10/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5750 (ms). The average variation time C at which the variation display result is lost when the number of special figure pending memories is 2 is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns ( See Figure 20-8 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5550 (ms), the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 The average fluctuation time D at which the fluctuation display result is out in the case is based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Fig. 20-6 (D) reference), 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

In addition, based on the time saving state A shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), the number of second special figure pending storage in the 110 times and 1100 times fluctuation display in the time saving state A is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When calculating the ratio of the variable display to be performed, as shown in FIG. .9090909%, the ratio (b and b') of the variable display executed when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 is 0.9090909%, and the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 The percentage of variable display performed (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable display (d and d') that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is 95.4545455% Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α′) of one fluctuation in the time saving state A is 9150 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms)×2.7272727/100+5350 (ms)×95.4545455/100=5393.636 (ms).

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (A), in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time E when the fluctuation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 is off, the second special figure pending From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 20-10 (A)), 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5600 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time F when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is out, is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 and these From the determination ratio of the variation pattern (see Figure 20-10 (B)), it is calculated as 1500 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 2205 (ms), the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The average fluctuation time G when the fluctuation display result is out of order is obtained from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Fig. 20-10 (C) See), calculated as 1500 (ms) × 99/100 + 25000 (ms) × 1/100 = 1735 (ms), the average fluctuation time H when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 is out is, from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 20-10 (D)), 1500 (ms) × 100/100 = 1500 ( ms).

In addition, based on the time saving state B shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), the number of second special figure pending storage in the 110 times and 1100 times fluctuation display in the time saving state B is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When calculating the ratio of the variable display to be performed, as shown in FIG. .9090909%, the percentage of variable display (f and f') executed when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1, 1.8181818%, and executed when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 2 The percentage of variable display performed (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable display (h and h') that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is 72.7272727% Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in the time saving state B is 5600 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) × 1.8181818 / 100 + 1735 (ms)×24.5454545/100+1500 (ms)×72.7272727/100=1607.773 (ms).

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (A), in the probability change state, the average fluctuation time I when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 is lost, the second special figure pending memory From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see FIG. 20-6 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 × 3/100 = Calculated as 8200 (ms), the average fluctuation time J at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is lost is the variation that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 From the pattern and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 20-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) × 80/100 + 7000 (ms) × 15/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5000 (ms ), and the average fluctuation time K at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 is out is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 20-6 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4600 (ms ), and the average fluctuation time L when the fluctuation display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 is out, is the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 and these From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 20-6(D)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms)×95/100+40000×2/100+25000 (ms)×3/100=4400 (ms).

In addition, based on the probability variation state shown in FIG. 20-24 (A), the second special figure pending storage number in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the probability variation state is executed in each case of 0 to 3 When the ratio of the variable display is calculated, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (B), the ratio of the variable display executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909 %, the ratio (j and j') of the variable display executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is 0.9090909%, and the second special figure pending memory number is executed when 2 The percentage of variable display (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable display (l and l') executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 is calculated as 95.4545455%. be.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the variable probability state is 8200 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 4600 ( ms)×2.7272727/100+4400 (ms)×95.4545455/100=4445.455 (ms).

From the above, when comparing the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature part 099SG, one variation in the time saving state B is shown in FIGS. The average variation time (β and β') is shorter than the average variation time (α and α') of one variation in time saving state A (α>β and α'>β'), and one variation in time saving state B The average variation time (β and β') of is set shorter than the average variation time (γ and γ') of one variation in the probability variation state (γ>β and γ'>β').

Subsequently, the total average variation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A, the total average variation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state B, and the variable display 110 times in the probability variable state Total average variation time when executed, total average variation time when variation display is performed 1100 times in time saving state A, total average variation time when variation display is performed 1100 times in time saving state B, in probability variation state Calculate the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times.

As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-35, when the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ, the period value χ is α ( Or α′)×110=5393.633 (ms)×110=593299.63 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ, the period value ψ is β (or β') × 110 = 1607.773 (ms) × 110 = 176855.03 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 110 times in the variable probability state is the period value ω, the period value ω is γ (or γ') × 110 = 4445.455 (ms) × 110 = It is calculated as 489000.05 (ms).

That is, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state B by 110 is obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A by 110 It is set smaller than the period value ω, and the period value ψ is set smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variable state by 110 (χ> ψ and ω > ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 20-31 (A) and 20-36, when the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ', the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α′)×1100=5393.633 (ms)×1100=5932996.3 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ', the period value ψ' is β (or β') × 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) x1100=1768550.3 (ms). In addition, when the total average fluctuation time when the variable display is performed 1100 times in the variable probability state is the period value ω', the period value ω' is γ (or γ') × 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) × It is calculated as 1100=4890000.5 (ms).

That is, in this feature section 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state B by 1100 is obtained by multiplying the average variation time of one variation in the time saving state A by 110 is set smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variable state by 110. χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 20-31 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 The period value δ is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is H × 110 = 1500 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times in the probability variation state is performed every variation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is L × 110 = 4400 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=484000 (ms). 20-15, the period value .delta. is greater than the period value .epsilon., and the period value .zeta. >ε, ζ>ε).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 20-31 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 The period value δ' is calculated as D×1100=5350 (ms)×1100=5885000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value ε', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, is H × 1100 = 1500 (ms )×1100=1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ ', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 3, is L × 1100 = 4400 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=4840000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the period value δ' is greater than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is greater than the period value ε'. (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for the average variation time when each variation is executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 2 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The period value η is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is G × 110 = 1735 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is K × 110 = 4600 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=506000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIG. 20-17, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η >θ, ι>θ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is executed in the state of two is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 2 The period value η' is calculated as C×1100=5550 (ms)×1100=6105000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value θ', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, is G × 1100 = 1735 (ms )×1100=1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 2, is K × 1100 = 4600 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=5060000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SG, as shown in FIG. 20-18, the period value η' is greater than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is greater than the period value θ'. (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for the average variation time when each variation is executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 1 piece. First, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 The period value κ is calculated as B×110=5750 (ms)×110=632500 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, is F × 110 = 2205 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 1, is J × 110 = 5000 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=550000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SF, as shown in FIG. 20-19, the period value κ is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is larger than the period value λ (κ >λ, μ>λ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state every variation, the average variation time when the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 1 The period value κ′ is calculated as B×1100=5750 (ms)×1100=6325000 (ms). Also, in the time saving state B, the period value λ ', which is the average variation time when the variation is performed 1100 times per variation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, is F × 1100 = 2205 (ms )×1100=2425500 (ms). Then, in the probability variation state, the variation of 1100 times is changed every time, and the period value μ ', which is the average variation time when the second special figure pending memory number is 1, is J × 1100 = 5000 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=5500000 (ms). That is, in the characteristic portion 099SF, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is greater than the period value λ'. (κ′>λ′, μ′>λ′).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 110 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for each variation and the average variation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 0 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), every change of 110 times in the time saving state A, the average change time when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 The period value ν is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when executing 110 fluctuations every fluctuation in the time saving state B and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, is E × 110 = 5600 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average variation time when the variation of 110 times is performed every variation in the probability variation state and the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, is I × 110 = 8200 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=902000 (ms). 20-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν >ξ, π>ξ).

In addition, time saving state A, time saving state B, 1100 times of variation in the probability variation state are compared for each variation and the average variation time when executed in the state where the number of second special figure reservation storage is 0 pieces. First, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), every change of 1100 times in the time saving state A is the average change time when executed in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 The period value ν' is calculated as B×1100=9150 (ms)×1100=10065000 (ms). In addition, in the time saving state B, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are made every fluctuation and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, is E × 1100 = 5600 (ms )×1100=6160000 (ms). Then, the period value π ', which is the average variation time when the variation of 1100 times is performed in the probability variation state every variation and the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, is I × 1100 = 8200 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=9020000 (ms). 20-22, the period value ν' is greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is greater than the period value ξ'. (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

That is, in the present characteristic portion 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 times of variable display in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A), the 110 times The time required for the variable display is set to be the shortest in the time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). In addition, when comparing the time required for 1100 variable displays in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, the time required for the 1100 variable displays is also reduced, as shown in FIG. State B is set to be the lowest (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-34(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). In addition, when performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, each fluctuation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 0, the 1100 times of fluctuation display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-34(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ'). .

In addition, when performing 110 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-33(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). In addition, when performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, the 1100 change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-33(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ'). .

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-32(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). In addition, when executing 1100 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 2, the 1100 times of change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-32(B), the time required for the 1100 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ'). .

In addition, when executing 110 times of fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, each change, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, the 110 times change display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-31(A), the time required for the 110 times of fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). Also, in the case of performing 1100 fluctuations in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variable state, each fluctuation, and the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, the 1100 fluctuation display is required When the times are compared, as shown in FIG. 20-31(B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in the time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε'). .

In other words, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variation state in this feature part 099SG, if the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 and 110 times or 1100 times are changed, the second special figure pending When performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation with the number of memories is 1, 2nd special figure reservation When performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation with the number of memories being 2, 2nd special figure reservation In either case of performing 110 times or 1100 times of variation in the state where the number of memories is 3, the time saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol variation efficiency (short average variation display time required per variation) ing. In addition, when the player plays the game without worrying about the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state (Fig. 20-26 (B), Fig. 20-27 (B) 20-28 (B) when the variation display is performed 110 times or 1100 times for each retention memory number), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol variation efficiency (average required per variation short fluctuation display time) is set.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature part 099SG, in addition to the time saving state (time saving state A) and the probability variable state in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol variation efficiency is higher than these time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it is possible to control the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, after the end of a big win, a predetermined number of times (for example, the probability of a big win is about 1) without being controlled to a big win in a low-probability state (for example, normal state (low-probability/low base state)) Even when the variable display is performed such as 900 times in the case of /300 (approximately three times the jackpot probability denominator), it is not controlled to the time saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG. At this point, since the player has already got into the game about three times as much as the denominator of the probability of a big win, the player continues playing for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low-probability/low-base state) continues until a big win occurs, requiring further investment, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, if it is possible to control the time saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG, after the end of the big hit, the jackpot in the low certainty state (for example, the normal state (low certainty / low base state)) When variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the probability of a big hit) without being controlled, it is controlled to the time-saving state B, and a maximum jackpot hit is made a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times). 3.8 times the probability denominator, etc.). At this point, the player has already been hooked about three times as much as the probability of a big win, so the player continues playing for a long time without getting a big win, and the investment is quite large. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit is increased, so that the decline in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

Especially in the characteristic part 099SG, since the player needs a lot of time and investment at the time when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, in the time saving state B, the variable display of the error is displayed in the shortest possible fluctuation time. It functions as a game state for saving the player, so to speak, for shortening the period until it is controlled to the jackpot game state by executing it.

Also, in the feature part 099SG, even if the number of retained memories is fixed and digested in any state of 0 to 3, the time saving state B has the highest variation efficiency than the time saving state A and the probability variable state, 19-36 of the characteristic part 069SG (and the drawing in which the characteristic points according to FIG. 19-36 are described) Various productions (for example, countdown notice, pending change notice, symbol chance notice, effect display notice Such as fore-reading notice effects, movable body notice, character notice, reach notice, notice effects such as button notice, etc.) execution ratio is lower than the execution ratio of various effects in the time saving state A and probability variable state (in the feature part 099SG The execution ratio of various effects is the same as the execution ratio of various effects explained in FIG. 19-36 of the characteristic part 069SG). Therefore, even if the player continues to play for a long time without winning a big hit and is depressed because of the increased investment, if the player is controlled to the time saving state B, the number of pending memories is in any state of 0 to 3. To provide a suitable time-saving state B because the fluctuation can be efficiently digested with little wastefulness regardless of whether the fluctuation is digested in a fixed state or in a state where the number of retained memories is 0 to 3. be able to.

Also, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 20-15, 20-17, 20-19, and 20-21, the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variable state is multiplied by 110 calculated and compared. This is because of the 1100 variable displays in time saving state B, the digestion time of 110 variable displays (total time of 110 variable displays) is more than the digestion time of 110 variable displays in time saving state A and probability variable state. is also short. Hypothetically, if the digestion time of 110 times of variable display in time saving state B is the same (or approximately the same) period as the digestion time of 110 times of variable display in time saving state A or probability variable state, 1100 times of time saving state B Since the consumption time of the variable display requires several times the consumption time of 110 times of the variable display in the time saving state B, if the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the consumption time will be prolonged and the player will be inconvenienced. It is possible that it will give you a feeling of pleasure or dissatisfaction. Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from feeling dissatisfied when the player is controlled to the time saving state B by increasing the variation efficiency in the time saving state B more than the time saving state A and the probability variable state, and as a result, it is preferable. The invention aims to provide a pachinko game machine 1 capable of controlling the game state to the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. calculated and compared. By being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, the variable display in the time saving state A and the probability variable state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of variable display times in the time saving state B, and these time saving By comparing the variable time of 1100 times in the state A, the variable time of 1100 times in the time saving state B, and the variable time of 1100 times in the probability variable state, it shows that the time saving state B has the highest change efficiency, and the change display is the player This is to show that the time saving state B can be suitably controlled so as not to cause dissatisfaction.

This is, by being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A and the probability variable state, when the variable display in the time saving state A and the probability variable state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of variable display times in the time saving state B, By designing the time saving state B to have the highest variation efficiency, it is shown that the time saving state B has the highest variation efficiency even when compared with the time saving state A and the probability variable state. Therefore, the change in the time saving state B is not dissatisfied, and as a result, the control is preferably performed in the time saving state B.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 110 is the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α which is the average fluctuation time of 110, and the period value ψ is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability changing state Multiply the period value γ by 110 Since it is set smaller than the obtained period value ω, the variation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the variation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probability variable state, thereby shortening the period until it is controlled to the jackpot game state and shortening the time. The player's dissatisfaction in the state B can be reduced, and as a result, a favorable time-saving state B can be provided. Especially in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, by increasing the variation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state can be shortened to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player. In addition, in the time saving state A and the probability changing state controlled via the jackpot game (the time saving state A and the probability changing state in which the variable display with a longer special figure fluctuation time than the time saving state B is likely to be executed), the jackpot game is played during the variable display A predetermined effect that suggests being controlled to a state or the like can be executed over an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 1100 is It is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuation, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value ω ' obtained by multiplication, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state by the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B being higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probability variable state By shortening, the player's dissatisfaction in the time saving state B can be reduced, and as a result, a suitable time saving state B can be provided. Especially in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, by increasing the variation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the period until it is controlled to the big hit game state can be shortened to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player. In addition, in the time saving state A and the probability changing state controlled via the jackpot game (the time saving state A and the probability changing state in which the variable display with a longer special figure fluctuation time than the time saving state B is likely to be executed), the jackpot game is played during the variable display A predetermined effect that suggests being controlled to a state or the like can be executed over an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-21, 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A It is set smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ξ Since it is set smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-22, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value ν ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ξ' is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in the probability variable state. Since it is set smaller than the period value π ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is deviated by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-19, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B 110 times fluctuation in the time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A Is set smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value λ is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 1 Since it is set smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variable display by the number of variable displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the variable display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-20, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value κ ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value λ 'is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value μ ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be missed by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-17, 110 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state B The period value θ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the time saving state A is set smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value θ is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 2 Since it is set smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-18, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state B The period value θ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value η ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value θ 'is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value ι 'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display in the time saving state B by the average variation time of the variation display that is out of the time saving state B, the variation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-15, in the time saving state B 110 times fluctuation in the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending storage is 3 in the time saving state B The period value ε obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 110 times in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A While it is set smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, the period value ε is the second special figure pending storage number in the probability variable state is 3 Since it is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A and the probability variable state Since it can be made to progress earlier than, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-16, 1100 times of fluctuation in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is executed when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B The period value ε ' obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is 1100 It is set smaller than the period value δ ' obtained by multiplying the number of variable display times, and the period value ε 'is executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 in the probability variable state Since it is set smaller than the period value ζ ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is to be lost by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state Since it can be made to progress earlier than A and probability variable state, the game interest of time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic part 099SG can execute variable display of normal symbols in addition to variable display of special symbols, and the result of variable display of the normal symbols is a win (normal win). A game ball can win a prize in the second starting winning port changed from the closed state to the open state. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning opening. Based on, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the information of the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed yet can be stored as a temporary memory. It has 099SG151B. In these first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B, both the maximum number of reserved storages are set to 4, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved storages depends on the game state. It never changes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 (B) and 20-2 (D), the probability that a normal pattern hit occurs in the normal symbol fluctuation display is when the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B The opening time of the second start winning port when the normal game hit occurs is set to 3 seconds in common between the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B. If the game state is the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the game ball launched by the launcher toward the second path of the right game area wins (enters) the gate 41 or the second start winning opening ) is possible. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 099SG, since most of the game characteristics can be shared between the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the case where the game state is the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the time saving state can be shared. It is possible to prevent a player from being confused due to a large difference in game characteristics between the state B and the state B.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 099SG, when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variable state, the variable display period in which the variable display result is lost is variable display from the variable display start timing of the special symbol. The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period until the end timing, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the number of fluctuation display times when the game state is any of the probability variable state, time saving state B, and probability variable state “110” or “1100” ” to calculate each period value, but the present invention is not limited to this. , an average fluctuation time is calculated as a period from the timing when the launched game ball enters the starting winning hole to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the starting winning, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the game state are variable states; Each period value may be calculated by multiplying "110" or "1100", which is the number of variable display times in either the time saving state B or the variable probability state. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately obtain the period value in each game state by measurement.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of pending data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, as shown in FIG. 20-13 In addition, each period value in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each number of retained memories by the ratio of the variable display executed with each retained memory number to the 110 variable displays. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, if the game state is the time saving state A, and the period value α when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A, the period value α is A × a + B × b + C × c + D × It is calculated by the value of d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A, a is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, c is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time reduction state A to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state A is out, d is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, and the period value β when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B, the period value β is E×e+F×f+G×g+H× Calculated from the value of h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at the time to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B, f is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B is 2 The average variation time when the variation display result is lost in the case of 1, g is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 2 in the time reduction state B to the 110 variation displays in the time reduction state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in the time saving state B is out, h is the second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B when the number is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

Also, if the gaming state is a variable probability state, and the period value γ is the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state, the period value γ is I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. calculated by the value. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state is out, i is the second special figure pending storage when the number is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j is in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state is the average variation time when is out, k is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 110 variation display of the probability variation state, L is the second special in the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of figure pending memories is 3, l is the 110 times variation in the probability variable state when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state It is a percentage of the display. By calculating the period value γ as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate probability changing state period value γ corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of pending data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, as shown in FIG. 20-14 In addition, each period value in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each reserved memory number by the ratio of the variable display executed with each reserved memory number to the 1100 variable display times. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, when the game state is the time saving state A, and the period value α' when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A, the period value α' is A x a' + B x It is calculated by the value of b'+C.times.c'+D.times.d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state A, a ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A, B is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time saving state A is out, b ' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 times variable display of the time saving state A, C is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state A 1100 times of the time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, d ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α' of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

Also, if the game state is the time saving state B, and the period value in the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β', the period value β' is E×e'+F× It is calculated by the value of f′+G×g′+H×h′. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 0 in the time saving state B, e ' is the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state B The ratio of the variable display at a certain time to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the variable display result when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is out, f' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 times variable display in the time saving state B, G is the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state B The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is lost when there are two, g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the time saving state B 1100 times of the time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, h ' is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state B is 3 It is the ratio of the variable display when , to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, and the period value γ' when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state, the period value γ' is I×i′+J×j′. +K×k'+L×l'. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state, i ' is when the second special figure pending storage is 0 in the probability variable state The ratio of the variable display to the 1100 variable displays of the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the variable display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1 in the probability variable state, j' is the probability variable The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 in the state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, K is the variation when the number of second special figure pending memories is 2 in the probability variable state The average variation time when the display result is out, k 'is the ratio of the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is two in the probability variation state to the 1100 variation display in the probability variation state, L is the probability variation state The average variation time when the variation display result is lost when the number of second special figure pending memories is 3, l' is the probability variation state when the variation display when the second special figure reservation memory is 3 is the probability variation state This is the ratio of 1100 times of fluctuation display. By calculating the period value γ' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate probability changing state period value γ' corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

As described above, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variation state in this feature part 099SG, when performing the variation of 110 times or 1100 times in a state where the number of second special figure pending storage is 0, the second If the variation is 110 times or 1100 times with the number of special figure pending memories being 1, the second In either case of 110 or 1100 fluctuations with the number of special figure pending memories being 3, the time saving state B has the highest special symbol fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is short ) is set. In addition, when the player plays the game without worrying about the second special figure pending memory number in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state (Fig. 20-26 (B), Fig. 20-27 (B) 20-28 (B) when the variation display is performed 110 times or 1100 times for each retention memory number), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol variation efficiency (average required per variation short fluctuation display time) is set.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state A, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 variation in probability variation state are each multiplied by 110 or 1100 By comparing the values obtained by comparing the values obtained, the example shows that the variation efficiency of the time saving state B is the highest, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the average variation time of the variation of 1 in the time saving state A , The value to be multiplied by each of the average variation time of 1 variation in the time saving state B and the average variation time of 1 variation in the probability variation state may be a value other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state A, the average variation time of 1 variation in time saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 variation in probability variation state by 109 or 1099 is the time saving state This is because the first change in A, time saving state B, and probability change state almost always starts with the number of retained memories being 0. In addition, if the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time saving state A, time saving state B, probability variable state, or 2 states of time saving state A and probability variable state are changed at a higher rate than other fluctuations and the special figure fluctuation time is long may be a value multiplied by 104, 1094, etc., excluding a total of 6 fluctuations, ie, the first fluctuation and the last 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic portion 018SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-1 to 21-23. FIG. 21-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 018SG. 21-2, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. In addition, in this characteristic part 018SG, illustration and detailed description of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069SG and 099SG are omitted, and differences will be mainly described. Further, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 069SG or the characteristic portion 099SG.

FIG. 21-1 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 018SG. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, . , a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Also, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type of super reach variation pattern may be used like the normal reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 21-1, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the variation patterns of super reach, the variation pattern of super reach β has a variable display period (80 seconds) longer than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the variation pattern of deviation of super reach α. . On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ is a fluctuation pattern of deviation for high base as described later, so the variable display period is shorter than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach α. period (40 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 21-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a variation pattern when the game state is the normal state (low base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the normal state (low base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A, and use the big hit variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach Big hit variation pattern), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot). In the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is the low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination ratio is higher in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "missing" and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table A for loss The fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern) and PA2-3 (super reach β variation). pattern). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

Also, if the variable display result is "missing" and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table B for loss The fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2-3 (variation of super reach β deviation) pattern). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

FIG. 21-2(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a variation pattern when the game state is the time saving state (high base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the time saving state (high base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and use the big hit variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach Big hit variation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern). In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is the high base state and the variable display result is "big win", the determination ratio is higher in the order of normal reach and super reach γ.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "loss", select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to set the variation pattern PA1-4 (variation pattern of non-reach loss) and PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of deviation from normal reach) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ). Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4. assigned.

(About various productions)
Next, various effects executed in the super ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-3 to 21-5. FIG. 21-3 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in the jackpot variation patterns of super reach α, β, γ. FIG. 21-4 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in loss variation patterns of super reach α, β, γ. 21-5, (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types.

Although not shown in particular, the effect control CPU 120, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern, after starting the variable display, changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. , abbreviated as “N reach effect”). After that, the variable display of the decoration pattern is ended without developing into a super ready-to-win effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP ready-to-win effect").

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 and 21-4, in the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the super reach variation pattern, the period from the timing ta0 when the variable display is started until a predetermined period elapses (ta0 to ta1) Then, variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 21-9 (N1)). In this period (ta0 to ta1), the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 is a light emission pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of normal background effects in the low base state, and a plurality of types of music in the high base state. By combining light emission patterns corresponding to various SP reach effects with light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of normal background effects and light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of music, The dramatic effect can be enhanced by the light emission pattern.

At timing ta1 when a predetermined period has elapsed from timing ta0 at which variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to a normal reach display mode, and "N reach performance" is executed as a variable display performance over a predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super ready-to-win display mode, and the "SP ready-to-win effect" as the variable display effect is executed for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

Thus, "N reach production" is a common production that is executed in both the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it ends without developing into "SP reach production", and the super In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, it develops into "SP reach production". Therefore, even in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, the player can expect that the "N reach effect" will develop into the "SP reach effect A to E" described later.

As shown in FIGS. 21-3 and 21-4, "SP reach effect A to E" indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", that is, "big hit" or "loss". During the SP ready-to-win effect period, a "determined effect", which will be described later, is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in FIG. 21-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the end of the "SP ready-to-win production A to E", the "post production" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7). After that, the variable display ends. Thus, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of the SP reach α, β, γ includes a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) for executing variable display of decorative patterns, and a jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. and a post-effect part (ta5 to ta7) that informs the expected number of balls that can be obtained in.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-4, when the result of the variable display is a failure, the variable display ends when the "SP ready-to-win effect A to E" ends. In addition, after the end of the notification of the loss (ta5 to ta5A), the determined decoration pattern of the predetermined ready-to-win combination, which is not the big hit combination, returns to the normal background screen in a state of temporarily stopped display (shaking state), and the pattern confirmation period. Temporary stop is displayed until

Next, various effects executed in the super reach variation pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach production A" is executed as the SP reach production, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, When "SP reach performance B" or "SP reach performance C" is executed as the SP reach performance and the variation pattern is the super reach α variation pattern, "SP reach performance D" or "SP reach performance E" is executed as the SP reach performance. is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21-5(B), in the "SP reach performance B to E" other than the "SP reach performance A", the teammate character A-1 and the teammate character A different from the teammate character A-1 -2, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. The number of types of friendly characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and friendly characters and enemy characters other than the above may appear. Further, even for the same character, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the display mode.

"SP reach effect A" is executed when the SP reach α variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and is an effect in which a moving image of a bowling challenge is displayed, When all the pins fall, a "big hit" is reported, and when all the pins do not fall, a "loss" is reported. In the video of the bowling challenge, friend characters A-1 and A-2 and enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed.

"SP reach performance B" is executable when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are executed. are displayed in a motion picture of ``Battle A'' in which Friend Character A-1 faces off in the city. is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1, a "miss" is reported.

"SP reach effect C" is executable when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are executed. is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" is displayed in which A-2 faces off in the city. is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2, a "miss" is reported.

"SP reach effect D" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B (high base state), It is an effect in which a moving image of "Battle B", in which character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness, is displayed. A "big hit" is reported, and a "loss" is reported when the ally character A-1 fails to beat the enemy character X-1 and is defeated.

"SP reach effect E" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B (high base state), It is an effect in which a moving image of "Battle B", in which character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness, is displayed. A "big hit" is reported, and a "loss" is reported when the ally character A-1 fails to defeat the enemy character X-2 and is defeated.

In addition, since the variation pattern of super reach β has a higher expectation of a big hit than the variation pattern of super reach α, the expectation of a big hit is higher for SP reach production B and SP reach production C than for SP reach production A ( Hit expectation: SP reach performance A<SP reach performance B<SP reach performance C).

"Determined effect" is a predetermined period from the timing (for example, timing ta3 when the final confrontation of bowling and battle starts just before the end of the SP reach effect) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effect A to E (for example, , ta3 to ta5). Specifically, during the operation effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, a "win/fail button effect" prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and during the operation effective period, the operation of the push button 31B is detected. or "movable body effect" executed at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detection of the operation of the push button 31B.

The "movable object effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit, and is executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period, or during the operation effective period when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. is completed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position. If the variable display result is a failure, it is not executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B.

In addition, according to the execution of the movable body effect (falling of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body LED 208 and the game effect are displayed. A light-emitting effect in which the lamp 9 or the like is lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, rainbow lighting), and a vibration in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. An effect and a sound effect of outputting a predetermined sound effect are performed.

In addition, in the SP reach production A, the friendly character and the enemy character are not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so the character is not displayed in the movable body production. is displayed, the enemy character that was displayed in the battle showdown is also displayed in the movable body presentation.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the hit/fail button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the big hit, and the variable display result is not lost. In some cases, after the hit/fail button effect is performed, the loss notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

"Post effect A" is executed after being notified that the game state is normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a big win, and SP reach effect A to C are controlled to the big win game state. be. Specifically, in SP ready-to-win performances A to C, after the finalized decoration symbols that are predetermined big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the confirmation of the big hit is announced, The re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) in which the re-variation display of the confirmed decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is performed, and the re-variation display is performed in the re-lottery variation part. and a re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in which the display result is informed by stopping and displaying the fixed decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R later. Incidentally, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post effect A is "10 seconds".

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the SP reach effects A to C, fixed decoration patterns consisting of a combination of even patterns (eg, 666, etc.) are temporarily stopped and displayed, and re-variable display is started in the re-lottery fluctuation part. After that, in the re-lottery result part, the fixed decorative pattern consisting of the combination of even-numbered patterns or the fixed decorative pattern consisting of the combination of odd-numbered patterns is stopped and displayed. In the re-lottery result part, when fixed decorative patterns consisting of a combination of even-numbered patterns are stop-displayed, it is reported that it is a ``jackpot A'' controlled to a time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot game state, and odd-numbered patterns are displayed. When the fixed decorative symbols formed by the combination are stopped and displayed (symbol promotion), it is reported that it is a "jackpot B" which is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot game state is finished.

In addition, in the post effect A of the SP reach effect A, since the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the post effect A either. Further, in the post-effect A of the SP reach effects B and C, the characters appear in the SP reach effects B and C, but the character does not appear in the post-effect A. By doing so, even when the SP ready-to-win performance A in which the character does not appear is executed, the post-performance A is executed in a mode in which the character does not appear, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The ``post-fact performance B'' is controlled to a jackpot game state in SP ready-to-win performances D and E when the variable display result is a big win in the game state of the time saving state A, the probability variable state, and the time saving state B (high base state). Executed after notification. Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win performances D and E, after the confirmed decoration symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify that the jackpot is confirmed, A scheduled ball throwing addition part (ta5 to ta6) in which the scheduled number of balls that have appeared in the SP reach effects D and E attack the enemy character is added and displayed, and the friendly character becomes the enemy character. After giving the final blow, the scheduled number of balls to be put out is stopped and announced, and then the fixed decoration pattern that will be the big hit combination is stopped and the variable display ends. ta6 to ta7). It should be noted that the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B is set to 15 seconds, which is longer than the execution period of the post-effect A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 and 21-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach α is 45 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach β. is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. That is, the variable display part period is shortened in order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β>SP reach α>SP reach γ). .

In SP reach α, β, and γ, the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display to N reach is different, and from the start of variable display to N reach in SP reach γ. The period (ta0-ta1) is shorter than the period (ta0-ta1) from the start of variable display in SP reach α, β to N reach (ta0-ta1; SP reach γ < SP reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach α, β, γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach γ is N in the SP reach α, β It is shorter (ta1 to ta2; SP reach γ<SP reach α, β) than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the reach effect.

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP reach α, β, γ are different, SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E), SP reach α (SP reach effect A) , SP reach β (SP reach production B, C) is longer in order {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach production D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach production A) < SP reach β (SP Reach production B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period (40 seconds) of SP reach γ is shorter than the variable display part period (45 seconds) of SP reach α and the variable display part period (80 seconds) of SP reach β (variable display period ; SP reach β > SP reach α > SP reach γ), SP reach γ (SP reach production D, E) After the completion of the decided production, the jackpot combination predetermined in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production B until the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is determined by SP reach α (SP reach production A) and SP reach β (SP reach production B, C). It is longer than the execution period (ta5-ta7) of the post-effect A from the end until the determined decoration symbols that are the predetermined big hit combinations are stopped and displayed in the respective decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5- ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds)>SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B = SP reach effect C=SP reach effect D=SP reach effect E). Therefore, since the control data of the movable body 32, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the SP reach effects A to E can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It should be noted that the execution period of the "win/fail button effect" and the execution period of the "movable object effect" in the "decision effect" are common to the SP ready-to-win effects A to E.

In addition, the execution period of "post effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, SP reach effect A From the timing ta5 when the confirmed decorative symbols that become the predetermined big win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification of the confirmation of the big hit to E, the confirmed decorative symbols that become the predetermined big win combination are stop-displayed (the variable display ends). ) By setting (ta5 to ta7) up to timing ta7, it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the post-effect is executed, and to increase the attention to post-effects A and B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "post-effects A, B" are performed during a pattern confirmation period and a jackpot fanfare period, etc., which are started after the fixed decoration patterns that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. may be executable.

In addition, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and in SP reach γ, "movable body The period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "effect" ends to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed is the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach β. is longer than the period (ta4-ta7) from the timing to timing ta7 at which fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined big hit combination are stopped and displayed (ta4-ta7; SP reach γ>SP reach β). By doing so, in the SP reach γ executed in a short variable display period, by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body effect", the impression of the variable display is enhanced even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C are all common, and the execution period of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E ( ta5 to ta7) are all common. By doing so, the control data for the post-effects A and B, especially the character motion control data for the post-effect B can be easily diverted, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C are all common, and the execution period of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E ( While ta5 to ta7) are all common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" and the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-effect B" are different, so SP reach effects A to C are each By sharing the effect period of the post-effect A corresponding to , it is possible to easily share the effect contents and control, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the post-effect B with a different effect period is executed. , post-productions A and B can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the production effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Operation mode of SP reach production A to E and post-production A and B)
Next, operation modes of SP ready-to-win effects A to E and post-effects A and B when the variable display result is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 21-6. 21-6, (A) is a diagram showing the character display mode in SP reach production A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in SP reach production A to E, (C) is SP reach FIG. 10 is a diagram showing output patterns of BGM and sound effects in productions A to E;

As shown in FIG. 21-6(A), to explain the character display mode in the SP reach production A to E, during the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown and the battle showdown in the SP reach production, In , no character is displayed, in SP reach production B, friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in SP reach production C, friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed. In the SP ready-to-win production D, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP ready-to-win production E, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. As described above, the SP ready-to-win effect A is an effect in which characters are not displayed, whereas the SP ready-to-win effects B to E are effects in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "positive button effect" of the decided effect in the SP reach effect, the character is not displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while in the execution period of the "movable body effect", in the SP reach effect A , the character is not displayed, in the SP ready-to-win production B, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed, and in the SP ready-to-reach production C, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed. , in the SP ready-to-win production D, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP ready-to-win production E, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the big hit confirmation notification in the SP reach production, the character is not displayed in the SP reach production A, and the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed in the SP reach production B. Friend character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, and friend character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and SP reach performance. At E, an ally character A-1 and an enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In addition, in the re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) and the re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production A corresponding to the SP reach production A to C, the character is not displayed in the SP reach production A, and the SP In ready-to-reach effect B, friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in SP ready-to-reach effect C, friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the scheduled ball throw addition part (ta5 to ta6) and the scheduled ball ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effects D and E, in the SP ready-to-win effect D, the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In this way, in the SP reach production A, the character is not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so the character is not displayed in the movable body production and the post-production A, while in the SP reach production B to E, the character is confronted with the ally character in the battle showdown. The enemy character is also displayed in the movable body presentation and the post-facto presentations A and B.

That is, in the SP ready-to-win production A, an image (image in which the character is not displayed) related to the bowling competition is displayed in the movable body production before the big hit confirmation notification is performed, and in the SP ready-to-win production B to E, the big win In the movable body production before the confirmation notification is performed, since the image of the aspect related to the battle confrontation (the image of the enemy character who was confronted) is displayed, SP reach production A to E and the SP reach production A It is possible to increase the relevance with the movable object effect executed during the effect period of ~E.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, in the post effect A, an image (image in which the character is not displayed) related to the SP reach effect A is displayed, and in the SP reach effects D and E, in the post effect B, the SP reach Since the image of the aspect related to the effects D and E (the image of the ally character and the enemy character who are facing each other) is displayed, the SP reach effects A, D and E and the SP reach effects A, D and E end. It is possible to increase the relevance between post-effects A and B to be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-6(B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. It should be noted that the numerical values in parentheses (for example, B100, etc.) of each pattern indicate the extension commands described in the feature section 069SG. In addition, the various light emission patterns described below differ from other light emission patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as light emission color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting time, light-off timing, light-off time, and blinking cycle. , and each light emission pattern can be changed in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, in the SP reach production A, the lighting pattern LP1-1 is lit based on the extended command B100, and in the SP reach production B and C, the extended command Based on B101, it lights up in the light emission pattern LP1-2, and in the SP reach effects D and E, it lights up in the light emission pattern LP1-3 based on the extension command B102.

Also, during the execution period of the "appropriate button effect" in the SP reach effect, based on the extended commands B200 to B203, it is lit in any one of the light emission patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 common to the SP reach effect A to E. . In addition, one of the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the light emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4. ing.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and "big hit notification" in the SP ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect A to E are lit in a common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B000. In addition, during the execution period of the "loss notification" in the SP ready-to-win production, in the SP ready-to-win production A to E, the common light emission pattern LP3-1 is lit based on the extended command B300.

In addition, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball release part (ta5-ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effect A-C lights up in a common light emission pattern LP4-1 based on the extended command BA00. In the SP ready-to-win productions D and E, the common light emission pattern LP4-4 is lit based on the extended command BB00.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball release notification part (ta6-ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach production A-C, lighting with the common light emission pattern LP4-2 based on the extended command BA01 , Or, based on the extended command BA02 is lit in the common light emission pattern LP4-3, in the SP reach production D, E, lighting in the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB01, or to the extended command BB02 Based on this, they are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-6.

The light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on light emission control data described later. An outline of each emission pattern will be described below. The parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate the extension command.

As shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), in "Bowling/Battle", the light emission pattern LP1-1 (B100) is the introduction of the reach title, frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12) and the LED on the board (movable LED 208) emits light (see Figure 21-10), and the light emission pattern LP1-2 (B101) introduces the reach title and emits light based on the color of the city background. The frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in color, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up according to the action (such as attacking action) of ally A-1/A-2 and enemy X-1/X-2. It is a pattern that emits light (see FIGS. 21-11 (A2) and (A3)), and the light emission pattern LP1-3 (B102) is based on the title introduction, the color of the wilderness background, and the frame LED and the game board surface. This is a pattern in which the upper LED emits light, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light according to the action (attack action, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemy X-1/X-2 (Fig. 21-12 ( A4), see (A5)).

In the “win/fail button effect”, the light emission pattern LP2-1 (B200) is that after the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light in accordance with “keep pressing the button to accumulate power!” and a pattern in which the LED on the game board emits light (see FIG. 21-13). It is a pattern in which the LED on the board emits light (see Fig. 21-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for power-up (second stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the game board are displayed in "green". The LED is for light emission (see Fig. 21-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power-up (third stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the game board LED emit light in "red". pattern (see FIGS. 21-13). The light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 are light emission patterns that change step by step to blue, green, and red (MAX) according to the player's long-pressing operation (accumulation condition of the gauge display).

In the "loss notification", the light emission pattern LP3-1 (B300) is such that when the "loss" is announced in the result notification, the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light in white with low brightness, and the display screen is the normal background. This pattern continues until the next fluctuation starts even after returning to , (see FIGS. 21-16).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the light emission pattern LP3-2 (B000) is used in the background of the movable body effect in the movable body effect (first period) when the "big hit" is announced in the result notification. With the combined color, in the movable body production (second period), the frame LED and the game board surface LED emit light according to the background image and effect display during the movable body production, and in the big hit notification, the frame LED and the game board are illuminated in rainbow colors. This is the pattern in which the LEDs on the board emit light (see FIGS. 21-14 and 21-15). Note that the extension command (B000) is different from other extension commands in that the operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor driving) for operating the movable body 32, the frame LED and the game board LED and gradation control data for emitting light are set.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body motion control and the LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for the movable body motion control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extension commands used for the movable body presentation are divided into an extension command for controlling the motion of the movable body and an extension command for controlling the lighting of the LED, there is a risk that one of the extension commands may be missed due to a problem. By doing so, it is possible to suitably perform the movable body effect.

In addition, by performing the movable body movement control and the LED lighting control with one extended command without dividing the extended command for "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", there is no need to divide the extended command according to the effect. Therefore, the program capacity for effect control can be reduced. If the extended commands are divided between the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification", there is a risk that one of the extended commands may be missed due to a problem. "notification" can be performed.

In the “re-lottery variation/addition of scheduled ball output”, the light emission pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the game board surface LEDs emit light in accordance with the background moving image (round and round) (Fig. 21-17 (F1) reference), the light emission pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is based on the color of the space background. ) in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light (see FIGS. 21-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball release notification", the light pattern LP4-2 (BA01) emits light from the frame LED and the game board surface LED when a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed. pattern (see FIG. 21-17 (F2)), and the light emission pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is brighter than the light emission pattern LP4-2 when a combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed. This is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light at a high gradation period (see FIG. 21-17 (F3)). , the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light in accordance with the display of "750", and the same gradation control data as "1500" is used until "750" is displayed (Fig. 21-19 (G1-3) ~ (G3) reference), the light emission pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the scheduled pitch notification "1500", and when "750" is displayed according to the display of "1500" This is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board emit light at a higher brightness and a faster gradation period, and the same gradation control data as '750' is used until '1500' is displayed (Fig. 21-19 ( G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, in the later period after the movable body production during the execution of the SP reach performances A to E, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation notification as the latter period production, and in the big hit confirmation notification, depending on the type of the SP reach production A to E First, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and the movable body LED 208 have a common light emission pattern (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2), so that the common light emission pattern regardless of the type of SP reach production A to E Since the jackpot decision notification is executed, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

It should be noted that the light emission pattern may be varied according to the types of the SP reach effects A to E. For example, the lighting pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the big hit confirmation notification of the SP reach production A is set to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow light emission) shown in FIGS. The corresponding light emission pattern LP3-2 is the rainbow flashing pattern (flash rainbow light emission) shown in FIGS. 22 may be changed from the rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow emission) to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 21-21.

Further, the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball-out addition part of the post-effect B are common between the SP ready-to-win effect D and the SP ready-to-win effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4). As a result, the light emission pattern can also be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

In addition, the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 (light emission patterns LP4-5 and LP4-6) in the scheduled ball release notification part of the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E While is common, the movable body LED 208 of the post-production A corresponding to the SP reach production A, the frame LED 9L1 ~ 9L12, the light emission pattern of 9R1 ~ 9R12 (light emission pattern LP4-2, LP4-3), and the SP reach production D The light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E are different, thereby further reducing the manufacturing cost. The effect of the post-production can be enhanced by executing the post-production A with a different light emission pattern.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, an arbitrary timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "win/fail button presentation" is executed, or the operation effective period is not detected and the operation effective period is Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing of completion, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in different light emission patterns according to the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed. can be By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode by changing the timing of the operation by the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), for the LED light emission pattern in the SP reach production, the light emission pattern LP1-2 is commonly used in the SP reach production B and C, but for example, the SP reach production B In light emission pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-1, light emission according to action) is used, and in SP reach C light emission pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background By using color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to action), the luminance data of part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP reach production B and C can be used in common. While suppressing the development cost, the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 may each use dedicated brightness data so as to make a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

The light emission pattern LP1-3 is commonly used in the SP reach production D and E. For example, in the SP reach production D, the light emission pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-1 image color , light emission according to the action), and in SP Reach E, the light emission pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: Wilderness background color + enemy character X-2 image color, light emission according to the action) The luminance data of part of the LED light emission pattern (the city background color part) of the SP reach production D and E is used in common to reduce the development cost, and the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 have their own luminance. Data may be used to make a difference in presentation at minimal cost.

Also, one of the SP reach effects B and C in the low base state and the SP reach effects D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach effects D and E) is set as a common light emission pattern, and the other (for example, SP The reach effects B and C) may be different light emission patterns. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost on one side, and to preferably show the difference in presentation on the other side.

(gradation control data)
Here, the control data for realizing the lighting effects will be briefly described. FIG. 21-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a smooth rainbow lighting pattern. 21 and 22 are diagrams for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 21-21, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED. . The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in rainbow colors by performing lamp control based on the smooth rainbow light emission data table.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-22, as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, luminance data corresponding to turning off for 20 msec corresponds to seven colors (rainbow colors) at intervals of 30 msec. Specified between data of various luminances. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the data table of flash rainbow light emission, thereby lighting the frame lamp intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the effect control CPU 120 to control light emission of each LED. The light emission control table contains, for example, light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, electric parts and emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, and the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal. stores the luminous body driver and electric parts corresponding to the output terminal number (eg, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, movable body LED 208, etc.), and the luminous body driver data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the control data format and used for generating the light emission control data based on the control data format.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, and the format type stores one of the basic format (EX=0) and the extended format (EX=1). ("basic" or "extended") is stored, and the address stores the address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and data transmission The cycle stores the cycle of transmitting the light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time is the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. remembered. In this embodiment, the data transmission period is assumed to be 10 ms (milliseconds).

In the light emission control period, a time corresponding to one cycle of light emission control unit (hereinafter, this period is referred to as “light emission control period”) is stored. This light emission control period differs depending on the type of light emission. Specifically, when the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and the light emission type is "switching" (special light emission color accompanying multiple color changes ( In the case of rainbow-colored light emission, etc.), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, in the format data, the order of light emission and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the order of light emission are defined in association with each other.

In this embodiment, Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal numbers is used to control the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12. In color hexadecimal, "16 x 16 = 256 gradations" is represented by expressing each of RGB with two digits each in total of six hexadecimal digits (0 to F). are the same value, and each of RGB is illustrated and described as a notation in which each digit is abbreviated to a total of three digits. Also, for the sake of simplification, notation of "0x" representing a hexadecimal number is omitted in the drawings and explanations.

The Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and group 3 is included. The Q data corresponding to each group stores RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group.

A specific description will be given. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Further, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is determined that the target LED should emit light with a unit light emission time of 100 ms. If the light emission control period is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control period in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color. there is

Further, for example, in the format data, the order of light emission is determined from "1" to "N", and for each of the light emission order "1" to "N", Q data (RGB values) is defined as "0, 0, F", the R value and G value of the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all the light emission orders. Blue continuous light emission is realized.

Next, the control data for controlling the gradation of the LEDs and realizing mixed-color light emission will be described. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data in the format data included in the emission control generation data.

FIG. 21-22 shows gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing blinking of rainbow colors (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated. Note that the gradation control data for the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is the object of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, so illustration thereof is omitted. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit light emission time Δtn, and the right column shows each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 ( 9L4), . . . ) are expressed in hexadecimal.

Further, in the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data shown in FIGS. 0”, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

21-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 30 ms, the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, F", and The Q data (RGB values) of group 4 are "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 are "0, C, F", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 are "0, F, D ”, the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 are “0, F, 9”, the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 are “0, F, 5”, and the Q data (RGB values) of group 8 are “0 , F, 1", the Q data (RGB values) of group 9 are "2, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 10 are "6, F, 0", the Q data of group 11 (RGB values ) are “A, F, 0” and the Q data (RGB values) of group 12 are “F, F, 0”, the emission colors of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are different from each other (also different from the emission color of the emission order 3). ) is realized.

In this way, with a short switching unit light emission time Δts, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are controlled to sequentially switch the emission colors of a plurality of colors, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are extinguished. Visually, it can be visually recognized as if it were blinking in rainbow colors. It should be noted that the mode of sandwiching is not limited to extinguishing, and for example, white light that does not constitute the rainbow color may be used. RGB values with low luminance such as "1, 1" may be set.

FIG. 21-21 shows gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow-colored lighting (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated.

Unlike the gradation control data shown in FIG. 21-21, the gradation control data shown in FIG. 21-21 does not include control for extinguishing the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. Therefore, it can be visually recognized as if it were lit in rainbow colors visually. In the light emission order 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the emission of the same color as in the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data is realized. In addition, even with the gradation control data, by controlling so that the emission colors to be emitted from the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are sequentially switched in a short switching unit emission time Δts, a rainbow-colored light is visually perceived by humans. You can see it as if you were there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-6(C), the output patterns of BGM and sound effects in the SP ready-to-win productions A to E will be described. In addition, the various sound patterns described below differ from other sound patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as volume, tone quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be changed in various ways. It is possible.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production A, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach production A, and in the SP reach production B, the sound pattern BP1- 2, BGM and sound effects are output, in SP reach production C, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-3, and in SP reach production D, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-4. In the SP reach production E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP1-5.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output in the SP reach effect A to E. Note that one of the sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the result of the variable display, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4. ing.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable object effect" and "big hit notification" in the SP ready-to-win effect, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 in the SP ready-to-win effect A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "loss notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are illuminated with common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3.

In addition, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball release part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effect A to C is output in the sound pattern BP4-1, the SP reach effect D, At E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP4-4.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach production A to C, the sound pattern BP4-2 or the sound pattern BP4-3 BGM and sound effects are output, and in SP reach performances D and E, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6.

The sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 output sounds in different modes based on sound control data. The outline of each sound pattern will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 21-7(B), in "bowling/battle", the sound pattern BP1-1 is the voice at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach production A, the voice of "Kill the pins!", and the SP reach. This is a pattern in which the BGM of production A is output (see FIG. 21-10), and the sound patterns BP1-2 are the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production B, the voice of "Fight!" It is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-1, the BGM of SP reach production B, and the battle sound effect are output (see FIG. 21-11 (A2)), and the sound pattern BP1-3 is the SP reach production C This is the pattern that outputs the voice when the reach title is introduced, the voice of "Fight!", the voice of ally A-2 of "It's settled next time!" 21-11 (A3) reference), the sound patterns BP1-4 are the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production D, the voice of "Fight!" , BGM of SP reach effect D, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 21-12 (A4)), and sound patterns BP1-5 are voices when introducing reach titles for SP reach effect E, " Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "Next time it's over!", BGM of SP reach effect E, and battle sound effects (see FIG. 21-12 (A5)).

The sound pattern BP2-1 in the "approve/fail button effect" is a pattern in which a voice saying "keep pressing the button to accumulate power" and a sound effect with a power level of 0 are output (see FIG. 21-13), Sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 1, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 2, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern for outputting sound effects at power level 2. This pattern outputs a voice of level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect of power level 3 (MAX).

In the "notice of failure", the sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which a failure sound effect is output (see FIG. ) voice and battle defeat BGM are output (see FIGS. 21-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)). This is a pattern in which defeat BGM is output (see FIG. 21-16 (H3)).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the effect sound of the moveable body effect, the sound effect of success, and the BGM of success are output (see FIG. 21-15 (E1)), The sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body production, the victory voice of the ally A-1, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIGS. 21-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), The sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body production, the victory voice of the ally A-2, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIG. 21-15 (E3)).

In the "re-lottery variation/scheduled ball release addition", the sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the BGM of the re-lottery variation is output (see FIG. 21-17 (F1)), and the sound pattern BP4-4 is the This is a pattern in which the BGM for adding the number of balls played, the sound effect (attack) for adding the number of balls played, the voice for adding the number of balls played by teammate A-1, and the voice of "Push!" are output (see FIG. 21-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball release notification", the sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of even-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (Fig. 21-17 (F2), sound pattern BP4 -3 is a pattern in which the sound effects of odd-numbered patterns and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (see FIG. 21-17 (F3)), and the sound pattern BP4-5 is the BGM of the scheduled ball release notification, 750 This is a pattern in which sound effects are output (see FIGS. 21-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 outputs the BGM of the scheduled pitch announcement, the sound effect of 1500, and the voice of MAX. (G1-4) to (G4) in FIGS. 21-19).

In addition, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable object production is common to all types of SP reach production A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), thereby further reducing the manufacturing cost. can be done.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, an arbitrary timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period during which the "win/fail button presentation" is executed, or the operation effective period is not detected and the operation effective period is Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the sound pattern in the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4 as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, sound effects may be output in different sound patterns according to the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period during which the "win/fail button effect" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to change the effect sound by changing the timing of the operation by the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Flow of SP reach production A to E)
Next, the flow of SP reach effects A to E will be described based on FIG. 21-8. FIG. 21-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach effects A to E. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 21-8, in the SP reach α, β, γ, when the SP reach production develops from the N reach production, in the case of the SP reach production A, bowling as shown in (A1) is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect B, the start image of the battle A between the friendly character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), and in the case of the SP reach effect C , the start image of the battle A between the friend character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3). 1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the battle B between the friend character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 starts as shown in (A5). An image is displayed. In this way, the first half of the SP ready-to-win productions A to E are different in each of the SP ready-to-win productions A to E.

Next, the hit/fail button effect is started at a predetermined timing at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect. Specifically, as shown in (B1), after the first operation promotion effect for promoting the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B is started, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation promotion effect was started. At the timing, as shown in (B2), the second operation promotion effect is started to promote the release operation of the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B. In this way, the effect mode in the success/failure button effect is common to the SP reach effect A to E.

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected in the operation valid period of the hit/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the operation valid period has passed without being played, an image showing the last throw in bowling and the last blow in battle is displayed, as shown in (C).

Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the ball has hit the pin is displayed, and the SP ready-to-win effect B is displayed. In the case of (D2), as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-1 is attacked is displayed. , (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-2 is attacked is displayed. ), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 is attacked is displayed. As shown, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. Thus, the effect mode of the movable body effect is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effect B and D, and the SP reach effect C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in (E1), a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in (E2), the battle A is displayed. A result image indicating victory is displayed. In the case of SP reach effect C, as shown in (E3), a result image indicating victory in battle A is displayed, and in case of SP reach effect D, ( As shown in E4), a result image showing that the battle B is won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, a result image showing that the battle A is won is displayed as shown in (E5). be. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different for each of the SP ready-to-win effects A to E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach production A to C, the post-production A is started, and in the re-lottery fluctuation part shown in (F1), an image in which the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in (E1 to E3) is re-variably displayed. After being displayed, in the re-lottery result parts shown in (F2) and (F3), fixed decorative symbols that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect D, the post effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball output addition part shown in (G1), the friendly character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacks the enemy character X-1. Then, an image in which the scheduled number of balls is added is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach performance E, the post-performance B is started, and in the scheduled number of balls added part shown in (G2), the teammate displayed in (A5) An image is displayed in which the character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2 and the scheduled ball output is added. Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win productions D and E, the expected number of put-out balls is displayed in the expected put-out notification parts shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is wrong, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the win/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. (C) (D1 to D5) is not displayed at the timing when the operation valid period has passed without being executed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in (H1), it is indicated that the strike has failed. In the case of the SP ready-to-win effect B, a result image showing that the player has lost the battle A is displayed as shown in (H2), and in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect C, the result image shown in (H3) is displayed. , a result image indicating defeat in battle A is displayed, and in the case of SP ready-to-win production D, a result image showing defeat in battle B is displayed as shown in (H4), and SP ready-to-win production is displayed. In the case of E, as shown in (H5), a result image indicating that the player has lost the battle A is displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification differs between the SP ready-to-win effect A, the SP ready-to-win effect B and D, and the SP ready-to-win effect C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win performances A to E, as shown in (I1), fixed decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called "ready-to-win failure") which is not a big hit combination are stopped and displayed.

(Example of SP reach production A to E production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects A to E executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-9 to 21-20. FIG. 21-9 is a diagram showing an effect operation example from the start of the variable display of SP reach α, β, γ to the development of SP reach effect. 21-10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effect A. FIG. FIG. 21-11 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects B and C. FIG. 21-12 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the SP ready-to-win effects D and E. FIG. FIG. 21-13 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the win/fail button effect. FIG. 21-14 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the movable body rendering. FIGS. 21-15 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the big hit notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. FIG. 21-16 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of notification of the loss of SP ready-to-win effects A to E. FIG. 21-17 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect A. FIG. 21-18 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect B. FIG. 21-19 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the post effect B. FIG.

Incidentally, in the following explanation, among the SP ready-to-win productions A to E, the production operations executed in common will be collectively explained, and the different production operations will be explained individually. Also, some of the numbers (for example, A to I) assigned to each frame correspond to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in FIG. 21-8.

As shown in FIG. 21-9 (N1), each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R based on the determination of one of the SP reach α, β, γ as a variation pattern with the occurrence of the start winning prize At , the variable display of the decoration pattern is started.

In the following description, the active display 018SG003 corresponding to the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 018SG013 corresponding to the active display area 069SG013 of the characteristic portion 069SG, and the first reserved display area corresponding to the first reserved display area 069SG011. The pending display 018SG001 corresponding to the pending display 069SG001 is displayed in 018SG011, and the pending display 018SG002 corresponding to the pending display 069SG002 is displayed in the second pending display area 018SG012 corresponding to the second pending display area 069SG012. do.

After the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode, the normal ready-to-win effect is started as the variable display effect of the decoration pattern. As shown in FIG. 21-9 (N3), at the timing when a predetermined time has passed after entering the ready-to-win state, the decoration symbols stopped and displayed in the decoration design display areas 5L and 5R in the decoration design display area 5C are: After the decorative symbols with different numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative design display area 5C is restarted to develop the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 21-10 (A1), when it develops into SP reach production A, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in reduced size in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01A indicating the start of A is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01A includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production A) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and a content display representing bowling. 018SG102 and

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 indicating that the pins are arranged in the bowling lane and the challenge is started is displayed, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A1-2). 21-10 (A1-3), after the image 018SG104 in which the ball hits the pins and is knocked down is displayed, an image in which one pin remains in the bowling lane and "one remaining pin" are displayed as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A1-3). !” and an image 018SG105 indicating that the next throw will be the last throw is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-1, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

As shown in FIG. 21-11 (A2), when it develops into SP reach production B, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01B indicating that B is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01B includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production B) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-2, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A2-1), a background image 018SG201 representing a city, a character image 018SGA1 representing an ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing an enemy character X-1 are provided. Then, an image 018SG202 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21-11 (A3), when it develops to SP reach production C, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01C indicating that C is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01C includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production C) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-2. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-2. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A3-1), a background image 018SG201 representing a city, a character image 018SGA2 representing an ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 representing an enemy character X-2 are provided. Then, an image 018SG212 indicating that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 having character images 018SGA2 and 018SGX2 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21-12 (A4), when it develops into SP reach production D, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in reduced size in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, and SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01D indicating that D is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01D includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production D) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-4, voices and voices from the speakers 8L and 8R BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A4-1), there is a background image 018SG221 representing wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing friend character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1. Then, an image 018SG222 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21-12 (A5), when it develops into SP reach production E, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR at the upper right of the display screen, SP reach production A reach title image 018SG01E indicating that E is started is displayed. The ready-to-win title image 018SG01E includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP ready-to-win production E) indicating the type of SP ready-to-win production, an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) showing the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an ally character A-1. and a content display 018SG102 showing In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP1-5, voices and sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A5-1), there is a background image 018SG221 representing wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing friend character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2. Then, an image 018SG232 indicating that the confrontation is to start is displayed, and as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 having character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2 and indicating that the next blow will be the last blow is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-13 (B1), when the success/failure button presentation is started, a button image 018SG241 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Press and hold the button to accumulate power!" An operation prompting display 018SG242 is displayed, and an operation prompting effect for prompting the long-pressing operation of the push button 31B is started. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP2-1, voices and voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-13 (B1-1), the operation prompting display 018SG242 is switched to "Start charging!" is detected, the display modes of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 change. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L, Voices and BGM are output from 8R.

As shown in FIG. 21-13 (B1-2), when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation prompting display 018SG242 is switched to "Power MAX!" be. Note that the gauge display 018SG243 may not become MAX according to the variable display result even when the long-pressing operation is detected for a predetermined period. Also, the power level may be changed in different manners according to the result of the variable display.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the winning/failing button effect was started, as shown in FIG. Along with prompting to release the long-pressing operation of 31B, the gauge display 018SG243 is switched to a gauge indicating the remaining operation effective period. 21-13 (B1) to FIG. 21-13 (B1-3) are common to SP reach effects A to E.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the hit/fail button presentation, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display need not be executed.

Then, when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the success/fail button effect, or when the operation valid period passes without detection of the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B, variable If the display result is a big hit, the movable object presentation shown in FIG. 21-14 is started.

In the first period from the start of the movable body effect to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, as shown in FIG. and an attack image 018SG250 indicating the final throw or final blow is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 consists of an object image 018SG250A imitating the spherical operating portion of the push button 31B and an effect image 018SG250B showing the object moving to the back side of the screen. In addition, according to the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the rendering position, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are colored to match the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2. The lights are turned on, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, in the first period of the movable body production, the SP ready-to-win productions A to E are executed in a common mode, but in the second period after the first period ends, as follows: Different mode effects are executed in the SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 21-14 (D1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A and the effect image 018SG250B showing the impact are displayed. , and an impact image 018SG251 in which the object hits something is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the impacted object (for example, pin) that the object (ball) collided with, but the present invention is not limited to this. An image showing bowling pins may be displayed in 018SG251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing a shock, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X1, and a shock image 018SG252 showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of the SP reach effect C and the SP reach effect E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing the impact, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X2, and an impact image 018SG253 showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed.

In addition, in the second period of the movable body presentation shown in FIGS. 21-14 (D1) to (D5), common display presentation, light emission presentation, sound presentation, and vibration presentation are performed. Specifically, the display and non-display of the effect image 018SG250B are alternately performed according to the vibration of the movable body 32 (non-display when the movable body 32 moves upward, display when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.). As a result, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 basically match the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B. ~ 9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12 in order of outward direction, and when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, it emits light in a light emission pattern that flashes violently in white, and as a sound effect, a sound pattern BP0-1 3, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration presentation. In addition, in FIGS. 21-14 (D1) to (D5), display using a light guide plate display device may be performed.

In FIGS. 21-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed according to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a color common or similar to the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time. They are displayed in colors (for example, similar colors). By doing so, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 representing the enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B, thereby enhancing the rendering effect of the movable body rendering.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, it is notified that the game will be a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 21-15. Specifically, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect A, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (E1), an image 018SG261 indicating a fallen bowling pin, a character display 018SG262 indicating "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263. , a result image 018SG260A indicating that the bowling challenge was successful is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-1. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (E2), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z representing the enemy character X-1, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260B indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends. The character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out. By displaying the character image 018SGX1Z in this manner, the end of the series of presentations can be appropriately notified.

In the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 representing the friend character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260C indicating that the friendly character A-2 has won the battle against the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-3. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends. The character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is hidden by fading out. By displaying the character image 018SGX2Z in this manner, the end of the series of presentations can be appropriately notified.

In the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (E4), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 representing the enemy character X-1, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260D indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

In the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 representing the friend character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" and an effect image 018SG263, a result image 018SG260E indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is placed in the production position. to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in smooth rainbow light based on the light pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , 8R outputs a victory voice and sound effect, and the vibration presentation ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E were displayed, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. Confirmed decoration patterns (for example, 666, etc.) as a predetermined big win combination in 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the words "big win" are displayed to notify that the big win is confirmed. executed.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the long press operation of the push button 31B has been canceled during the valid operation period of the win/fail button effects shown in FIGS. When the effective period of operation has passed without detection of cancellation of the long-pressing operation, if the result of the variable display is failure, the movable body effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. The deviation confirmation notification shown is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (H1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and an image showing the remaining bowling pins that have not fallen down. A result image 018SG270A having 018SG271 and a character display 018SG272 indicating "Failed..." indicating that the bowling challenge has failed is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-1, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

Further, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect B and the SP ready-to-win effect D, as shown in FIGS. , a character image 018SGX1 indicating the enemy character X-1, and a character display 018SG262 indicating "defeat...", and the friendly character A-1 battles with the enemy character X-1. A result image 018SG270B indicating that the player has lost the confrontation is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-2, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (H3), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA2 showing the friend character A-2 and the enemy character A-2 are displayed. A result having a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeated..." indicating that the friendly character A-2 has lost the battle against the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270C is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-3, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (H5), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA1 showing the friend character A-1 and the enemy character A-1 are displayed. A result having a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeated..." indicating that the friendly character A-1 has lost the battle against the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270E is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low luminance based on the light pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, based on the sound pattern BP3-2, the speaker A failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration presentation ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E were displayed, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. In 5R, by stop-displaying fixed decorative symbols (for example, 676, etc.) of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also referred to as "ready-to-win loss") which is not a big hit combination, loss confirmation notification indicating that the loss is confirmed is executed. .

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP ready-to-win productions A to C, the post production A shown in FIGS. 21-17 is executed.

Specifically, in the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, after the confirmation decoration symbols (for example, 666, etc.) that are the predetermined combination of the decoration symbols in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, In the re-lottery variable part shown in (F1), the re-variable display of the decorative design is started in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1. is output.

Then, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 21-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-variable), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the re-variable display was started, a predetermined A combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666, etc.) is stop-displayed as a fixed decorative symbol for a jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2. is output.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 21-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (variable probability), a predetermined jackpot is won when a predetermined time elapses after the re-variable display is started. A combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stop-displayed as a fixed decorative symbol to be combined, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3. is output.

Next, when the big hit determination notification is executed in the SP ready-to-win effects D and E, the post effect B shown in FIGS. 21-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the announcement of the determination of the big hit, after the determined decorative symbols (for example, 666, etc.) which are predetermined combinations of the predetermined jackpots are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. In the scheduled ball payout addition part shown in (G1-1), the background image 018SG280 representing the universe, the character image 018SGA1 representing the teammate character A-1, and the scheduled payouts given in the jackpot game state displaying the expected number of payouts are displayed. A scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281 representing the number of balls is displayed, and the post effect B is started. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4. is output.

Next, in the case of the SP ready-to-win effect D, as shown in FIG. An image of the character A-1 attacking the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and an additional pitch display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281.

In addition, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. An image of the character A-1 attacking the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and an additional pitch display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack. It is added to the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21-18 (G1-2), the push button 31B is simulated when the counter value displayed in the scheduled pitch count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"). button image 018SG283, an operation prompting display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect for promoting single-pressing of the push button 31B is executed. be.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the operation effective period has passed without being detected, the character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 are displayed, the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, and the counter value of the scheduled pitches counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5. and sound effects are output.

On the other hand, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. Character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2 are displayed at the timing when the operation effective period has passed without being detected, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, and the counter value of the scheduled number-of-balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6. , sound effects and voices are output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ that disappears into a star after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown away are displayed. The expected number of put-out balls counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the expected number of put-out balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21-19 (G3), in the case of a big win B (6R big win), the counter value displayed in the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is not updated, and is controlled to the big win game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21-19 (G4), in the case of a big hit C (10R big hit), the counter value displayed in the scheduled ball number counter display 018SG281 is a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"). After the display is updated to , it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach production type determination table)
Next, in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 is executed when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern SP reach effect type In the determination process, the SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table used when determining the SP ready-to-win effect type will be described. 21-20, (A) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table A, (B) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table B, and (C) is SP ready-to-win effect type fixed table C. FIG.

In the SP reach effect type determination process, for example, a random number for SP reach effect type determination (0 to 99) is extracted, and SP reach is performed using one of the SP reach effect type determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. Determine the type of presentation.

In the SP reach effect type determination table, as shown in FIGS. Different determination values are assigned to each of the SP ready-to-win effect types for each of the "missing" so as to have the determination value numbers shown in FIGS.

When the variation pattern is the SP reach α, the SP reach effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 21-20(A) is used. Specifically, 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1" in the case of "jackpot B (6R)". In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". For the case of "missing", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the variation pattern is the SP reach β, the SP reach effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 21-20(B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PB-1", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". . In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". In the case of "missing", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-2".

That is, when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B (6R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)", the SP reach performance is performed. C is determined at a rate higher than SP reach performance B.

Also, when the variation pattern is SP reach γ, the SP reach effect type determination table C shown in FIG. 21-20(C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot C (10R)", 40 determination values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 60 determination values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". . In the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "missing", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-2" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-2".

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)", the SP reach performance is performed. E is determined at a rate higher than SP reach performance D.

(action/effect)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the enemy character X-1 is used to enter the jackpot game state. SP ready-to-win effect B) and a second specific effect (e.g., SP ready-to-win effect A) for informing whether or not to be controlled to a big win game state without displaying an enemy character can be executed, and SP ready-to-win effect can be executed. , a "movable body effect" can be executed as a special effect during the execution period of the SP ready-to-win effect. character image 018SG250B is displayed together with the effect image 018SG250B related to the character image 018SGX1, and while the effect image 018SG250B in the same manner as the SP reach effect B is displayed, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect A. However, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body production is a common light emission pattern LP3- in the case where the movable body production is executed in the SP reach production B and the case where the movable body production is executed in the SP reach production A. 2.

By doing so, the movement mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body presentation are common between the SP ready-to-reach presentation B in which the enemy character is displayed and the SP ready-to-reach presentation A in which the enemy character is not displayed. It is possible to increase the relevance between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance by whether or not the enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

More specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production B and the SP ready-to-win production A, which have different production modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 are common to the movable body production performed during the SP ready-to-win production, while the effect By setting the image 018SG250B in a display mode corresponding to each SP ready-to-win effect, it is possible to prevent the flow of the SP ready-to-win effect from being interrupted by the movable body effect.

In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect B is applied as the first specific effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to any of the SP reach effects C to E. It is possible.

Also, the execution period of the movable body production includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the production mode in the first period is common to the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 21-14 (C) is common), the production mode in the second period is different between SP reach production B to E and SP reach production A (see FIG. 21-14 (D1) 21-14 (D2-D5)). By doing so, by making the production mode common until the first period, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and the SP reach production B to E and the SP reach production A can be used until the first period. Since it is unclear which one it is, the performance interest of the SP reach performance can be improved.

Further, as the SP reach effect, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect E that displays the enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and the ratio of control to the jackpot state is when the SP reach effect B is executed. and when the SP reach effect E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern that allows execution of the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. , the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect E is 800/997. Then, in the SP ready-to-win production C, an effect image 018SG250B common to the SP ready-to-win production B corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body production to be executed when a big win is announced, and the enemy is displayed. A character image 018SGX2 representing the character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LEDs 208 in the movable body presentation performed in the SP ready-to-reach presentation C is the same as the light emission pattern of the movable body LEDs 208 in the movable body presentation performed in the SP ready-to-reach presentation B. A common emission pattern LP3-2.

By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body production are made common to reduce the manufacturing cost, while the SP reach production in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit state is different. can be increased, and attention can be paid to which SP ready-to-win performance is to be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body presentation executed in the SP reach presentation B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, so that the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image can be enhanced. , the production effect of the movable body production can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first mode (for example, SP ready-to-win effect B) and a second mode for displaying an enemy character and notifying whether or not the enemy character is used to control the big hit game state. (For example, SP ready-to-reach production D), and movable body production can be executed during the execution period of SP ready-to-reach production B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and execution of movable body production During the period, in both the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with a common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body 32, and in the case of the SP reach effect B , instead of the post-effect B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect, the post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIGS. 21-17), while the SP reach effect D is executed. In this case, a post effect B (see FIGS. 21-18 and 21-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

By doing so, the SP ready-to-win production B and the SP ready-to-win production D can share the enemy character and the movable body 32 in the movable body production to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the common enemy character X can be used. By displaying -1 with different effects, the relevance between the SP reach performances B and D and the movable body performance and the SP reach performances B and D and the post performances A and B can be enhanced, and the performance effect can be improved.

More specifically, even in the post-production after the big hit confirmation notification is performed in the SP reach production, the character displayed in the SP reach production is used to inform the re-variation result of the decoration pattern and the scheduled number of balls to be put out. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach production, notifications such as re-fluctuation result notification and scheduled number of pitches are shared in common, while the display content is made to correspond to the type of SP reach production, so that the SP reach production It is possible to show up to the post-production as a series of productions.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a special effect (for example, effect in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special mode after the movable body effect executed in the SP ready-to-win effect. Yes, in the SP ready-to-win production B, the character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out in the big hit notification before the post-production A (see FIG. 21-15 (E2)). , SP ready-to-win effect D, in post-effect B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 is flung away and then disappears into a star (see FIG. 21-19 (G1-5)). By doing so, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the type of the SP ready-to-win effect, so the effect of the effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as a special effect, the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by fading out, and the attacked enemy character X-2 is flung away and then disappears to become a star. etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. effect image, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, instead of hiding the character, various effects can be used as long as the appearance changes even if the character is not hidden, such as increasing the transmittance, decreasing the brightness, or deforming the image. Can be changed.

Further, when the SP reach effect B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state, the "jackpot" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state). B (6R)” (second advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state and the SP reach production D is executed, the “jackpot The percentage controlled to the "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state) more advantageous to the player than B (6R) (first advantageous state) is 40%. By doing so, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which of the SP ready-to-win effects B and D is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and the friend character A-1, and determines whether or not the big win game state is controlled using the enemy character X-1 and the friend character A-1. A first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D) to be notified, an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and an ally character A-1 are displayed, and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 are displayed. 1 and a second specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect E) for notifying whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state using 1, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP ready-to-win effect D In addition, by displaying and operating the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach performance D, it is given in a big win game state in which it is notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance D. It is possible to execute a post-facto effect B for notifying the scheduled number of balls to be put out, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A displayed in the SP reach effect E. -1 is displayed and operated, it is possible to execute a post-effect B for notifying the number of balls to be put out in the jackpot game state in which control in the SP ready-to-win effect E is notified, and at least for allies. The action mode of the character A-1 is common between the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect D and the post-effect B corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect E (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-19).

By doing so, by using a common ally character in the SP reach performance and the post performance, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the relationship between the SP reach performance and the post performance can be easily understood, resulting in a performance effect. can also be increased.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-19). Since it can be shared, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

In addition, since the ally character A-1 is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-19), the special character is also common. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

In addition, in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach production D, an image of the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach production E, the enemy character By displaying the images of X-2 and the friendly character A-1 fighting at the same time (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-19), each character is displayed at the same time, so that the impression of post-production B can be obtained. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as a post effect, when executing a movable body effect in the SP reach effect D, the first post effect (for example, post effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect D, and the SP A second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP ready-to-reach effect E when the movable body effect is executed in the ready-to-reach effect E, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP ready-to-reach effect A. A third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect A can be executed, and the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect E, and the SP reach. It differs depending on which of the effects A is executed.

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in the high base state, "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state) is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state). state) is 40% when the SP reach effect D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed, and the SP reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in the low base state. SP ready-to-win production A executes the ratio of control to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantage state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantage state), when 100% if

By doing so, not only is the big hit reported by the SP ready-to-win effect, but also the ratio of control to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP ready-to-win effect is executed, so that the player for the SP ready-to-win effect The degree of attention of the game can be suitably increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, as the first post-effect of the effect mode related to the first specific effect, the friend character and the enemy character displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect D are displayed. The effect is related to the first specific effect, and as the second post-effect of the effect mode related to the second specific effect, the friend character and the enemy character displayed in the SP ready-to-win effect E are displayed. The second post-effect is related to the second specific effect, and the third post-effect is related to the third specific effect by not displaying the friend character and the enemy character in the SP reach effect A and the post-effect A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The third post-effect may be related to the third specific effect.

In other words, the post-effect related to the specific effect means that if the display mode of the specific effect and at least a part of the effect mode are the same, the common effect mode is that the character is displayed or the character is not displayed. are common, the character types displayed in the specific effect and the post-effect may be different. Moreover, you may have four or more types of specific effects and post-effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be executed in the low base state, and the third specific effect can be executed in the high base state. The first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may all be effects that can be executed in the low base state, or all of them can be effects that can be executed in the high base state. That is, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may be effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

Further, as the third specific effect, it is possible to execute the SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with the enemy character X-3, which is different from the enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in the high base state. Well, in this case, the ratio controlled to the jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%)>SP reach effect E (35%)>SP reach effect D (15%). Incidentally, the post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when a big hit is reported in the SP ready-to-win effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Further, in the above SP reach production F, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body production shown in FIG. It is preferable that the sound pattern of the movable body effect shown in (C) be the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 common to the SP reach effect A to E.

In the above-described embodiment, the second advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous state is, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the planned number of balls to be put out is 10R jackpot C) and an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot B or a jackpot C controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot ends) are applied. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state is the number of balls put out, the number of game rounds, the control period of the variable probability state, the time saving state, and the small hit state than the first advantageous state, It may include a state or the like in which the falling rate of stochastic fluctuation is advantageous. Also, the big win game state or the effect mode after the end of the big win game state may be an advantageous state or the like that is advantageous to the player.

Also, when applying the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069G and 099G, for example, the SP reach effect A in the characteristic part 018SG is changed to the SP reach A and B of the characteristic parts 069G and 099G Apply, apply the SP reach effects B and C in the feature parts 018SG to the SP reach C of the feature parts 069G and 099G, and apply the SP reach effects D and E in the feature parts 018SG to the SP reach D of the feature parts 069G and 099G. It is possible.

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 018SG)
In the characteristic portion 018SG, an example is given in which the big hit game state is applied as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small win game state, time saving state (high base state). , probability change state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied as an example of the movable body is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board can be used. Alternatively, a movable body or the like provided in the frame 3 for a game machine may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, as a specific effect for notifying whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state, a form in which SP reach effects A to E for notifying whether or not to be controlled to a big hit game state is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach effect, a post effect, or the like may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, a mode in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2 that confront friendly characters A-1 and A-2 are applied as specific characters and special characters was exemplified. The game is not limited to this, and enemy characters other than those described above, other characters that do not face off against friendly characters, and the like may be applicable. Also, a character or the like made of an image in which a person is actually photographed may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, an example is given in which friendly characters A-1 and A-2 that confront enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are applied as special characters, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, ally characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront enemy characters, etc. may be applicable. Also, a character or the like made of an image in which a person is actually photographed may be used.

Further, in the characteristic portion 018SG, as a specific effect in which characters are displayed, a form is exemplified in which SP reach effects A to E in which a special character (ally character) and a specific character or a special character (enemy character) face each other are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, the specific character, and the special character may be a plurality of ally characters or enemy characters that fight together without confrontation, or a plurality of characters that do not confront each other. good.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, a mode is illustrated in which the movable body effect is applied as a special effect of causing the movable body to operate and the light emitting body to emit light. You may apply the production|presentation which operates the movable body of. Moreover, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed variously.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the execution timing of the movable body production is before the announcement of the big hit determination in the latter stage of the SP reach production A to E, but it can be changed variously such as the middle stage of the SP reach production A to E. is. Also, the movable object effect can be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, but it may be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation.

In the characteristic part 018SG, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates according to the movement of the movable body 32 in the movable body presentation. Although the embodiment has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light guide plate light emitting effect using the light guide plate device may be executed according to the operation of the movable body 32 . In this case, it is preferable that the light-emitting pattern of the light guide plate device be common to the SP reach effects A to E in the same way as the light-emitting pattern of the LEDs.

In addition, in the characterizing part 018SG, as an effect image related to the motion of the movable body 32, the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. , an effect image in a mode (for example, a mode representing impact) related to the operation mode (for example, vibration) of the movable body 32, or an effect image in a mode for emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32, or the like. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a post effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, the fixed decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are re-variably displayed. A form is illustrated in which the performance A and the post-performance B for notifying the number of balls to be put out in the big win game state notified by using the friendly characters and the enemy characters appearing in the SP ready-to-win performance are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect as long as it is an effect executed after a special effect, for example, a jackpot middle effect executed in a big win game state. Or, it may be possible to apply a small-hit middle effect executed in the small-hit game state.

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, before the end of the variable display, the post-effect B for notifying the expected number of balls to be given in the notified big win game state is executed. During the fanfare period from the start of the game to the start of the round game, the round interval between the game rounds, etc., it is possible to execute a post-production that notifies the scheduled number of balls to be given in the notified jackpot game state. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the post-effect B, as the game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be given in the big win game state notified that the SP reach effect D, E is controlled, Although a form has been exemplified in which the scheduled number of put-out balls to be given is notified so as to be identifiable, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds or the like may be notified.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, in the post-effect B, the mode of notifying the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state in which control by the SP reach effect D, E was notified was exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, for example, when the jackpot continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more, instead of or in addition to the scheduled number of balls, the first The total number of put-out balls acquired from the jackpot game state to the present time may be reported. Furthermore, when the addition is made in the scheduled ball throwing addition part in the post production B, or when the scheduled number of thrown balls is notified in the scheduled ball throwing notification part, the total number of thrown balls is a predetermined number (for example, 2500 balls, 5000 balls, etc.). ball, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.), it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls put out has exceeded a predetermined number.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, while the types of friendly characters and enemy characters to be confronted are different in the SP reach effects A to E, the operation mode of the movable bodies 32 and the display mode of the effect images 018SG250B in the movable body effects are common. Although a certain form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background images in the SP reach effects A to E, the type and execution ratio of various advance notice effects such as chance up, the battle confrontation period, and the action mode of the character , display mode, etc. may be changed according to the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the motion mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body presentation and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B be common.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, the SP ready-to-win productions D and E exemplified a mode in which the execution period of the scheduled ball-ball addition part and the scheduled ball-ball notification part in the post-production B is common. It is not limited, and the execution period of the scheduled put-out addition part or the scheduled put-out notification part may be changed according to the type of the big win, that is, the size of the expected number of put-out balls.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C can be executed in the low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E can be executed in the high base state, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the various specific effects (SP ready-to-win effects) described above may all be effects that can be executed in the low base state or all can be executed in the high base state. That is, it may be executable in any type of game state.

Although the characteristic portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these examples, and modifications and changes are made within the scope of the present invention. Any additions are included in the invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of suggesting control to the advantageous state and executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image;
By using the displayed special image, a special effect capable of executing a special effect of changing the suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a performance execution means;
state control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
a decision means capable of deciding to control to said advantageous state;
variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
with
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. and including
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is determined in the first special state. less than the number of possible variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display periods of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image when the suggestive effect is being executed, and executes the special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. game machine.

Images